Reyrolle Catalogue: Answers For Energy

Reyrolle
Protection
Devices
Reyrolle Catalogue
Answers for Energy

Index
Compact Overcurrent Argus C 7SR11 & 7SR12 1
Multifunction Overcurrent Argus M 7SR21 & 7SR22 2
Multifunction Reclose Controller Recloser M 7SR224 3
Overcurrent Argus 1, 2, 4 & 6 7SG11 4
Check Synchronising Argus 7 7SG117 5
Voltage and Frequency Argus 8 7SG118 6
Multifunction Transformer Duobias M 7SR242 7
Transformer Protection Duobias 7SG14 8
Transformer Voltage Control MicroTAPP 7SG15 9
Pilot Wire Differential Solkor R/Rf 7PG21 10
Line Current Differential Solkor N 7SG18 11
Motor Protection Rho 3 7SG17 12
Auto Reclose and Check Synchronising Tau 7SG26 13
Input/Output with Logic Iota 7SG22 14
Capacitor Bank MSCDN 7SG23 15
High Impedance Differential DAD N 7SG12 16
Distance Protection Ohmega 7SG16 17
Communication Interfaces Sigma 7SG24 18
Auxiliary Relay AR 7PG11 19
Measuring Relay MR 7PG13 20
Tripping Relay TR 7PG15 21
Supervision Relay XR 7PG17 22
Restricted Earth Fault Relay 5B3 7PG23 23
Current Guard Relay B69 7PG217 24
Surge proof Intertrip BD 7PG221 25
Surge proof Intertrip Receive GF 7PG222 26
Surge proof Intertrip Send TEC 7PG223 27
Test Block 2RMLG 7XG22 28
Siemens Protection Devices Limited 2

Reyrolle
Protection
Devices
7SR11 and 7SR12 Argus

Overcurrent Relays
Answers for energy

7SR11 and 7SR12 Argus
Overcurrent Relays
Control
79 Auto Reclose
86 Lockout
CB Control
Features
Cold Load Settings
Four Settings Groups
Password Protection – 2 levels
User Programmable Logic
Self Monitoring
Circuit Breaker Trip and Maintenance Counter
Trip Timers
Description User Interface
The 7SR11 & 7SR12 are overcurrent protection relays 20 Character x 4 Line Backlit LCD
developed to enhance the Argus family of products by Menu Navigation Keys
providing a familiar product using the latest generation of 9 User Programmable Tri-colour LEDs
hardware technology. User Language Configuration
The 7SR11 overcurrent and earth fault relays and the 7SR12
directional relays are available in single and four pole
variants. Monitoring Functions
Housed in a 4U high, size E4 case, these relays provide
protection, monitoring, instrumentation and metering with Primary/Secondary Current Phases and Earth
integrated input and output logic, data logging & fault Direction
reports. Communication access to the relay functionality is Primary/Secondary Line and Phase Voltages
via a front USB port for local PC connection or rear electrical Apparent Power and Power Factor
RS485 port for remote connection. Real and Reactive Power
W Hr & VAr Hr Forward and Reverse
Function Overview Historical Demand Record
Positive Phase Sequence (PPS) Voltage & Current
Negative Phase Sequence (NPS) Voltage & Current
Protection Zero Phase Sequence (ZPS) Voltage
37 Undercurrent
46BC
46NPS
Broken Conductor / Load Unbalance
Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent
Hardware
49 Thermal Overload
50 Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 CT 3 Binary Inputs 5 Binary Outputs
50G/N/SEF Instantaneous Earth Fault 4 CT 3 Binary Inputs 5 Binary Outputs
50BF Circuit Breaker Fail 4 CT 6 Binary Inputs 8 Binary Outputs
51 Time Delayed Overcurrent 1 CT 3 VT 3 Binary Inputs 5 Binary Outputs
51G/N/SEF Time Delayed Measured/Derived/Sensitive Earth 4 CT 3 VT 3 Binary Inputs 5 Binary Outputs
Fault 4 CT 3 VT 6 Binary Inputs 8 Binary Outputs
64H High Impedance REF
27/59 Under/Over Voltage
47 Negative Phase Sequence Voltage Data Storage and
51V Voltage Controlled Overcurrent
59N Neutral Voltage Displacement Communication
67/50 Directional Instantaneous Overcurrent
67/50G/N Directional Instantaneous Earth Fault
67/51 Directional Time Delayed Overcurrent Front USB port + Rear RS485 port
67/51G/N Directional Time Delayed Earth Fault Protocols - IEC60870-5-103, DNP3.0 or Modbus RTU
81HBL2 Inrush Detector Event Records – User Configurable
Fault Records
Supervision Waveform Records
60CTS CT Supervision Measurands
74T/CCS Trip & Close Circuit Supervision Commands
60VTS VT Supervision Time Synchronism
Viewing and Changing Settings
Application 7SR11 Functional Diagrams
The Argus is a numerical overcurrent protection relay
intended for use on distribution and industrial networks. It
provides a highly comprehensive functional software
package with a range of integral application functions aimed
at reducing installation, wiring and engineering time.
An extensive range of metered values can be viewed on the
front LCD or at a remote point via the communication
channel. Fig 1. Single Pole Overcurrent Relay
The integrated control feature allows operation of a single
circuit breaker and monitoring of its trip and close circuits.
7SR11
Function Matrix 37
49
50 50 51 60 81 51c
IL1 (x2) BF (x2) (x2) CTS HBL2
(IA)
37 50 50 51 60 81
49 51c
(x2) BF (x2) (x2) CTS HBL2
7SR1101-1*A12-**A0
7SR1101-3*A12-**A0
7SR1102-1*A12-**A0
7SR1102-3*A12-**A0
7SR1204-2*A12-**A0
7SR1204-4*A12-**A0
7SR1205-2*A12-**A0
7SR1205-4*A12-**A0 IL2
(IB)
37 50 50 51 60 81
REQUIREMENT
49 51c
(x2) BF (x2) (x2) CTS HBL2
FUNCTIONAL
IL3
(IC)
FUNCTION
46 81
46 50N 51N
NPS HBL2
BC (x2) (x2)
(x2) N
27 Undervoltage ■ ■ ■ ■
I4
37 Undercurrent ■ ■ ■ ■ (IG/ISEF) 50G 50 51 81
51G 50
(x2) SEF SEF 64H HBL2
(x2) BF
46BC Broken Conductor / Load Unbalance ■ ■ ■ ■ (x2) (x2) G
Negative Phase Sequence

46NPS ■ ■ ■ ■ 74
Overcurrent T/CCS
47 Negative Phase Sequence Voltage ■ ■ ■ ■
49 Thermal Overload ■ ■ ■ ■
50 Instantaneous Overcurrent ■ ■ ■ ■
50G Measured Instantaneous Earth Fault ■ ■ ■ ■ 79 Optional
Measured Instantaneous Sensitive
50SEF ■ ■ ■ ■
Earth Fault Fig 2. Four Pole Overcurrent Relay
50N Derived Instantaneous Earth Fault ■ ■ ■ ■
50BF CB Failure ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
51 Time Delayed Overcurrent ■ ■ ■ ■
51G Measured Time Delayed Earth Fault ■ ■ ■ ■
Measured Time Delayed Sensitive
51SEF ■ ■ ■ ■
Earth Fault
51N Derived Time Delayed Earth Fault ■ ■ ■ ■
59 Overvoltage ■ ■ ■ ■
59N Neutral Voltage Displacement ■ ■ ■ ■
High Impedance Restricted Earth
64H ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Fault
67 Directional Overcurrent ■ ■ ■ ■
67G Directional Measured Earth Fault ■ ■
67SEF Directional Sensitive Earth Fault ■ ■ ■
67N Directional Derived Earth Fault ■ ■ ■
CONTROL / MONITOR
51c Cold Load - Phase Only ■ ■ ■ ■
60CTS CT Supervision ■ ■ ■ ■
60VTS VT Supervision ■ ■ ■ ■
74T/CCS Trip & Close Circuit Supervision ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
79 Autoreclose □ □ □ □
86 Lockout ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Key - ■ - Included as standard

□ - Ordering option

7SR12 Functional Diagrams Description of Functionality
7SR12 27/59 Under/Over Voltage

Each element has settings for pickup level, drop-off level and
67/ 67/ 67/ 67/
37
50 G 51 G
81 H
50 SE 51 SE 64 H
Definite Time Lag (DTL) delays. Operates if voltage exceeds
(x2)
I1 (x4) (x4)
BL 2
F (x2) F(x2) setting for duration of delay.
(IG/ISEF)
37 Undercurrent
27
Each element has settings for pickup level and Definite Time
VL1 59 Lag (DTL) delays. Operates if current falls below setting for
(x 4)
duration of delay.
27 47 59 N
VL2 59
(x2) (x2) 46BC Phase Unbalance/Broken Conductor
(x 4)
Element has settings for pickup level and DTL delay. With the
27 circuit breaker closed, if the NPS:PPS current ratio is above
VL3 59
(x 4) 74 setting this could be due to a broken conductor.
T/
CCS
46NPS Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent
Fig 3. Single Pole Directional Relay Each element has user settings for pickup level and IDMTL or
DTL delay, operates if NPS current exceeds setting and delay.
NPS current elements can be used to detect unbalances on
7SR12 the system or remote earth faults when a delta-star
67/ 67/
transformer is in circuit.
37 50 81HBL
49 51V 50 51 51c
(x2) BF 2
IL1 (x4) (x4)
47 Negative Phase Sequence Voltage
67/ 67/
37
(x2)
49
50
BF
51V 50 51
81HBL
2 51c
Each element has settings for pickup level and Definite Time
IL2 (x4) (x4)
Lag (DTL) delays. Operates if NPS voltage exceeds setting for
37 50 67/ 67/
81HBL
duration of delay.
49 51V 50 51 51c
(x2) BF 2
IL3 (x4) (x4)
49 Thermal Overload
46 67/ 67/
60 60
46
BC
NPS
50
BF
50N
(x4)
51N
(x4)
CTS VTS The thermal algorithm calculates the thermal states from the
(x2)
measured currents and can be applied to lines, cables and
50
67/ 67/ 67/ 67/ transformers. Alarm outputs are given for thermal overload
81HBL
37
BF
50SEF(
x2)
51SEF(
x2)
50G
(x4)
51G
(x4)
64H
2 and thermal capacity.
I4
50BF Circuit Breaker Fail

74
27
VL1 59
T/CCS The circuit breaker fail function may be triggered from an
(x4)
internal trip signal or from a binary input. Line currents and
27 earth currents are monitored following a trip signal and an
VL2 59
(x4)
47 59N
output is issued if any current is still detected, above setting,
after a specified time interval. Alternatively, if the trip is
27
VL3 59 from a mechanical protection the circuit breaker position can
(x4)
be used to determine a failure. A second time delay is
available to enable another stage to be utilized if required.
An input is also available to bypass the time delays when the
79 Optional circuit breaker is known to be faulty.
Fig 4. Four Pole Directional Overcurrent Relay
Notes
1. Items shown dotted are only available in some
models; please refer to the Ordering Information
Section.
2. The use of some functions are mutually exclusive

50/51 Phase Fault 1000
50 INST/DTL and 51 IDMTL/DTL elements provide overcurrent

protection, each with independent settings for pickup
current, time-multiplier (51) and time-delays. User can select
IEC or ANSI time current characteristics. The IDMT stage has
a user programmable reset characteristic, either DTL or
shaped current ~ time reset characteristic, to improve 100
grading with electromechanical protection.
50G/51G/50N/51N Earth Fault/Sensitive Earth Fault

Time
Two earth fault measurement modes are available. One (sec)
mode directly measures the earth current from an
independent CT, or the residual connection of the 3 line CTs.
This input can be ordered as either earth fault or sensitive 10
earth fault (50G/51G).

The second mode derives the earth current internally from
the 3 phase CT inputs to give earth fault (50N/51N). 50
INST/DTL and 51 IDMTL/DTL elements provide overcurrent
current, time-multiplier (51) and time-delays. User can select 1
Moderately Inverse
IEC or ANSI time current characteristics. The IDMT stage has

Very Inverse
a user programmable reset characteristic either DTL or
shaped current ~ time reset characteristic to improve grading
with electromechanical protection.
Extremely Inverse
1000
0.1
2 3 4 5 6 8 20 30 40 50 60 80
1 10 100
Current (multiples of setting)
Fig 6. ANSI Overcurrent Curves

100
Each phase shaped overcurrent element can be
independently controlled by the level of measured input
voltage. For applied voltages above setting the 51-n
Time element operates in accordance with its current setting but
(sec)
for voltages below the setting a multiplier is applied to
reduce the 51-n pick up current setting.
10
Long Time Inverse 59N Neutral Overvoltage
Neutral overvoltage can be used to detect earth faults in
high impedance earthed or isolated systems.
Normal Inverse
Operates if the neutral voltage exceeds setting for duration
of delay.
1
Very Inverse 60CTS CT Supervision
The relay has two methods of CT supervision depending
upon the relay model. The 7SR11 monitors each phase
current input and operates if any one or two inputs fall
Extremely Inverse
below the setting. The 7SR12 considers the presence of
negative phase sequence current, without an equivalent
0.1 level of negative phase sequence voltage, for a user set time
1 2 3 4 5 6 8
10 20 30 40 50 60 80
100 as a CT failure.
Current (multiples of setting)
Both element types have user operate and delay settings.
Fig 5. IEC Overcurrent Curves
60VTS VT Supervision
The VT supervision uses a combination of negative phase
sequence voltage and negative phase sequence current to
detect a VT fuse failure. This condition may be alarmed or
used to inhibit voltage dependent functions. Element has
user operate and delay settings.

64H Restricted Earth Fault Virtual Inputs/Outputs
The measured earth fault input may be used in a 64H high There are 8 virtual inputs/outputs to provide internal logical
impedance restricted earth fault scheme to provide sensitive states to assist in the application of the functions. Each
high speed unit protection. A calculation is required to virtual I/O can be assigned in the same way as a physical I/O.
determine the values of the external series stabilising
resistor and non-linear shunt resistor which can be ordered Circuit Breaker Maintenance
separately. Two circuit breaker operations counters are provided to
assist with maintenance scheduling. The maintenance
67/67N Directional Control counter records the overall number of operations and the
Phase, earth and sensitive earth fault elements can be delta counter records the number of operations since the
directionalised. Each element can be user set to Forward, last reset.
Reverse, or Non-directional. An I2t summation counter provides a measure of the contact
Directional Phase Fault elements are polarised from wear indicating the total energy interrupted by the circuit
quadrature voltage. breaker contacts.
Derived earth fault elements can be user set to be polarised Each counter has a user set target operations count which,
from residual voltage or negative phase sequence voltage. when reached, can be mapped to raise alarms/ binary
Measured earth fault elements are polarized from Vo. outputs. A CB Trip Time meter is also available, which
measures the time between the trip being issued and the
74T/CCS Trip & Close Circuit Supervision auxiliary contacts changing state.
The trip or close circuit(s) can be monitored via binary
inputs. Trip circuit failure raises an HMI alarm and output(s). Control Mode
The relay has a control menu with access to commonly used
81HBL2 Inrush Restraint command operations. Access to the control commands is
Where second harmonic current is detected (i.e. during restricted by a 4 character control function password. Each
transformer energisation) user selectable elements can be command requires a select then execute operation, if the
blocked and an alarm given. execute operation is not performed within a time window
the command is aborted. The following control functions
51c Cold Load Pickup are available:
If a circuit breaker is closed onto a ‘cold’ load, i.e. one that CB Operation
has not been powered for a prolonged period, this can Auto Reclose In/Out
impose a higher than normal load-current demand on the Auto Reclose Trip & Reclose
system which could exceed normal settings. These Auto Reclose Trip & Lockout
conditions can exist for an extended period and must not be SEF In/Out
interpreted as a fault. To allow optimum setting levels to be Inst Prot In/Out
applied for normal operation, the cold load pickup feature Hot Line Working In/Out
will apply alternative current settings for a limited period.
The feature resets when either the circuit breaker has been
closed for a settable period, or if the current has reduced
beneath a set level for a user set period.
Standard Version – Plus 79 Auto-Reclose

A high proportion of faults on an overhead line network are
transient and can be cleared quickly by high speed tripping
followed by an automated circuit breaker reclose sequence.
The function provides independent phase fault and earth

fault / sensitive earth fault sequences of up to 5 trip i.e. 4 Fig 7. Example of Control Function View
reclose attempts before lockout. An auto-reclose sequence
can be user set to be initiated from internal protection
operation or via binary input from an external protection.
Programmable Logic
The user can map binary inputs, protection elements, LEDs
and binary outputs together in a logical scheme.
Up to 4 logic equations can be defined using standard logic
functions e.g. Timers, AND/OR gates, Inverters and Counters
to provide the user required functionality.
Each logic equation output can be used for alarm &
indication and/or tripping.

Data Acquisition - Serial Communications
Via Communication Interface
The relay offers a USB serial port as standard on the front of
all units. All of the relays functions can be set on a PC using
Sequence of event records Reydisp Evolution via the USB port. The connection is made
Up to 1000 events are stored and time tagged to 1ms with a USB cable and operates with a ‘plug and play’
resolution. connection, so no pre-setting of the relay is required.
The front port can be switched off or set to use either the
Fault Records DNP3.0, MODBUS-RTU, IEC60870-5-103 and ASCII protocols
The last 10 fault records are displayed on the relay fascia and for testing purposes.
are also available through the communication interface,
with time and date of trip, measured quantities and type of A rear RS485 electrical connection is available on all units for
fault. system interface connections. An internal terminating
resistor is provided, which can be connected into the circuit
Waveform recorder by adding a wire loop between the relevant terminals.
The waveform recorder stores analogue data for all poles
and the states of protection functions, binary inputs, LEDs
and binary outputs with user settable pre & post trigger
data. A record can be triggered from protection function,
binary input or via data communications. 10 records of 1
second duration are stored.
Demand Metering
A rolling record of demand over the last 24h is stored. The
demand is averaged over a user selectable period of time. A
rolling record of such demand averages is stored and
provides the demand history. A typical application is to Fig 8. Typical RS485 connection
record 15min averages for the last 7 days.
The rear RS485 can be user selected to be OFF, IEC60870-5-
Real Time Clock 103, MODBUS RTU or DNP3.0 protocol.
The time and date can be set and are maintained while the
relay is de-energised by a back up storage capacitor. The
time can be synchronized from a binary input pulse or the
data communication channel.

Reydisp Evolution
Reydisp Evolution is a Windows based software tool,
providing the means for the user to apply settings,
interrogate settings and retrieve events and disturbance
waveforms from the device and is common to the entire
range of Reyrolle protection relays.
Fig 10. Typical Language Editor Screenshot
Communications Editor
To facilitate easier interfacing to a substation the relays
default Protocol configuration may be modified using the
communication editor software tool.
The communication editor is a PC based software package
provided within the Reydisp software suite which allows
modification of the IEC60870-5-103, DNP 3.0 and MODBUS
Protocols.
Fig 9. Typical Reydisp Evolution Screenshot
Language Editor
The Language editor software gives the user the ability to
customize the text displayed in the relays, Menu structure
and instrumentation views. The tool allows a language file
to be created and transferred to the relay containing any
Eastern European characters
Fig 11. Typical Communications Editor Screenshot

Construction User Interface
The relay is housed in a 4U high size E4 case with a
removable clear plastic fascia cover. The plastic fascia cover
can be ordered with or without two push buttons. to allow
the user to view the settings and instruments without
removing the cover.
Two plastic handles are provided to allow the relay to be
withdrawn from its case, contacts in the case ensure that the
CT circuits and normally closed contacts remain short
circuited when the relay is withdrawn.
The rear terminal blocks comprise M4 female terminals for
ring crimp wire connections, to provide a secure and reliable
termination.
Fig 13. User Interface
The operator interface is designed to provide a user friendly

method of controlling, viewing menus, entering settings and
retrieving data from the relay. Five buttons are provided for
navigation around the menu structure.
LCD
A 4 line by 20 character liquid crystal display with power
save operation indicates the relay identifier, settings,
instrumentation, fault data and control commands.
Up to 6 user programmable general alarms can be
configured to display your own indications on the LCD.
LEDs
A green steadily illuminated LED indicates the ‘Protection
Fig 12. Rear view of relay
Healthy’ condition.
9 user programmable LEDs are available eliminating the
need for expensive panel mounted pilot lights and
associated wiring. Each LED is tri-color (red, green, yellow)
allowing for clear indication of the associated function’s
state and has a label insert for identification.
Relay Information
The device is identified by the rating label on the fascia. The
user can also give the device its own identity by editing the
‘Relay Identifier’ displayed on the LCD or space is provided to
place a slip in label giving the relays function.

Binary Inputs
Technical Data
Number 3 or 6
For full technical data refer to the Performance Specification Operating Voltage 19V dc
Section of the Technical Manual. Range 17 to 320V dc
88V
Range 74 to 320V dc
Minimum dc current for ≤ 1.5mA
Inputs and Outputs operation
Pick Up Delay User Selectable 0 to
14,400,00ms
Current Inputs
Binary Outputs
Quantity 3 x Phase & 1 x Earth or
Sensitive Earth Number 5 or 8
Rated Current IN 1/5A (3 change over contacts)
Measuring Range 80 x In Operating Voltage Voltage Free
Instrumentation ≥ 0.1xIn ±1% In Operating Mode User selectable - Self or
Frequency 50/60Hz Hand/Electrical Reset or pulsed.
Thermal Withstand: Operating Time from <20ms
Continuous 3 x In Energizing Binary Input
10 Minutes 3.5 x In Making Capacity:
2 Minutes 6 x In Carry continuously 5A ac or dc
1 Second 100A (1A) 350A (5A) Make and carry 20A ac or dc for 0.5s
1 Cycle 700A (1A) 2500A (5A) (L/R ≤ 40 ms and V ≤ 300 30A ac or dc for 0.2s
Burden @ In ≤0.02VA (1A phase and Earth V)
element) Breaking Capacity
≤0.2VA (5A phase and earth ( ≤ 5 A and ≤ 300 V):
element) AC Resistive 1250 VA
AC Inductive 250 VA at p.f. ≤ 0.4
Voltage Inputs DC Resistive 75 W
DC Inductive 30 W at L/R ≤ 40ms
Quantity 3 ph-ph 50 W at L/R ≤ 10ms
Nominal Voltage 40…160V a.c. Range
Instrumentation ≥ 0.8xVn ±1% Vn
Thermal Withstand:
Continuous 270V Unit Design
1 Second
Burden @ 110V ≤ 0.06 VA Housing E4 (see dimension drawing)
Indication 20 Character 4 line Display
Auxiliary Supply Relay Healthy LED
9 Tri Coloured User
Rated DC Voltage 110/125/220/250V Programmable Self or Hand
Range 64 to 300 Reset LED’s
24/48/60V With-drawable Element Yes
Range 18 to 72 User Interface 5 Navigation Keys
Weight Typical 3.1Kg
Power Consumption: IP Rating Installed with IP 50
Min 3.9W cover
Max 8W
Allowable superimposed 12% of DC voltage
ac component
Allowable breaks/dips in 50ms
supply (collapse to zero)

Mechanical Classification
Serial Interface
Durability >106 operations
Communication Port Front USB Type B
Protocols
Rear RS485 2 wire electrical
IEC60870-5-103
Electrical Tests
MODBUS RTU
DNP3.0 Insulation
IEC 60255-5
Data Storage Type Level

Between any terminal 2.0 kV AC RMS for 1 min
and earth
Fault Record 10 Between independent 2.0 kV AC RMS for 1 min
Waveform Record 10 x 1sec circuits
2 x 5sec
5 x 2sec Across normally open 1.0 kV AC RMS for 1 min
1 x 10sec contacts
Pre trigger 10…90%
Events 1000 1ms Resolution High Frequency Disturbance
IEC 60255-22-1 Class III
Type Level Variation

Mechanical Tests Common 2.5 kV ≤5%
(longitudinal) mode
Vibration (Sinusoidal) Series (transverse) 1.0 kV ≤5%
mode
IEC 60255-21-1 Class I
Electrostatic Discharge
Vibration response 0.5 gn ≤5% IEC 60255-22-2 Class IV
Vibration response 1.0 gn ≤5%
Shock and Bump Contact discharge 8.0 kV ≤5%
Fast Transients
Type Level Variation IEC 60255-22-4 Class IV
Shock response 5 gn, 11 ms ≤5%
Shock withstand 15 gn, 11 ms ≤5% Type Level Variation
Bump test 10 gn, 16 ms ≤5% 5/50 ns 2.5 kHz 4kV ≤5%
repetitive
Seismic
Surge Immunity
IEC 60255-22-5
X-plane - Type Level Variation
3.5mm Between all 4.0 kV ≤ 10 %
displacement terminals and earth
below crossover Between any two 2.0kV ≤ 10 %
freq (8-9Hz) 1gn independent circuits
and above
Seismic response ≤5% Conducted Radio Frequency Interference
Y-plane –
1.5mm IEC 60255-22-6
displacement
below crossover Type Level Variation
freq (8-9Hz) 0.15 to 80 MHz 10 V ≤5%
0.5gn above

Radiated Radio Frequency
IEC 60255-25 Performance
Type Limits at 10 m, Quasi-peak 27/59 Under/Over Voltage
30 to 230 MHz 40 dB(μV)
230 to 10000 MHz 47 dB(μV)
Number of Elements 4 Under or Over
Operate Any phase or All phases
Conducted Radio Frequency
Voltage Guard 1,1.5…200V
Setting Range Vs 5,5.5…200V
Type Limits Hysteresis Setting 0.0.1…80%
Quasi-peak Average Vs Operate Level 100% Vs, ±1% or ±0.25V
0.15 to 0.5 MHz 79 dB(μV) 66 dB(μV) Reset Level:
0.5 to 30 MHz 73 dB(μV) 60 dB(μV) Overvoltage =(100%-hyst)xVop, ±1%
Undervoltage =(100%+hyst)xVop, ±1%
Radiated Immunity Delay Setting td 0.00,0.01…20,20.5…100,101…
IEC 60255-22-3 Class III 1000,1010…10000,10100…144
00s
Type Level Basic Operate Time :
80 MHz to 1000 MHz Sweep 10 V/m 0 to 1.1xVs 73ms ±10ms
0 to 2.0xVs 63ms ±10ms
1.1 to 0.5xVs 58ms ±10ms
1.4GHz to 2.7GHz Sweep 10V/m
Operate time following Tbasic +td , ±1% or ±10ms
delay.
80,160,380,450,900,1850,2150 10V/m
Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input
MHz Spot
VT Supervision
Voltage Guard
Climatic Tests 37 Undercurrent
Number of Elements 2
Temperature Setting Range Is 0.05,0.10…5.0 x In
IEC 60068-2-1/2 Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1%xIn
Delay Setting td 0.00,0.01…20,20.5…100,101…
Operating Range -10 °C to +55 °C 1000,1010…10000,10100…144
Storage range -25 °C to +70 °C 00s
Basic Operate Time:
Humidity 1.1 to 0.5xIn 35ms ±10ms
IEC 60068-2-78 Operate time following Tbasic +td , ±1% or ±10ms
delay.
Operational test 56 days at 40 °C and 93 % Overshoot Time < 40ms
relative humidity Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input

46 Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent 50 (67) Instantaneous & DTL OC&EF (Directional)
Number of Elements DT & IT Operation – 7SR12 only Non directional, Forward or

DT Setting Range Is 0.05,0.10…4.0 x In reverse
DT Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1%xIn Elements Phase, Derived Earth, Measured
DT Delay Setting td 0.00,0.01…20,20.5…100,101… Earth & SEF
1000,1010…10000,10100…144 Number of Elements 2/4 x OC
00s 2 x 7SR11 2/4 x Derived EF ‘N’
DT Basic Operate Time 4 x 7SR12 2/4 x Measured EF ‘G’ where
0 to 2 xIs 40ms ±10ms fitted
0 to 5 xIs 30ms ±10ms 2/4 x SEF where fitted
DT Operate time Tbasic +td , ±1% or ±10ms Setting Range Is 0.05,0.06…50 x In
following delay. SEF 0.005…5 x In
IT Char Setting IEC NI,VI,EI,LTI ANSI MI,VI,EI & Time Delay 0.00…14400s
DTL Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1%xIn
IT Setting Range 0.05..2.5 Operate time:
Tm Time Multiplier 0.025,0.050…1.6 50 0 to 2xIs – 35ms, ±10ms,
Char Operate Level 105% Is, ±4% or ±1%In 0 to 5xIs – 25ms, ±10ms
Overshoot Time < 40ms 50N 0 to 2xIs – 40ms, ±10ms,
Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input 0 to 5xIs – 30ms, ±10ms
47 Negative Phase Sequence delay
Inrush detector
VT Supervision
Hysteresis Setting 0,0.1…80%
Operate Level 100% Vs, ±2% or ±0.5V
51(67) Time Delayed OC&EF (Directional)
Delay Setting td 0.00,0.01…20,20.5…100,101…
1000,1010…10000,10100…144
00s Operation – 7SR12 only Non directional, Forward or
Basic Operate Time reverse
0V to 1.5xVs 80ms ±20ms Elements Phase, Derived Earth, Measured
0V to 10xVs 55ms ±20ms Earth & SEF
Operate time following Tbasic +td , ±2% or ±20ms Number of Elements 2/4 x OC
delay. 2 x 7SR11 2/4 x Derived EF ‘N’
Overshoot Time < 40ms 4 x 7SR12 2/4 x Measured EF ‘G’
2/4 x SEF where fitted
Characteristic IEC NI,VI,EI,LTI ANSI MI,VI,EI &
DTL
49 Thermal Overload
Setting Range Is 0.05,0.1…2.5 x In
SEF 0.005…0.5 x In
Operate levels Operate and Alarm
Time Multiplier 0.025,0.05…1.6
Time Delay 0,0.01… 20s
Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1%xIn
Time Constant Setting 1,1.5…1000min
Minimum Operate time
Operate time ⎧⎪
t = τ × In ⎨ 2
I 2 ⋅ I p2 ⎫⎪
IEC K
)2 ⎬⎪⎭
⎪⎩ I ⋅ (k × I B top = × Tm
[ IsI ]α − 1
±5% absolute or ±100ms where ANSI ⎡ A ⎤
Ip = prior current top = ⎢ P + B⎥ ×Tm
⎣[ Is ] −1 ⎦
I
Alarm Level Disabled, 50,51…100%

Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input ± 5 % absolute or ± 30 ms
Follower Delay 0 - 20s
Reset ANSI decaying, 0 – 60s
Inrush detector
VT Supervision

51V Voltage Controlled Overcurrent 74T/CC Trip/Close Circuit Supervision
Setting Range 5,5.5…200V Number of supervisable 3 x Trip and 3 x Close

Operate Level 100% Vs, ±5% or ±1%xVn circuits
Multiplier 0.25.0.3…1 x 51Is Number of BI’s Required 1 or 2 per function
Inhibited by VT Supervision
79 AutoReclose
Operating Mode Phase, Earth, SEF External
Operation Current check - Phase and Number of Reclosures 4
Measured Earth with Number of Trips 5
independent settings Dead Time 0…14400
Mechanical Trip Reclaim Time 0…600
CB Faulty Monitor Lockout Reset CB, Timer & BI
2 Stage Time Delays Timer 1 20…60000ms Control Functions
Timer 2 20…60000ms
Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1%xIn CB Open/Close
Disengaging time < 20ms Inst Prot IN/OUT
Operate time following Tcbf ±1% or ±2ms EF IN/OUT
delay SEF IN/OUT
Triggered by Any function mapped as trip Hot Line IN/OUT
contact.
Relay Mode Local/Remote/Local or Remote
Inhibited by Binary/Virtual Input
Reset LED’s & O/P’s
Timer By pass Yes, 50BF CB Faulty Input
CB Maintenance
59N Neutral Voltage Displacement
Trip Counter Total & Delta
0…10000
Number of Elements DT & IT
Counts to AR Block 0…10000
DT Setting Range Is 1…100V
Frequent Operations 0…10000
DT Operate Level 100% Vs, ±2% or ±0.5V
I2t Alarm 10…100000
DT Delay Setting td 0 …14400s
DT Basic Operate Time
0V to 1.5 x Vs 76ms ±20ms
0V to 10 x Vs 63ms ±20ms
DT Operate time Tbasic +td , ±1% or ±20ms
following delay.
IT Char Setting IDMTL & DTL
IT Setting Range 1…100V
Tm Time 0.1…140
Multiplier(IDMT)
Delay (DTL) 0…20s
Reset ANSI Decaying, 0…60s
Char Operate Level 105% Vs, ±2% or ±0.5V
60 Supervision
CT 7SR11 Current
7SR12 Vnps & Inps
VT nps/zps
64H Restricted Earth Fault
Setting Range 0.05…0.95xIn

Time Delay 0.00… 14400s
Basic Operate Time 0 to 2 xIs 45ms ±10ms
0 to 5 xIs 35ms ±10ms

Case Dimensions
Fig 14. E4 Case Dimensions

7SR11 Connection Diagram
RS485
Fig15. Diagram showing 7SR11 relay with 4 CT inputs, 6 binary inputs and 8 binary outputs.

RS485
Fig16. Diagram showing 7SR12 relay with 4 CT inputs, 3 VT inputs, 6 binary inputs and 8 binary outputs.

Ordering Information – 7SR11 Argus Non-Directional Overcurrent
Product description Variants Order No.
Nondirectional O/C Relay 7 S R 1 1 0 □ - □□ A 1 2 - □□ A 0

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Overcurrent – Non Directional 1 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
Case I/O and Fascia | | | | | | | |
E4 case, 1 CT, 3 Binary Inputs / 5 Binary Outputs, 10 LEDs 1 | | | | | C |
E4 case, 4 CT, 3 Binary Inputs / 5 Binary Outputs, 10 LEDs 2 | | | | | | |
E4 case, 4 CT, 6 Binary Inputs / 8 Binary Outputs, 10 LEDs 3 | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
Measuring Input | | | | | | |
1/5 A, 50/60Hz1) 1 | | | | | |
1/5 A, 50/60Hz with SEF Input2) 3 | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Auxiliary voltage | | | | | |
80 to 250V DC, binary input threshold 19V DC G | | | | |
80 to 250V DC, binary input threshold 88V DC H | | | | |
24 to 60V DC, binary input threshold 19V DC J | | | | |
| | | | |
Communication Interface | | | | |
Standard version – included in all models, USB front port RS485 rear port 1 | | | |
| | | |
Protocol | | | |
IEC 60870-5-103 and Modbus RTU and DNP3 (user selectable setting) 2 | | |
| | |
Relay Cover | | |
Standard Version – No Push Buttons 1 | |
Push Buttons – Down and Right Arrows 2 | |
| |
Protection Function Packages | |
Standard version – Included in all models C |
37 Undercurrent | |
46BC3) Broken conductor/load unbalance | |
46NPS3) Negative phase sequence overcurrent | |
493) Thermal overload | |
503) Instantaneous phase fault overcurrent | |
50BF3) Circuit breaker fail | |
50G/50N Instantaneous earth fault | |
50SEF2) Instantaneous sensitive earth fault | |
513) Time delayed phase fault overcurrent | |
51G/51N Time delayed earth fault/SEF | |
51SEF2) Time delayed sensitive earth fault | |
60CTS3) CT Supervision | |
64H High Impedance REF | |
74T/CC Trip & Close circuit supervision | |
81HBL24) 2nd Harmonic Block/Inrush Restraint | |
51c3) Cold load pickup | |
Programmable logic | |
| |
Standard version – plus D |
79 Autoreclose |
|
Additional Functionality |
No Additional Functionality A
1) 4CT is configured as 3PF + EF

2) 4CT is configured as 3PF + SEF/REF
3) Functions only available in 4CT relay
4) Not available in SEF model

Ordering Information – 7SR12 Argus Directional Overcurrent
Directional O/C Relay 7 S R 1 2 0 □ - □□ A 1 2 - □□ A 0

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Compact directional Overcurrent – Directional 2 | | | | | | | |
Overcurrent and earth | | | | | | | |
Fault protection relay Case I/O and Fascia | | | | | | | |
E4 case, 1 CT, 3VT, 3 Binary Inputs / 5 Binary Outputs, 10 LEDs 4 | | | | | C |
E4 case, 4 CT, 3VT, 3 Binary Inputs / 5 Binary Outputs, 10 LEDs 5 | | | | | | |
E4 case, 4 CT, 3VT, 3 Binary Inputs / 8 Binary Outputs, 10 LEDs 6 | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
Measuring Input | | | | | | |
1/5 A, 63.5/110V, 50/60Hz1) 2 | | | | | |
1/5 A, 63.5/110V,50/60Hz with SEF Input2) 4 | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Auxiliary voltage | | | | | |
80 to 250V DC, binary input threshold 19V DC G | | | | |
80 to 250V DC, binary input threshold 88V DC H | | | | |
24 to 60V DC, binary input threshold 19V DC J | | | | |
| | | | |
Standard version – included in all models, USB front port RS485 rear port 1 | | | |
| | | |
Protocol | | | |
IEC 60870-5-103 and Modbus RTU and DNP3 (user selectable setting) 2 | | |
| | |
Relay Cover | | |
Standard Version – No Push Buttons 1 | |
Push Buttons – Down and Right Arrows 2 | |
| |
Standard version –Included in all models C |
27/59 Under/overvoltage | |
37 Undercurrent | |
46BC3) Broken conductor/load unbalance | |
46NPS3) Negative phase sequence overcurrent | |
47 Negative phase sequence voltage | |
493) Thermal overload | |
50BF3) Circuit breaker fail | |
51V3) Voltage dependent overcurrent | |
59N Neutral voltage displacement | |
60CTS3) CT supervision | |
60VTS3) VT supervision | |
67/50 Directional instantaneous phase fault overcurrent | |
67/50G 67/50N Directional instantaneous earth fault | |
50SEF2) Directional instantaneous sensitive earth fault | |
67/51 Directional time delayed phase fault overcurrent | |
67/51G 67/51N Directional time delayed earth fault | |
67/51SEF2) Directional time delayed sensitive earth fault | |
81HBL24) 2nd Harmonic Block/Inrush Restraint | |
74T/CC Trip & close circuit supervision | |
51c3) Cold load pickup | |
| |
79 Autoreclose |
|
1) 4CT is configured as 3PF + EF

2) 4CT is configured as 3PF + SEF/REF
3) Functions only available in 4CT relay
4) Not available in SEF model

Reyrolle
Protection
Devices
7SR210 & 7SR220 Argus

Overcurrent Protection Relay
Answers for energy

7SR210 7SR220 Argus Additional Functionality 7SR220n Directional Relay
47 Negative Phase Sequence (NPS) voltage
51V Voltage Dependent Overcurrent
60CTS CT Supervision
60VTS VT Supervision
67/50 Bi-Directional Instantaneous Overcurrent
67/50G/N Bi-Directional Instantaneous Earth Fault
67/51 Bi-Directional Time Delayed Overcurrent
67/51G/N Bi-Directional Time Delayed Earth Fault
81 Under/Over Frequency
Optional Functionality
79 Auto Reclose
User Interface
20 character x 4 line backlit LCD
Menu navigation keys
Description 3 fixed LEDs
8 or 16 Programmable Tri-colour LEDs (Option)
6 Programmable Function Keys each with Tri-colour LED
The 7SR210n and 7SR220n are a new generation of non- (Option)
directional and directional overcurrent protection relays,
built on years of numeric relay protection experience with
the Argus family of products. Monitoring Functions
Housed in 4U high, size E6 or E8 cases, these relays provide
protection, control, monitoring, instrumentation and meter-
ing with integrated input and output logic, data logging & Standard Monitoring Functionality
fault reports. Communication access to relay functionality is Primary current phases and earth
via a front USB port for local PC connection or rear electrical Secondary current phases and earth
RS485 port for remote connection. Additional rear port op- Positive Phase Sequence (PPS) Current
tions are available. Negative Phase Sequence (NPS) Current
Zero Phase Sequence (ZPS) Current
Binary Input/Output status
Function Overview Trip circuit healthy/failure
Time and date
Starters
Standard Functionality Fault records
37 Undercurrent Event records
46BC Broken Conductor / Load Unbalance Frequency
46NPS Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent Waveform records
49 Thermal Overload Circuit breaker trip counters
50 Instantaneous Overcurrent I2t summation for contact wear
50G/N Instantaneous Earth Fault Demand metering
51 Time Delayed Overcurrent Additional Monitoring Functionality 7SR220n Directional
51G/N Time Delayed Measured Earth Fault /SEF Relay
64H High Impedance REF Direction
74TC Trip Circuit Supervision Primary line and phase voltages
81HBL2 2nd Harmonic Block/Inrush Restraint Secondary voltages
51c Cold Load Pickup Apparent power and power factor
8 Settings Groups Real and reactive power
Password Protection – 2 levels W Hr forward and reverse
User Programmable Logic VAr Hr forward and reverse
Self Monitoring Historical demand record
Positive phase sequence (PPS) Voltage
Negative phase sequence (NPS) Voltage
Zero phase sequence (ZPS) Voltage

50/51 Phase Fault
Data Communications 50 INST/DTL and 51 IDMTL/DTL elements provide overcurrent
protection, each with independent settings for pickup cur-
rent, time-multiplier (51) and time-delays. User can select
Standard Communications Ports
IEC or ANSI Time Current Characteristics. The IDMT stage has
Communication access to relay functionality is via a front a user programmable reset characteristic, either DTL or
USB port for local PC connection or rear electrical RS485 port shaped current/time reset characteristic, to improve grading
for remote connection with electromechanical protection.
Optional Communications Ports 50G/51G/50N/51N Earth Fault/Sensitive Earth Fault

2 Rear ST fibre optic ports (2 x Tx/Rx) + IRIG-B port Two earth fault measurement modes are available. One
1 Rear RS485 + IRIG-B port mode directly measures the earth current from an inde-
1 Rear RS232 + IRIG-B port pendent CT, or the residual connection of the 3 line CTs. This
input can be set to be either earth fault or sensitive earth
Protocols fault (50G/51G). The second mode derives the earth current
IEC60870-5-103, Modbus RTU and optional DNP 3.0 internally from the 3 phase CTs (50N/51N). 50 INST/DTL and
protocols – User selectable with programmable data points 51 IDMTL/DTL elements provide overcurrent protection, each
with independent settings for pickup current, time-multiplier
Data (51) and time-delays. User can select IEC or ANSI Time Cur-
Event records rent Characteristics. The IDMT stage has a user programma-
Fault records ble reset characteristic either DTL or shaped current/time
Waveform records reset characteristic to improve grading with electromechani-
Measurands cal protection.
Commands
Time synchronism 50BF Circuit Breaker Fail
Viewing and changing settings The circuit breaker fail function may be triggered from an
internal trip signal or from a binary input. Line currents are
monitored following a trip signal and an output is issued if
Description of Functionality any current is still detected after a specified time interval.
This can be used to re-trip the CB or to back-trip an upstream
CB. A second back-trip time delay is available to enable an-
With reference to figure 7 and figure 8 ‘Function Diagrams’. other stage to be utilized if required.
64H Restricted Earth Fault - scheme

Standard Functionality The measured earth fault input may be used in a 64H high
impedance restricted earth fault scheme.
37 Undercurrent Required external series stabilising resistor and non-linear
Each element has settings for pickup level and Definite Time shunt resistor can be supplied.
Lag (DTL) delays. Operates if current falls below setting for
duration of delay. 74TC Trip Circuit Supervision
The trip circuit(s) can be monitored via binary inputs con-
46BC Phase Unbalance/Broken Conductor nected in H4/H5/H6 or H7 schemes. Trip circuit failure raises
Element has settings for pickup level and DTL delay. With the an HMI alarm and output(s).
circuit breaker closed, if one or two of the line currents fall
below setting this could be due to a broken conductor. 81HBL2 Harmonic Block / Inrush Restraint
Where second harmonic current is detected (i.e. during
6NPS Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent transformer energisation) user selectable elements can be
Two elements, one DTL and one IDMT, with user settings for blocked.
pickup level and delays, will operate if NPS Current exceeds
setting and delay. NPS Current elements can be used to de- 51c Cold Load
tect unbalances on the system or remote earth faults when a If a circuit breaker is closed onto a ‘cold’ load, i.e. one that
delta-star transformer is in circuit. has not been powered for a prolonged period, this can im-
pose a higher than normal load-current demand on the sys-
49 Thermal Overload tem which could exceed normal settings. These conditions
The thermal algorithm calculates the thermal states from the can exist for an extended period and must not be interpreted
measured currents and can be applied to lines, cables and as a fault. To allow optimum setting levels to be applied for
transformers. Outputs are available for thermal overload and normal operation, the cold load pickup feature will apply
thermal capacity. alternative settings for a limited period. The feature resets
when either the circuit breaker has been closed for a settable
period, or if the current has reduced beneath a set level for a
user set period.

Programmable User Logic
The user can map Binary Inputs and Protection operated
outputs to Function Inhibits, Logic Inputs, LEDs and/or Binary
Outputs.
The user can also enter up to 16 equations defining scheme
logic using standard functions e.g. Timers, AND/OR gates,
Inverters and Counters.
Each Protection element output can be used for Alarm &
Indication and/or tripping.
Circuit Breaker Maintenance

Two circuit breaker operations counters are provided. The
Maintenance Counters record the overall number of opera-
tions and the Delta Counter the number of operations since
the last reset.
An I2t summation Counter provides a measure of the contact
wear indicating the total energy interrupted by the circuit
breaker contacts.
Each counter has a user set target operations count which,
when reached, can be mapped to raise Alarms/ Binary Out-
puts.
These counters assist with maintenance scheduling
Function LED’s
Eight or sixteen user programmable tri-colour LED’s are
provided eliminating the need for expensive panel mounted
pilot lights and associated wiring. Each LED can be user set
to red, green or yellow allowing for clear indication of the
associated function’s state. A slip-in label pocket along-side Fig 1. Tri-colour LED’s and function keys
enables the user to insert customised notation. A printer
compatible template is available.
Function Keys
Six user programmable function keys are available for
implementing User logic and scheme control functionality,
eliminating the need for expensive panel mounted control
switches and associated wiring. Each function key has an
associated user programmable tri-color LED (red, green,
yellow) allowing for clear indication of the associated
function’s state. A slip-in label pocket along-side enables the
user to insert his own notation for the function Key LED
Identification.
Each Function Key can be mapped directly to any of the
built-in Command functions or to the User Logic equations.

Additional Functionality Data Acquisition -
Definite Time Lag (DTL) delays. Operates if voltage ‘exceeds’ Sequence of event records
setting for duration of delay. Can be applied in load Up to 5000 events are stored and time tagged to 1ms
shedding schemes. resolution.
47 Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage Fault Records

Each element has settings for pickup level and Definite Time The last 10 fault records are displayed on the relay fascia and
Lag (DTL) delays. Operates if NPS Voltage exceeds setting for are also available through the communication interface,
duration of delay. with time and date of trip, measured quantities and type of
fault.
59N Neutral Overvoltage
Two elements, one DTL and one IDMTL, have user settings Waveform recorder
for pickup level and delays. These will operate if the Neutral The waveform recorder stores analogue data for all poles
voltage exceeds the setting for duration of delay. Neutral and the states of protection functions, binary inputs, LEDs
overvoltage can be used to detect earth faults in high and binary outputs with user settable pre & post trigger
impedance earthed or isolated systems. data. A record can be triggered from protection function,
binary input or via data communications. Waveform storage
60CTS CT Supervision is selectable from either 10 records of 1 second, 5 records of
The CT Supervision considers the presence of negative phase 2 seconds, 2 records of 5 seconds or 1 record of 10 seconds
sequence current, without an equivalent level of negative duration.
phase sequence voltage, for a user set time as a CT failure.
Element has user operate and delay settings. Demand Monitoring
60VTS VT Supervision demand is averaged over a user selectable period of time. A
The VT Supervision uses a combination of negative phase rolling record of such demand averages is stored and
sequence voltage and negative phase sequence current to provides the demand history. A typical application is to
detect a VT fuse failure. This condition may be alarmed or record 15min averages for the last 7 days.
used to inhibit voltage dependent functions. Element has
user operate and delay settings. Real Time Clock
67/67N Directional Control relay is de-energised by a back up storage capacitor. The
Phase fault, Earth fault and Sensitive Earth fault elements time can be synchronized from a binary input pulse or the
can be directionalised. Each element can be user set to For- data communication channel.
ward, Reverse, or Non-directional.
Directional Phase fault elements are polarised from quadra- Data Log
ture voltage. The average values of voltages, current and real & reactive
Earth fault elements can be user set to be polarised from power are recorded at a user selectable interval and stored
residual voltage or negative phase sequence voltage. to provide data in the form of a Data Log which can be
downloaded for further analysis. A typical application is to
81 Under/Overfrequency record 15 minute intervals over the last 7 days.
Definite Time Lag (DTL) delays. Operates if frequency ex-
ceeds setting for duration of delay. Typically applied in load
shedding schemes.
79 Auto-Reclose
This function provides independent Phase fault and Earth
Fault/Sensitive Earth fault sequences of up to 5 Trips i.e. 4
Reclose attempts before Lockout. Auto-Reclose sequence can
be user set to be initiated from internal protection operation
or via Binary Input from an external Protection. The user can
set each trip in the sequence to be either instantaneous
(Fast) or delayed. Independent times can be set by the user
for Reclose (Dead) time and Reclaim time.

Burden @ In ≤0.1VA (1A phase and Earth
Reydisp Evolution element)
≤0.3VA (5A phase and earth
element)
Voltage Inputs
Quantity 4
Instrumentation ≥ 0.8 xVn ±1% Vn
Thermal Withstand:
Continuous 300V
1 Second
Burden @ 110V ≤ 0.1VA
DC Auxiliary supply
Nominal voltage Operating Range V dc

30/48/110/220/ V dc Range 24 to 290V dc
Allowable superimposed ac 12% of DC voltage
component
supply (collapse to zero)
Auxiliary supply: Burdens
Fig 2. Typical Reydisp Evolution screenshot

Power Consumption Quiescent Quiescent
Reydisp Evolution is common to the entire range of Reyrolle (typical) (back-light on)
numeric products. It provides a means for the user to apply 30V dc 6.0W 7.0W
settings, interrogate settings and also to retrieve events & 48V dc 5.5W 6.5W
disturbance waveforms from the relay. 110V dc 6.5W 7.5W
220V dc 7.5W 8.5W
Binary Inputs
Technical Data
Operating Voltage 19V dc: Range 17 to 290V dc
For full technical data refer to the Performance Specification 88V: Range 74 to 290V dc
Section of the Technical Manual. Maximum dc current for 1.5mA
operation
Inputs and Outputs Binary Outputs
Operating Voltage Voltage Free

Current Inputs
Operating Mode User selectable - Self or
Hand Reset
Quantity 3 x Phase & 1 x Earth or Contact Operate / Release 7ms / 3ms
Sensitive Earth Time.
Rated Current IN 1/5A Making Capacity:
Measuring Range 80 xIn Carry continuously 5A ac or dc
Instrumentation ≥ 0.1xIn ±1% In Make and carry 20A ac or dc for 0.5s
Frequency 50/60Hz (L/R ≤ 40 ms and V ≤ 300 V) 30A ac or dc for 0.2s
Thermal Withstand: Breaking Capacity
Continuous 3.0 xIn ( ≤ 5 A and ≤ 300 V):
10 Minutes 3.5 xIn AC Resistive 1250VA
5 Minutes 4.0 xIn AC Inductive 250VA at p.f. ≤ 0.4
3 Minutes 5.0 xIn DC Resistive 75W
2 Minutes 6.0 xIn DC Inductive 30W at L/R ≤ 40ms
3 Seconds 57.7A (1A) 202A (5A) 50W at L/R ≤ 10ms
2 Seconds 70.7A (1A) 247A (5A)
1 Second 100A (1A) 350A (5A)
1 Cycle 700A (1A) 2500A (5A)

Fast Transients
Mechanical Tests IEC 60255-22-4 Class IV
Vibration (Sinusoidal) Type Level Variation

5/50ns 2.5kHz 4kV ≤ 5%
repetitive
Surge Immunity
Vibration response 0.5gn ≤5%
IEC 60255-22-5
Vibration endurance 1.0gn ≤5%
Shock and Bump Type Level Variation

Between all 4.0kV
terminals and earth
Between any two 2.0kV ≤ 10% or 1mA
Type Level Variation independent circuits
Shock response 5gn, 11ms ≤5%
Shock withstand 15gn, 11ms ≤5% Conducted Radio Frequency Interference
Bump test 10gn, 16ms ≤5%
IEC 60255-22-6
Seismic
IEC 60255-21-3 Class I 0.15 to 80MHz 10V ≤ 5%
Type Level Variation Radiated Radio Frequency

Seismic response 1gn ≤5%
IEC 60255-25
Type Limits at 10m, Quasi-peak
30 to 230MHz 40dB(μV/m)
Durability >106 operations 230 to 10000MHz 47dB(μV/m)
Electrical Tests Conducted Radio Frequency
Type Limits
Insulation Quasi-peak Average
IEC 60255-5 0.15 to 0.5MHz 79dB(μV) 66dB(μV)
0.5 to 30MHz 73dB(μV) 60dB(μV)
Type Level
Between any terminal 2.0kV AC RMS for 1min Radiated Immunity
and earth IEC 60255-22-3 Class III
Between independent 2.0kV AC RMS for 1min
circuits Type Level Variation
80MHz to 1000MHz 10V/m ≤ 5%
Across normally open 1.0kV AC RMS for 1min
contacts
Magnetic Field with Power Frequency
IEC 61000-4-8, Class V
High Frequency Disturbance
IEC 60255-22-1 Class III Type Level
100A/m (0.126mT) continuous 50Hz
Type Level Variation 1000A/m (1.26mT) for 3s
Common 2.5kV ≤ 5%
(longitudinal)
Series (transverse) 1.0kV ≤ 5%
mode
IEC 60255-22-2 Class IV

Contact discharge 8.0kV ≤ 5%

Basic Operate Time: - 35ms ±10ms
Environmental Tests 1.1 to 0.5xIn
Operate time following tbasic +td , ±1% or ±10ms
delay.
Temperature
Overshoot Time < 40ms
IEC 60068-2-1/2 Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input
Operating Range -10°C to +55°C 46 Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent

Storage range -25°C to +70°C
Humidity
DT Setting Range Is 0.05,0.10…4.0 x In
IEC 60068-2-3 DT Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1%xIn
DT Delay Setting td 0.00,0.01…20,20.5…100,101…
Operational test 56 days at 40°C and 95% relative 1000,1010…10000,10100…..…
humidity 14400s
DT Basic Operate Time –
IP Ratings 0 to 2 xIs 40ms ±10ms
IEC 60529 0 to 5 xIs 30ms ±10ms
DT Operate time tbasic +td , ±1% or ±10ms
Type Level following delay.
Installed with cover IP 50 from front of relay IT Char Setting IEC NI,VI,EI,LTI ANSI MI,VI,EI &
DTL
Installed with cover IP 30 from front of relay IT Setting Range 0.05, 0.06..2.5 xIn
removed Tm Time Multiplier 0.025,0.050…1.6
Char Operate Level 105% Is, ±4% or ±1% xIn
For full technical data refer to the Performance Specification Overshoot Time < 40ms
Section of the Technical Manual. Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input
47 Negative Phase Sequence Voltage

Performance
27/59 Under/Over Voltage Setting Range Vs 1,1.5…90V
Number of Elements 4 Under or Over Operate Level 100% Vs, ±2% or ±0.5V
Operate Any phase or All phases Delay Setting td 0.00,0.01…20,20.5…100,101…
Voltage Guard 1, 1.5…200V 1000,1010…10000,10100…..…
Setting Range Vs 5,5.5…200V 14400s
Hysteresis Setting 0,0.1…80% Basic Operate Time: -
Vs Operate Level 100% Vs, ±1% or ±0.25V 0V to 2.0xVs 80ms ±20ms
0V to 10xVs 55ms ±20ms
Reset Level: -
Undervoltage =(100%+hyst) xVop, ±1% or 0.25V Operate time following tbasic +td , ±2% or ±20ms
Overvoltage =(100%-hyst) xVop, ±1% or 0.25V delay.
Delay Setting td 0.00,0.01…20,20.5…100,101…10 Overshoot Time < 40ms
00,1010…10000,10100…14400s Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input
Basic Operate Time: -
0 to 1.1xVs 73ms ±10ms 49 Thermal Overload
1.1 to 0.5xVs 58ms ±10ms Operate levels Operate and Alarm
Operate time tbasic +td , ±1% or ±10ms Setting Range Is 0.10,0.11…3.0 xIn
following delay. Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1% xIn
Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input Time Constant Setting 1,1.5…1000min
VT Supervision, Voltage Guard Operate time ⎧⎪ I 2
− I 2
⎫⎪
t = τ × In ⎨
p
⎬
⎪⎩ I 2
− (k × I B
)2 ⎪⎭
37 Undercurrent ±5% absolute or ±100ms
where Ip = prior current
Number of Elements 2 Capacity Alarm Level Disabled, 50,51…100%
Setting Range Is 0.05,0.10…5.0 x In Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input
Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1% xIn
Delay Setting td 0.00,0.01…20,20.5…100,101…
1000,1010…10000,10100……..
14400s

50 (67) Instantaneous & DTL OC & EF (Directional) 51V Voltage Controlled Overcurrent
Operation Non directional, Forward or Setting Range 5,5.5…200V

reverse Operate Level 100% Vs, ±5% or ±1% xVn
Elements Phase, Derived Earth, Measured Multiplier 0.25.0.3…1
Earth & SEF Inhibited by VT Supervision
Number of Elements 4 x OC
4 x Derived E/F ‘N’ 50BF Circuit Breaker Fail
4 x Measured E/F ‘G’
4 x SEF Operation Current check - Phase and
Setting Range Is: - Measured Earth with
O/C 0.05,0.06…50 xIn independent settings,
Derived E/F ‘N’ 0.05,0.06…50 xIn Mechanical Trip,
Measured E/F ‘G’ 0.005…25 xIn CB Faulty Monitor
SEF 0.005…5 xIn Setting Range Is 0.05,0.055…2.0 xIn
Time Delay 0.00…14400s 2 Stage Time Delays Timer 1 20…60000ms
Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1% xIn Timer 2 20…60000ms
Operate time Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1% xIn
0 to 2xIs – 35ms, ±10ms, Basic Operate time < 20ms
0 to 5xIs – 25ms, ±10ms
Operate time following tdelay ±1% or ±20ms
Operate time following tbasic +td , ±1% or ±10ms delay
delay
Triggered by Any function mapped as trip
Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input contact.
Inrush detector Inhibited by Binary/Virtual Input
VT Supervision
51(67) Time Delayed OC&EF (Directional)
Operation Non directional, Forward or

Number of Elements NDT & NIT
reverse
NDT Operate Level 100% Vs, ±2% or ±0.5V
Elements Phase, Derived Earth, Measured
NDT Delay Setting td 0, 0.01 20, 20.5… 100,
Earth & SEF
101… 1000, 1010… 10000,
Number of Elements: - 4 x OC
10100… 14400s
4 x Derived EF ‘N’
NDT Basic Operate Time: -
4 x Measured EF ‘G’
0V to 1.5 xVs 76ms ±20ms
4 x SEF
0V to 10 xVs 63ms ±20ms
Characteristic IEC NI,VI,EI,LTI ANSI MI,VI,EI &
NDT Operate time tbasic +td , ±1% or ±20ms
DTL
following delay.
Setting Range Is: -
NDT & NIT Setting Range Is 1, 1.5…100V
O/C 0.05,0.06…2.5 xIn
Tm Time Multiplier(IDMT) 0.1, 0.2… 10, 10.5… 140
Derived E/F ‘N’ 0.05,0.06…2.5 xIn
Measured E/F ‘G’ 0.005…1 xIn Delay (DTL) 0, 0.01…20s
SEF 0.005…1 xIn Reset ANSI decaying, 0 … 60s
Time Multiplier 0.025,0.05…1.6 NIT Operate Level 105% Vs, ±2% or ±0.5V
Time Delay 0,0.01… 20s Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input
Minimum Operate time K 60 Supervision
top = × Tm
IEC [ IsI ]α − 1
⎡ A ⎤ CT (7SR210n) CTS-I
top = ⎢ P + B⎥ ×Tm
ANSI ⎣[ Is ] −1 ⎦
I (7SR220n) CTS-I, CTS Vnps, CTS Inps
VT (7SR220n) VTS Vnps, VTS Vzps
± 5 % absolute or ± 30 ms Delay 0.03, 0.04… 20.00, 20.50… 100, 101…
Follower Delay 0 - 20s 1000, 1010…10000, 10100… 14400s
Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input 64H Restricted Earth Fault
Inrush detector
VT Supervision Setting Range 0.005…0.95 xIn
Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1% xIn
Time Delay 0.00… 14400s

Case Dimensions
Fig 3. E6 Case overall dimensions and panel drilling details (All dimensions in are mm)
Fig 4. E8 Case overall dimensions and panel drilling details (All dimensions are in mm)

2
+ve 7SR210n 1 1 2 1 2 1 2
-ve BI 10 BO 9
4 3
+ve
6
-ve BI 11 BO 10
5
C B A Data
8 7
Comms
+ve Optional PSU Analogue
10 9 (Optional)
BI 12 BO 11 I/O
11
+ve
12 13
BI 13 BO 12 27 28 27 28 27 28
15
+ve
14 17
BI 14 BO 13 Rear View
19 Arrangement of terminals and modules
+ve BO 14
16 21
-ve BI 15
18 23
+ve BO 15
20 25
BI 16 BO 16 NOTES
27
+ve
22 BI = Binary Input
BI 17 BO = Binary Output
+ve
24
BI 18
+ve Shows contacts internal to relay case
26
BI 19 assembly.
28
-ve C Contacts close when the relay chassis is
withdrawn from case
1
+ve
22
BO 1
-ve
24
3
28 GND. 5
BO 2 7
+ve 9
2
-ve BI 1 11
4
6
+ve BO 3 13
-ve BI 2 15
8
+ve 17
10
BI 3 BO 4
-ve 19
12
21
14 A BO 5
23
RS485
16 Screen
25
18 B BO 6
27
20 Term.
B 26
1A 17
1 BO 7
19
2 IL1
5A 21
3 (IA)
BO 8
23
4
1A +ve
5 18
BI 4
6 IL2
5A (IB) +ve
7 20
BI 5
8
1A +ve
9 22
BI 6 -ve
10 IL3 25
5A (IC)
11 +ve
24
12 BI 7
1A
13 +ve
26
14 BI 8
5A I4 (IG/ISEF)
15 +ve
28
BI 9
16
A -ve
27
Fig 5. 7SR210 Wiring Diagram

2
+ve 7SR220n 1 1 2 1 2 1 2
-ve BI 4 BO 7
4 3
+ve
6
-ve BI 5 BO 8
5
C B A Data
8 7
Comms
+ve Optional PSU Analogue
10 9 (Optional)
BI 6 BO 9 I/O
11
+ve
12 13
BI 7 BO 10 27 28 27 28 27 28
15
+ve
14 BO 11 17
BI 8 Rear View
BO 12 19 Arrangement of terminals and modules
+ve
16 21
-ve BI 9
18 BO 13 23
+ve
20 BO 14 25
BI 10 NOTES
27
+ve
22 BI = Binary Input
BI 11 BO = Binary Output
+ve
24
BI 12
+ve Shows contacts internal to relay case
26
BI 13 assembly.
28
-ve C Contacts close when the relay chassis is
withdrawn from case
1
+ve
22
BO 1
-ve
24
3
28 GND. 5
BO 2 7
+ve
2 9
-ve BI 1
4 11
6
+ve BO 3 13
-ve BI 2
8 15
+ve
10 17
BI 3 BO 4
-ve
12 19
21
14 A BO 5
23
RS485
16 Screen
25
18 B BO 6
27
20 Term.
B 26
1A 1A
1 17
2 IL1 I5 18
5A (IA) (ISEF) 5A
3 19
4 20
1A
5
6 IL2 VL1 21
5A (IB) (VA)
7 22
1A VL2 23
9
(VB) 24
10 IL3
5A (IC)
11
VL3 25
12
(VC) 26
1A
13
14 I4
V4 27
5A (IG)
15
(VX) 28
16 A

Function Diagrams for 7SR210 & 7SR220
7SR21
81 60
37 50 50 51
49 HBL CTS-
IL1 (x2) BF (x2) (x2)
2 I
(IA)
81 60
37 50 50 51
49 HBL CTS-
IL2 (x2) BF (x2) (x2)
2 I
(IB)
81 60
37 50 50 51
49 HBL CTS-
IL3 (x2) BF (x2) (x2)
2 I
(IC)
46 81
46 50N 51N
NPS HBL
BC (x2) (x2)
(x2) 2N
I4
(IG/ISEF) 50 51
64 50G 51G 37G
SEF SEF
REF (x2) (x2) (x2)
(x2) (x2)
74
TCS
79 Optional
Fig 7. 7SR210 Function Diagram
7SR22
60 67/ 67/ 81
37 50
49 CTS- 51V 50 51 HBL
IL1 (x2) BF
I (x4) (x4) 2
(IA)
60 67/ 67/ 81
37 50
49 CTS- 51V 50 51 HBL
IL2 (x2) BF
I (x4) (x4) 2
(IB)
60 67/ 67/ 81
37 50
49 CTS- 51V 50 51 HBL
IL3 (x2) BF
I (x4) (x4) 2
(IC)
46 67/ 67/ 81
46 60 60
NPS 51c 50N 51N HBL
BC CTS VTS
(x2) (x4) (x4) 2N
67/ 67/
50 37G
37 50G 51G
I4 BF (x2)
(x4) (x4)
(IG)
67/ 67/
50 64 37S
37 50S 51S
I5 BF H (x2)
(x4) (x4)
(ISEF)
NOTE: The use of some

functions are mutually exclusive
27
VL1
59
(VA)
(x4)
27
VL2 47 81
59
(VB) (x2) (x6)
(x4)
27
VL3 59N 74
59
(VC) (x2) TCS
(x4)
V4 27
(VX) 59
79 Optional

Ordering Information – 7SR210 Overcurrent Relay
Nondirectional O/C Relay 7 S R 2 1 0 □▲ - 1 □▲ A □▲ □▲ - 0 □▲ A

▲ ▲ ▲
Multi function overcurrent | | | | | | | |
and earth fault protection | | | | | | | |
relay Protection Product | | | | | | | |
Overcurrent – Non Directional 1 | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
Case I/O and Fascia 1) | | | | | | |
E6 case, 4 CT, 9 Binary Inputs / 8 Binary Outputs, 8 LEDs 2 | | | | | |
E8 case, 4 CT, 19 Binary Inputs / 16 Binary Outputs, 16 LEDs 3 | | | | | |
E8 case, 4 CT, 19 Binary Inputs / 16 Binary Outputs, 8 LEDs + 6 Keys 4 | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Measuring Input | | | | | |
1/5 A, 50/60Hz 1 | | | | |
| | | | |
Auxiliary voltage | | | | |
30 to 220V DC, binary input threshold 19V DC A | | | |
30 to 220V DC, binary input threshold 88V DC B | | | |
| | | |
Communication Interface | | | |
Standard version – included in all models, USB front port, RS485 rear port 1 | | |
Standard version – plus additional rear F/O ST connectors (x2) and IRIG-B 2 | | |
Standard version – plus additional rear 1x RS485 and IRIG-B 3 | | |
| | |
Protocol | | |
IEC 60870-5-103 and Modbus RTU (user selectable setting) 1 | |
IEC 60870-5-103, Modbus RTU and DNP3.0 (user selectable setting) 2 | |
| |
37 Undercurrent | |
46BC Broken conductor/load unbalance | |
46NPS Negative phase sequence overcurrent | |
49 Thermal overload | |
50 Instantaneous phase fault overcurrent | |
50BF Circuit breaker fail | |
50G/50N Instantaneous earth fault | |
51 Time delayed phase fault overcurrent | |
51G/51N Time delayed earth fault/SEF | |
60CTS-I CT Supervision | |
74TC Trip circuit supervision | |
81HBL2 2nd harmonic block/inrush restraint | |
Cold load pickup | |
| |
79 Autoreclose |
|
1) 4CT is configured as 3PF + EF/SEF (user selectable setting).

2) For ESI48-4 compliance of binary inputs external resistors are required.

Ordering Information – 7SR220 Directional Overcurrent Relay
Directional O/C Relay 7 S R 2 2 0 □▲ - 2 □ A □▲ □▲ - 0 □▲ A

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Multi function overcurrent | | | | | | | |
and earth fault protection | | | | | | | |
relay Protection Product | | | | | | | |
Overcurrent – Directional 2 | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
Case I/O and Fascia 1) | | | | | | |
E6 case, 5 CT, 4 VT, 3 Binary Inputs / 6 Binary Outputs, 8 LEDs 2 | | | | C |
E8 case, 5 CT, 4 VT, 13 Binary Inputs / 14 Binary Outputs, 16 LEDs 3 | | | | | |
E8 case, 5 CT, 4 VT, 13 Binary Inputs / 14 Binary Outputs, 8 LEDs + 6 Keys 4 | | | | | |
| | | | | |
1/5 A, 63.5/110V, 50/60Hz 2 | | | | |
| | | | |
| | | |
| | |
Protocol | | |
IEC 60870-5-103, Modbus RTU and DNP3.0 (user selectable setting) 2 | |
| |
27/59 Under/overvoltage | |
37 Undercurrent | |
37G Ground Undercurrent | |
37SEF SEF Undercurrent | |
46BC Broken conductor/load unbalance | |
46NPS Negative phase sequence overcurrent | |
47 Negative phase sequence voltage | |
49 Thermal overload | |
50BF Circuit breaker fail | |
51V Voltage controlled overcurrent | |
59N Neutral voltage displacement | |
60CTS CT supervision | |
60CTS-I CT Supervision | |
60VTS VT supervision | |
67/50 Directional instantaneous phase fault overcurrent | |
67/50G 67/50N Directional instantaneous earth fault | |
67/51 Directional time delayed phase fault overcurrent | |
67/51G 67/51N Directional time delayed earth fault/SEF | |
74TC Trip circuit supervision | |
81 Under/over frequency | |
81HBL2 2nd harmonic block/inrush restraint | |
Cold load pickup | |
| |
79 Autoreclose |
|
1) 5CT is configured as 3PF + EF + SEF/REF (user selectable setting).


Reyrolle
Protection
Devices
7SR224 Argus
Recloser Controller
Answers for energy

7SR224 Argus
Recloser Controller
Function Overview
Standard Functionality
27/59 Under/Overvoltage
27Sag/59Swell SARFIx Power Quality Counters
37 Undercurrent
46BC Broken Conductor / Load Unbalance
47NPS Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage
49 Thermal Overload –Pole Segregated
51c Cold Load Pickup
Description 60CTS
60VTS
CT Supervision
VT Supervision
64H High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault (EF)
The 7SR224 Recloser Controller is one of a range of new 67/50 Directional Instantaneous Phase Fault O/C
generation devices providing comprehensive directional and 67/50G Directional Instantaneous Earth Fault O/C
non-directional overcurrent protection integrated with 67/51 Directional Time Delayed Phase Fault O/C
associated protection elements and Autoreclose scheme 67/51G Directional Time Delayed Earth Fault O/C
logic. It builds on the years of in-service experience gained 67/50SEF Directional Instantaneous Sensitive EF
from the Argus family of products. The Controller provides 67/51SEF Directional Time Delayed Sensitive EF
independent Phase Fault, Earth Fault and Sensitive Earth 74TCS Trip Circuit Supervision H4/5/6/7 schemes
Fault autoreclose sequences. Each sequence can be user set 79 Autoreclose
to any mix of Instantaneous (fast time current characteristic 81 Under/Over Frequency
(TCC)) or Delayed TCC protection and independent Reclose 81HBL2 Inrush Restraint
(Dead) times. The Controller also provides a separate 86 Lockout
Autoreclose sequence for external protection. User Programmable Logic, via HMI
Functions included are: - 8 Settings Groups - Password access - 2 levels
Control, monitoring, instruments, Voltage - Sag & Swell, Self Monitoring
together with integrated input and output logic, data
logging & fault report functions. Optional Functionality
Controllers are housed in 4U high, size E10 or E12 cases. Loop Automation by Loss of Voltage
Single /Triple Pole Autoreclose for Three Single Pole Circuit
Breakers
User Interface
3 fixed function LEDs
8 or 16 Programmable Tri-colour LEDs
12 Programmable Function Keys with Tri-colour LEDs

Monitoring Functions Description of Functionality
Fault Data Mode – displays Date & Time, Type of fault and With reference to figure 7: ‘Function Diagram’.
currents & voltages for each of last 10 faults.
Favourite (Default) meters – User selectable from:- 27/59 Under/over Voltage
Currents - Primary, Secondary, xIn, Earth/SEF, Sequence 4 elements which can be set independently as Under or
Components and 2nd Harmonic, overvoltage. Each element has settings for pickup level and
Voltages – Primary, Secondary xVn, Ph-Ph and Ph-n, Definite Time Lag (DTL) delays, operates if voltage ‘exceeds’
Sequence Components, Calculated Earth Voltage, Neutral setting for duration of delay, Typically applied in load
Voltage Displacement (Vx) Voltage. shedding schemes.
Frequency
Power – MW, MVar, MVA, Power Factor 37 Undercurrent
Energy – Export & Import - MWh, MVarh,
2 element with settings for pickup level and Definite Time
Direction – Load Flow Indication
Lag (DTL) delays. Each operates if current falls below its
Thermal capacity – %
setting for duration of its delay.
Autoreclose – status and shot number
CB Maintenance:
46BC Broken Conductor
2 Independent Trip Counters,
Frequent Operations Counter Each element has settings for pickup level and DTL delay.
Lockout handle operations counter With the circuit breaker closed, if the NPS / PPS current ratio
I2t summation for contact wear is above setting this could be due to a broken conductor.
General alarms
Battery Condition monitoring and automatic cyclical test. 46NPS Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent
Power quality – 27 Sag and 59 Swell (Per pole Counters for Two elements, one DTL and one IDMT, with user settings for
SIARFIx, SMARFIx, STARFIx and Interruption Events,) pickup levels and delays. NPS Current elements can be used
Binary Input status indication to detect unbalances on the system. The negative sequence
Binary Output status indication phase component of current is derived from the three phase
Virtual internal status indication currents. It is a measure of the quantity of unbalanced
Communications Meters current on the system.
Miscellaneous Meters, Date, Time, Waveform, Fault, Event &
Data Log records-counters. 47NPS Negative Phase Sequence OverVoltage
Demand Monitoring Two DTL elements with independent user settings for NPS
overvoltage pickup level and delays. NPS Voltage elements
can be used to detect unbalances on the system. The
Data Storage & Communications negative sequence phase component of voltage is derived
from the three phase voltages. It is a measure of the
quantity of unbalanced voltage on the system.
Standard Communications Ports
Communication access to relay functionality is via a front 49 Thermal Overload
USB port for local PC connection or rear electrical RS485 port The thermal algorithm calculates the thermal state of each
for remote connection pole from the measured currents and can be applied to lines,
cables and transformers; operates if the user set thermal
Optional Communications Ports overload is exceeded. Capacity Alarm operates if a user set
2 Rear ST fibre optic ports (2 x Tx/Rx) + IRIG-B port percentage of overload is reached.
1 additional Rear RS485 port + IRIG-B port
1 additional Rear RS232 port + IRIG-B port 50BF Circuit Breaker Fail
The circuit breaker fail function may be triggered from an
Protocols internal trip signal or from a binary input. All measured
IEC60870-5-103, Modbus RTU and DNP 3.0 protocols – User currents can be monitored following a trip signal and an
selectable with programmable data points output is issued if any current is still detected after a
specified time interval. This can be used to re-trip the CB or
Data to back-trip an upstream CB. A second back-trip time delay is
Event records provided to enable another stage to be utilized if required.
Fault records
Waveform records 59N Neutral Overvoltage
Measurands Two elements, one DTL and one IDMTL, have user settings
Commands for pickup level and delays. These will operate if the Neutral
Time synchronism voltage exceeds the setting for duration of delay. Neutral
Viewing and changing settings overvoltage can be used to detect earth faults in high
impedance earthed or isolated systems.

67/50 Phase Fault Elements Where multiple elements are provided two could be set for
Provide Directional Instantaneous or Definite Time (DTL) Forward and two for Reverse, thus providing Bi-Directional
Overcurrent protection, with independent settings for pickup Tri-state protection is a single device.
current and time-delay. Phase Fault elements are polarised from the calculated
Four elements are provided. quadrature voltage i.e. Ia~Vbc, Ib~Vca & Ic~Vab.
Elements can be Inrush-inhibited Earth Fault/SEF elements are polarized from internally
calculated Zero sequence Voltage, i.e. Io~Vo.
67/51 Phase Fault Elements
Provide Directional - Inverse Definite Time Overcurrent 51c Cold Load
protection, TCC/DTL with independent settings for pickup When a circuit breaker is closed onto a ‘cold’ load, i.e. one
current, TCC and minimum/follower time-delay. that has not been powered for a prolonged period, this can
Four elements are provided. impose a higher than normal load-current demand on the
User can select the TCC from standard IEC/ANSI or Legacy system which could exceed ‘Normal settings’. These
Characteristics e.g. 101 (A) etc. Reset TCC can be user set to conditions can exist for an extended period and must not be
either DTL or shaped, to integrate grading with interpreted as a fault. To allow optimum setting levels to be
electromechanical or other protection devices. applied for normal operation, Cold Load causes the 67/51
elements to change to 67/51c settings i.e. Setting/TCC/Time
Earth Fault/Sensitive Earth Fault Multiplier /Follower delay times, for a limited period. Cold
The Earth Fault current is measured directly via a dedicated Load resets and returns to ‘Normal settings’ when either the
current analogue input. This input is used for both Earth circuit breaker has been closed for a User set period, or if the
Fault and Sensitive Earth Fault elements. current has fallen to below a set level for a set time and it is
safe to return.
67/50G Earth Fault
Provide Directional Instantaneous or Definite Time (DTL) 51V Voltage Dependent OverCurrent
earth fault protection, with independent settings for pickup Element has settings for UnderVoltage pickup level and
current and time-delay. operates if voltage falls below setting. On Pick-up this
Four elements are provided. element applies the set 51v Multiplier to the pickup setting
Elements can be Inrush-inhibited. of the 67/51 phase fault elements.
67/51G Earth Fault 60CTS CT Supervision

Provide Directional - Inverse Definite Time earth fault The CT Supervision considers the presence of negative phase
protection, TCC/DTL with independent settings for pickup sequence current, without an equivalent level of negative
current, TCC and minimum/follower time-delay. phase sequence voltage, for a user set time as a CT failure.
Four elements are provided. Element has user operate and delay settings.
User can select the TCC from standard IEC/ANSI or Legacy
Characteristics e.g. 101 (A) etc. Reset TCC can be user set to 60VTS VT Supervision
either DTL or shaped, to integrate grading with The VT Supervision uses a combination of negative phase
electromechanical or other protection devices. sequence voltage and negative phase sequence current to
detect a VT fuse failure. This condition may be alarmed or
67/50SEF Sensitive Earth Fault used to inhibit voltage dependent functions. Element has
Provide Directional Instantaneous or Definite Time (DTL) user operate and delay settings.
earth fault protection, with independent settings for pickup
current and time-delay. 64H Restricted Earth Fault - scheme
Four elements are provided. The measured earth fault input may be used in a 64H high-
Elements can be Inrush-inhibited impedance, restricted earth fault scheme. The required
external series stabilising resistor and shunt non-linear
67/51SEF Sensitive Earth Fault Varistor can be supplied.
Provide Directional Instantaneous or Definite Time (DTL)
earth fault protection, with independent settings for pickup 74TC Trip Circuit Supervision
current and time-delay. Up to three trip circuits can be monitored using binary inputs
Four elements are provided. connected in H4/H5/H6 or H7 schemes. Trip circuit failure
Elements can be Inrush-inhibited raises an HMI alarm and output(s).
User can select the TCC from standard IEC/ANSI or Legacy
Characteristics e.g. 101 (A) etc. Reset TCC can be user set to
either DTL or shaped, to integrate grading with
electromechanical or other protection devices.
67 Directional Control
Phase Fault, Earth Fault and Sensitive Earth Fault elements
can be directionalised. Each element can be user set to
Forward, Reverse, or Non-directional.

79 Auto Reclose duration, the limits can be User set for SIARFI, SMARFI &
The controller provides independent Phase Fault, Earth Fault STARFI. Breaks above 60s duration are Interruptions.
and Sensitive Earth Fault sequences. They can be set for up Counters for each are provided per pole.
to 4 Shots i.e. 5 Trips + 4 Reclose attempts to Lockout. These
sequences can be user set to any configuration of Programmable User Logic
Instantaneous (fast TCC) or Delayed TCC protection, with Each Protection element output can be used for Alarm &
independent Reclose (Dead) times. Indication and/or tripping.
As the user defines which elements are Instantaneous, the User can freely map any protection element output to any
combination of TCC1 plus 50 High set elements & TCC2 plus Binary Output(s); and any Binary Input(s) to any Function
50 High Set elements, provides the user with full flexibility. Inhibit(s), Binary Output, LED’s and/or internal Virtual signal
It enables the optimisation of the protection characteristics, points. User can also enter up to 16 Equations via the HMI,
which will be applied at each point in the protection defining User scheme-logic using standard Boolean Logic
sequence. Limits can be set by the user on the number of e.g. ( )/AND/OR/NOT/XOR, to combine BI, other Equations,
Delayed Trips to Lockout or High set trips to Lockout. Function Keys, LEDs, BO, and internal Virtual signal points.
The External Protection Auto Reclose sequence allows Each equation has PU/DO Time Delays and a Target Counter.
AutoReclose to be provided for a separate high speed Each Equation appears in the Output matrix and can be
Protection device with options for Blocking External Trips to freely mapped to LEDs/BO.
allow Overcurrent grading to take place.
Single/Triple Auto Reclose Four circuit breaker trip counters are provided:-
Additional optional functionality is available to provide Total Trip Count increments upon each trip command issued
tripping, auto reclose and control of three single pole to give data for maintenance.
Reclosers located together and controlled by a single 7SR224 Delta Trip Count is an additional counter which can be reset
device. The facility to operate each of the three phases independently of the Total Trip Counter and counts the
independently for systems where single phase loads are number of operations since the last reset.
connected is common in some countries. The 7SR224 Frequent Operations Counter monitors the number of trip
provides flexible schemes which are used to provide single operations in a rolling window period of one hour and
and three pole trip and reclose operations depending on the operates to stop cyclical sequences if the set number is
fault type detected. exceeded.
An I2t summation Counter provides a means monitoring
Loss of Voltage LOV Automation contact wear indicating the total energy interrupted by the
Additional optional functionality is available to provide circuit breaker contacts.
control of Normally Open Points (NOP) and other Reclosers Each counter has a user set target operations count which,
in the distribution network to provide an automation when reached, can be mapped to raise Alarms/ Binary
sequence of load restoration following a persistent fault. The Outputs.
sequence is started by the loss of voltage detection, for an
extended period of time, following a complete but Function LED’s
unsuccessful auto reclose sequence, which has caused Eight (E10 case) or sixteen (E12) user programmable tri-
Lockout of a Recloser at any point in the network. colour LED’s are provided eliminating the need for expensive
panel mounted pilot lights and associated wiring. Each LED
81 Under/Over Frequency can be user set to red, green or yellow allowing for clear
Each of the 4 elements has settings for pickup level, drop-off indication of the associated function’s state. A slip-in label
level and Definite Time Lag (DTL) delays. This function pocket along-side enables the user to insert his own
operates if frequency ‘exceeds’ setting for duration of delay. notation. A printer compatible template is available.
Typically applied in load shedding schemes.
Function Keys
81HBL2 Second Harmonic Block Twelve user programmable function keys are available for
Where second harmonic current is detected i.e. during implementing User logic and scheme control functionality,
transformer energisation the user selected elements can be eliminating the need for expensive panel mounted control
blocked switches and associated wiring. Each function key has an
associated user programmable tri-color LED (red, green,
27/59 Voltage Sag/Swell yellow) allowing for clear indication of the associated
Power System Utilities use SARFI indices of Voltage Sag and function’s state. A slip-in label pocket along-side enables the
Swell, which express the magnitude and duration of Sag and user to insert his own notation for the Function Key LED
Swell variations occurring on their systems. These indices Identification.
are based on the ‘ride-through’ capability of the customer’s Each Function Key can be mapped directly to any of the
plant and are usually expressed in terms of the number of a built-in Controller/Circuit Breaker Command functions or to
specific class (index) of r.m.s. variation per customer per the User Logic equations.
specified period.
These elements provide the raw data in the form of counters
that display the total count of each type of index value. Sags
have a greater impact on plant performance than Swells.
Disturbances are classified according to their magnitude and

Data Log
The average values of voltages, current and real & reactive
power are recorded at a user selectable interval and stored
to provide data in the form of a Data Log which can be
downloaded for further analysis. A typical application is to
record 15 minute intervals over the last 7 days.
Reydisp Evolution
Fig 1. Tri-colour LED’s and function keys
Data Acquisition -
Sequence of event records

Up to 5000 events are stored and time tagged to 1ms
resolution.
Fault Records
Reydisp Evolution is common to the entire range of Reyrolle
The last 10 fault records are displayed on the relay fascia and numeric products. It provides the means for the user to apply
are also available through the communication interface, settings, interrogate settings and retrieve events and
with time and date of trip, measured quantities and type of disturbance waveforms from the relays.
fault.
Waveform recorder
The waveform recorder stores analogue data for all poles
and the states of protection functions, binary inputs, LEDs
and binary outputs with user settable pre & post trigger
data. A record can be triggered from protection function,
binary input or via data communications. 10 records of 1
second duration are stored.
Demand Monitoring
demand is averaged over a user selectable period of time. A
rolling record of such demand averages is stored and
provides the demand history. A typical application is to
record 15min averages for the last 7 days.
Real Time Clock

relay is de-energised by a back up storage capacitor. The
time can be synchronized from a binary input pulse or the
data communication channel.

Binary Inputs
Technical Data
For full technical data refer to the Performance Specification 88V: Range 74 to 290V dc
Section of the Technical Manual. Maximum dc current for 1.5mA
operation
Inputs and Outputs Binary Outputs

Current Inputs Operating Mode User selectable - Self or
Hand Reset
Quantity 3 x Phase & 1 x Earth or Contact Operate / Release 7ms / 3ms
Sensitive Earth Time.
Rated Current In 1/5A Making Capacity:
Measuring Range 80 x In Carry continuously 5A ac or dc
Frequency 50/60Hz (L/R ≤ 40 ms and V ≤ 300 V) 30A ac or dc for 0.2s
Thermal Withstand: Breaking Capacity
Continuous 3.0 x In ( ≤ 5 A and ≤ 300 V):
10 Minutes 3.5 x In AC Resistive 1250 VA
5 Minutes 4.0 x In AC Inductive 250 VA at p.f. ≤ 0.4
3 Minutes 5.0 x In DC Resistive 75 W
2 Minutes 6.0 x In DC Inductive 30 W at L/R ≤ 40ms
3 Seconds 57.7A (1A) 202A (5A) 50 W at L/R ≤ 10ms
2 Seconds 70.7A (1A) 247A (5A)
1 Second 100A (1A) 350A (5A)
1 Cycle 700A (1A) 2500A (5A) Mechanical Tests
Burden @ In ≤0.1VA (1A phase and Earth
element)
≤0.3VA (5A phase and earth Vibration (Sinusoidal)
element) IEC 60255-21-1 Class I
Voltage Inputs Type Level Variation

Vibration response 0.5 gn ≤5%
Quantity 4 Vibration endurance 1.0 gn ≤5%
Instrumentation ≥ 0.8xVn ±1% Vn Shock and Bump
Thermal Withstand: IEC 60255-21-2 Class I
Continuous 300V
1 Second Type Level Variation
Burden @ 110V ≤ 0.1 VA Shock response 5 gn, 11 ms ≤5%
Shock withstand 15 gn, 11 ms ≤5%
DC Auxiliary supply Bump test 10 gn, 16 ms ≤5%
Nominal voltage Operating Range V dc Seismic

30/48/110/220/ V dc Range 24 to 290 V dc IEC 60255-21-3 Class I
Allowable superimposed ac 12% of DC voltage
component Type Level Variation
Seismic response 1 gn ≤5%
supply (collapse to zero) Mechanical Classification
Auxiliary supply: Burdens

Durability >106 operations
Power Consumption Quiescent Quiescent (back-

(typical) light)
30V dc 6.0W 7.0W
48V dc 5.50W 6.50W
110V dc 6.5W 7.5W
220V dc 7.5W 8.5W

Electrical Tests
Type Limits
Insulation Quasi-peak Average
0.15 to 0.5 MHz 79 dB(μV) 66 dB(μV)
IEC 60255-5
0.5 to 30 MHz 73 dB(μV) 60 dB(μV)
Type Level
Radiated Immunity
and earth
Between independent 2.0 kV AC RMS for 1 min Type Level Variation
circuits 80 MHz to 1000 10 V/m ≤5%
Across normally open 1.0 kV AC RMS for 1 min MHz
contacts
High Frequency Disturbance IEC 61000-4-8, Class V
100 A/m continuous 50Hz; 1.257mT
Type Level Variation 1000 A/m for 3s
Common 2.5 kV ≤5%
(longitudinal)
Series (transverse) 1.0 kV ≤5%
Climatic Tests
mode
Temperature
Electrostatic Discharge IEC 60068-2-1/2
Operating Range -10 °C to +55 °C
Type Level Variation Storage range -25 °C to +70 °C
Contact discharge 8.0 kV ≤5%
Humidity
Fast Transients
IEC 60068-2-78
Operational test 56 days at 40 °C and 93 %
Type Level Variation relative humidity
5/50 ns 2.5 kHz 4kV ≤5%
repetitive IP Ratings
IEC 60529
Surge Immunity
IEC 60255-22-5 Type Level
Installed with cover IP 50 from front
Between all 4.0 kV ≤ 10 % or 1mA
terminals and earth Installed with cover IP 30 from front
Between any two 2.0kV ≤ 10 % or 1mA removed
independent circuits
For full technical data refer to the Performance Specification
Conducted Radio Frequency Interference Section of the Technical Manual.
IEC 60255-22-6

0.15 to 80 MHz 10 V ≤5%

IEC 60255-25
Type Limits at 10 m, Quasi-peak

30 to 230 MHz 40 dB(μV/m)
230 to 10000 MHz 47 dB(μV/m)

47 Negative Phase Sequence
Performance
27/59 Under/Over Voltage Setting Range Vs 1,1.5…90V
Operate Level 100% Vs, ±2% or ±0.5V
Delay Setting td 0.00,0.01…20,20.5…100,101…
Operate Any phase or All phases
1000,1010…10000,10100…144
Voltage Guard 1,1.5…200V
00s
Basic Operate Time
Hysteresis Setting 0.0.1…80%
0V to 1.5xVs 80ms ±20ms
Vs Operate Level 100% Vs, ±1% or ±0.25V 0V to 10xVs 55ms ±20ms
Reset Level: Operate time following Tbasic +td , ±2% or ±20ms
Undervoltage =(100%+hyst)xVop, ±1% or 0.25V delay.
Overvoltage =(100%-hyst)xVop, ±1% or 0.25V
Delay Setting td 0.00,0.01…20,20.5…100,101…10
00,1010…10000,10100…14400s
Basic Operate Time :
49 Thermal Overload
1.1 to 0.5xVs 58ms ±10ms Operate levels Operate and Alarm
Operate time Tbasic +td , ±1% or ±10ms Setting Range Is 0.10,0.11…3.0 x In
following delay. Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1%xIn
Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input Time Constant Setting 1,1.5…1000min
VT Supervision Operate time ⎧⎪
t = τ × In ⎨ 2
I 2 − I p2 ⎫⎪
Voltage Guard )2 ⎬⎪⎭

⎪⎩ I − (k × I B
±5% absolute or ±100ms where
37 Undercurrent Ip = prior current
Number of Elements 2 Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input
50 (67) Instantaneous & DTL OC&EF (Directional)
Delay Setting td 0.00,0.01…20,20.5…100,101…
1000,1010…10000,10100…144
00s Operation Non directional, Forward or
Basic Operate Time: reverse
1.1 to 0.5 x Is 35ms ±10ms Elements Phase and Measured Earth
Operate time following Tbasic +td , ±1% or ±10ms Number of Elements 4 x OC
delay. 4 x Measured EF ‘G’ where fitted
Overshoot Time < 40ms 4 x SEF where fitted
Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input Setting Range Is 0.05,0.06…50 x In
SEF 0.005…5 x In
46 Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent Time Delay 0.00…14400s
Operate time:
50 0 to 2xIs – 35ms, ±10ms,
DT Setting Range Is 0.05,0.10…5.0 x In
0 to 5xIs – 25ms, ±10ms
DT Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1%xIn
DT Delay Setting td 0.00,0.01…20,20.5…100,101…
delay
1000,1010…10000,10100…144
00s
Inrush detector
DT Basic Operate Time:
VT Supervision
0 to 2 x Is 40ms ±10ms
0 to 5 x Is 30ms ±10ms
DT Operate time Tbasic +td , ±1% or ±10ms
following delay.
IT Char Setting IEC NI,VI,EI,LTI ANSI MI,VI,EI &
DTL
IT Setting Range 0.05..2.5
Tm Time Multiplier 0.025,0.050…1.6
Char Operate Level 105% Is, ±4% or ±1%In

51(67) Time Delayed OC&EF (Directional) 59N Neutral Voltage Displacement
Elements Phase, Measured Earth & SEF Number of Elements 1xDT & 1xIT
Number of Elements 4 x OC DT Setting Range Is 1…100V
4 x Measured EF ‘G’ DT Operate Level 100% Vs, ±5% or ±1%xVn
4 x SEF DT Delay Setting td 0 …14400s
Operation Non directional, Forward or DT Basic Operate Time 76ms ±20ms
reverse 0V to 1.5xVs
Characteristic IEC NI,VI,EI,LTI ANSI MI,VI,EI & DT Operate time Tbasic +td , ±1% or ±20ms
DTL & Legacy (101 etc.) following delay.
Setting Range Is 0.05,0.1…2.5 x In IT Setting Range 1…100V
SEF 0.005…1 x In TM Time 0.1…140
Time Multiplier 0.025,0.05…1.6 Multiplier(IDMT)
Time Delay 0,0.01… 20s Delay (DTL) 0…20s
Operate Level 105% Is, ±4% or ±1%xIn Reset 0 … 60s, ANSI decaying
Minimum Operate time top =
K
× Tm Char Operate Level 105% Vs, ±2% or ±0.5V
IEC [ IsI ]α − 1 Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input
⎡ A ⎤
top = ⎢ P + B⎥ ×Tm
ANSI ⎣[ Is ] −1 ⎦ 60 Supervision
I
± 5 % absolute or ± 30 ms
CT Vnps & Inps
Follower Delay 0 - 20s
VT nps/zps
64H Restricted Earth Fault
Inrush detector
VT Supervision
51V Voltage Controlled Overcurrent Time Delay 0.00… 14400s
Setting Range 5,5.5…200V
Operate Level 100% Vs, ±5% or ±1%xVn
Multiplier 0.25.0.3…1 x Is(51)
Inhibited by VT Supervision
Operation Current check - Phase and

Measured Earth with
independent settings
Mechanical Trip
CB Faulty Monitor
2 Stage Time Delays Timer 1 20…60000ms
Timer 2 20…60000ms
Basic Operate time < 20ms
Operate time following Tdelay ±1% or ±10ms
delay
Triggered by Any function mapped as trip
contact.
Inhibited by Binary/Virtual Input

Case Dimensions
Fig 3. E10 Case
Fig 4. E12 Case

Rear View: Arrangement of terminals and modules
2
+ve 7SR224n 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
-ve BI 4 BO 7
4 3
+ve
6 5
8
-ve BI 5 BO 8
7
E D C B A Data
(Optional) (Optional) Comms
+ve
10 9
I/O I/O I/O PSU Analogue (Optional)
BI 6 BO 9
11
+ve
12 13
BI 7 BO 10 27 28 27 28 27 28 27 28 27 28
15
+ve
14 BO 11 17
BI 8
BO 12 19 Optional Additional I/O for (23 Inputs 22 Outputs) and
+ve (33 Inputs 30 Outputs) Models
16 21
-ve BI 9 +ve +ve
BO 13
2 2
18 23 -ve BI 14 1 -ve BI 24 1
4 BO 15 3
4 BO 23 3
+ve 6
+ve
6
+ve
20 BO 14 25 8
-ve BI 15
BO 16
5
8
-ve BI 25 BO 24
5
BI 10 10 +ve 7
10 +ve 7
27 BI 16 9
BI 26 9
BO 17 11
BO 25 11
+ve
+ve 12 +ve 12
22 BI 17 13
BI 27 13
BO 18 BO 26
BI 11 14 +ve
15
14
+ve 15
BI 18 BO 19 17
BI 28 BO 27 17
+ve 19 +ve 19
+ve 16
BI 19 BO 20
16
BO 28
24 18
-ve 21
18
-ve BI 29 21
BO 21 BO 29
BI 12 +ve 23 +ve 23
20 20
BI 20 25
BI 30 25
+ve
BO 22 27 +ve
BO 30 27
22 22
+ve BI 21 BI 31
26
BI 13
C
+ve +ve
24 24
-ve BI 22 BI 32
28
+ve +ve
26
BI 23
26
BI 33
28
-ve
D 28
-ve
E
1
+ve
22
VAUX BO 1 Optional Additional I/O for (33 Inputs 14 Outputs) and
-ve
24
3 (43 Inputs 22 Outputs) Models
28 GND. 5 2
+ve +ve
1 2
+ve
-ve BI 14 BI 24 -ve -ve BI 34 1

4 3 4 BO 15 3
BO 2 7
6
+ve
-ve BI 15 BI 25
+ve
-ve
5 6
+ve
-ve BI 35 5
8 7 8 BO 16 7
+ve 10
+ve +ve
9 10
+ve
2 9 BI 16 BI 26 BI 36 9
BO 17
-ve BI 1 12
+ve +ve
11 12
ve
+ 11
4 11 BI 17 BI 27 BI 37 13
BO 18 15
BO 3
+ve +ve +ve
+ve 14 13 14
6 13 BI 18 BI 28 BI 38 BO 19 17
-ve BI 2 16
+ve +ve
15 16
+ve 19
8 15 18
-ve BI 19 BI 29 -ve
17 18
-ve BI 39 BO 20 21
+ve +ve +ve BO 21 23

+ve 20
BI 20 BI 30
19 20
BI 40
10 17 25
BI 3 BO 4 +ve +ve +ve

BO 22 27
-ve 22
BI 21 BI 31
21 22
BI 41
12 19
+ve +ve +ve
24 23 24
21 BI 22 BI 32 BI 42
14 A BO 5 26
+ve
BI 23 BI 33 +ve
25 26
+ve
23 -ve -ve -ve BI 43 E

RS485
28 27 28
16 Screen D
27
18 B BO 6
25
20 Term. Alternative Voltage Input Connections for 6VT Loss of Voltage Models.
B 26
Note re-allocation of Terminals
1A
1
VL1 17
2 IL1 (VA) 18
5A (IA)
3
4 19
VL2
1A (VB) 20
5
6 IL2
5A (IB)
7 21 21
VL1 VL3
8 (VA) 22 (VC) 22
NOTES
1A
9
VL2 23 V4 23 BI = Binary Input
10 IL3 BO = Binary Output
(VB) 24 (VX) 24
5A (IC)
11
12 25 25
VL3 V5
(VC) (VY) Shows contacts internal
1A 26 26
13 to relay case assembly.
14
Contacts close when the
I4 27 27 relay chassis is
5A
V4 V6
15 (IG/ISEF) withdrawn from case
(VX) 28 (VZ) 28
16 A A

7SR224 Interface Diagram
7SR224
+ve
2 1
-ve BI 4 BO 7 BO - Trip
4 3 Trip Coil
+ve
6 5 BO - Close
BI 5 BO 8 Close Coil
-ve
8 7
+ve
10 9
BI - CB Open BI 6 BO 9
Aux. Sw. ‘b’
11
BI - CB Closed +ve
Aux. Sw. ‘a’ 12 13
BI 7 BO 10
BI - CB Lockout 15
CB Lockout
+ve
14 BO 11 17
BI 8
BO 12 19
+ve
16 21
-ve BI 9
18 BO 13 23
+ve
BI - Close
20 BO 14 25
PB - Close BI 10
27
BI - Trip +ve
PB - Trip 22
BI 11
Sw. – BI - Hot Line Working
Hot Line Working +ve
24
BI 12
+ve
26
BI 13
28
-ve C
1
+ve
22
VAUX BO 1
-ve
24
3
28 GND. 5
BO 2 7
+ve
BI - Aux ac/Charger OK 2 9
-ve BI 1
4 11 BO - Battery
BI - Capacitor OK
+ve BO 3 Start Test
6 13
BI - Reclose Block -ve BI 2
8 15 BO - Battery
Apply Test
+ve
10 17
-ve BI 3 BO 4
12 19 BO - Capacitor
Start Test
21
14 A BO 5
23
RS485
16 Screen
27
18 B BO 6
25
20 Term.
B 26
1A
1
2 IL1
5A (IA)
3
1A
5
CURRENT INPUTS
6 IL2 VL1 21
5A (IB) (VA)
7 22
8
VOLTAGE INPUTS
1A VL2 23
9
(VB) 24
10 IL3
5A (IC)
11
VL3 25
12
(VC) 26
1A
13
14 I4
V4 27
5A (IG)
15
(VX) 28
16 A
Fig 6. 7SR224 Interface Diagram

Function Diagram for 7SR224 Recloser Controller
7SR224
67/ 67/ 81
37 50
49 51V 51c 50 51 HBL
IL1 (x2) BF
(x4) (x4) 2
(IA)
67/ 67/ 81
37 50
49 51V 51c 50 51 HBL
IL2 (x2) BF
(x4) (x4) 2
(IB)
67/ 67/ 81
37 50
49 51V 51c 50 51 HBL
IL3 (x2) BF
(x4) (x4) 2
(IC)
46
46 60 60
NPS
BC CTS VTS
(x2)
67/ 67/ 67/ 67/

64
50G 51G 50S 51S
I4 H
(x4) (x4) (x4) (x4)
(IG/ISEF)

functions are mutually exclusive
27
VL1 27S
59
(VA) 59S Note:
(x4)
Example shows
Voltage Config =
27
VL2 27S 47 81 Van, Vbn, Vcn
59
(VB) 59S (x2) (x4)
(x4)
27 74
VL3 27S 59N Batt
59 TCS
(VC) 59S (x2) Test
(x4) (x3)
V4 27 Cap.
79
(VX) 59 Test

Ordering Information – 7SR224 Argus Recloser Controller
Directional O/C Relay 7 S R 2 2 4□ - 2□□□□ - 0 □▲ A □

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Recloser | | | || | | | | | |
| | | || | | | | | |
Protection Product | | | || | | | | | |
Overcurrent – Directional 2 | | || | | | | | |
| | || | | | | | |
Relay Type | | || | | | | | |
Recloser 4 | || | | | | | |
| || | | | | | |
Case I/O and Fascia 1) | || | | | | | |
E10 case, 4 CT, 6 VT, 13 Binary Inputs / 14 Binary Outputs, 8 LEDs + 12 keys 1 || | | | D
| |
|| | | | | |
E10 case, 4 CT, 4VT, 13 Binary Inputs / 14 Binary Outputs, 8 LEDs + 12 keys 2 || | | | C | |
|| | | | | |
E10 case, 4 CT, 4VT, 23 Binary Inputs / 22 Binary Outputs, 8 LEDs + 12 Keys 3 || | | | C | |
|| | | | | |
E10 case, 4 CT, 4 VT, 33 Binary Inputs / 14 Binary Outputs, 8 LEDs + 12 keys 4 || | | | C | |
|| | | | | |
E10 case, 4 CT, 6 VT, 23 Binary Inputs / 22 Binary Outputs, 8 LEDs + 12 keys 5 || | | | D | |
|| | | | | |
E12 case, 4 CT, 4 VT, 33 Binary Inputs / 14 Binary Outputs, 16 LEDs + 12 keys 6 || | | | C/E | |
|| | | | | |
|| | | | | |
|| | | | | |
|| | | | | | |
Measuring Input || | | | | | |
1/5 A, 63.5/110V 2 | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
Auxiliary voltage | | | | | | |
30 to 220V DC, binary input threshold 19V DC 22W A | | | | | |
| | | | | |
30 to 220V DC, binary input threshold 88V DC 22W B | | | | | |
| | | | | |
| | | | | |
Region specific functions | | | | | |
Region World, 50/60Hz, language English, Reyrolle fascia A | | | | |
Region World, 50/60Hz, language English, Siemens fascia B | | | | |
Region USA, 60/50Hz, language English - US (ANSI) (language changeable), Siemens C | | | | |
fascia | | | | |
| | | | |
| | | | |
Standard version - included in all models, USB front port, RS485 rear port 1 | | | |
| | | |
Standard version - plus additional rear F/O ST connectors (x2) and IRIG-B 2 | | | |
| | | |
| | | |
Protocol | | | |
IEC 60870-5-103 1 | | |
IEC 60870-5-103 and Modbus RTU (user selectable setting) 2 | | |
IEC 60870-5-103 and Modbus RTU and DNP 3.0 (user selectable setting) 3 | | |
| | |
(continued on following page)

Ordering Information – 7SR224 Argus Recloser Controller
Directional O/C Relay 7 S R 2 2 4 □ - 2 □A□□ - 0 □A□

▲ ▲ ▲
(continued from previous page) | | |
Protection Function Packages | | |
Standard version – Included in all models C | |
27/59 Under/overvoltage | | |
27/59 Under/overvoltage, Sag/swell | | |
37 Undercurrent | | |
46BC Broken conductor/load unbalance | | |
46NPS Negative phase sequence overcurrent | | |
49 Thermal overload | | |
50BF Circuit breaker fail | | |
51V Voltage dependent overcurrent | | |
59N
60CTS
Neutral voltage displacement
CT supervision
| | |
60VTS VT supervision
| | |
67/50 Directional instantaneous phase fault overcurrent
| | |
67/50G Directional Instantaneous earth fault
| | |
67/51 Directional Time delayed phase fault overcurrent
| | |
67/51G Directional Time delayed earth fault | | |
67/50SEF Directional instantaneous sensitive earth fault | | |
67/51SEF Directional time delayed sensitive earth fault | | |
74TC Trip circuit supervision | | |
74BF Circuit breaker close fail | | |
79 Autoreclose | | |
81 Under/overfrequency | | |
81HBL2 Inrush restraint | | |
86 Lockout | | |
Battery and capacitor | | |
Cold load pickup | | |
Programmable | | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
Standard version - plus D | |
27/59 Under/overvoltage | | |
60VTS VT Supervision | | |
Loop automation by loss of voltage | | |
Standard version - plus E ||
Single/triple pole autoreclose ||
| |
Additional Functionality | |
No Additional Functionality A |
|
Settings File |
Standard settings and standard labels for Siemens Recloser 0

Reyrolle
Protection
Devices
7SG11 Argus
Answers for energy

7SG11 Argus
Monitoring Functions
Analogue values can be displayed in primary or secondary
quantities on the LCD screen. In addition the values can be
obtained via the communications port.
• Primary current per phase

• Primary earth current
• Secondary current per phase
• Secondary earth current
• Primary phase voltages*
• Primary phase-phase voltages*
• Secondary voltages*
• Apparent power and power factor*
• Real and reactive power*
Description •
•
WHr forward and reverse*
VarHr forward and reverse*
• Rolling and Max demand la, lb, lc
The 7SG11 Argus range of overcurrent protection combines • Rolling and Max demand W*
the power and flexibility of microprocessor technology with • Rolling and Max Var*
decades of experience in the field of overcurrent protection • Direction
and auto-reclose. A wide range of protection elements are • Autoreclose status
supplemented by advanced features such as control, metering, • Output contacts
data storage and fibre-optic based communications. • Status inputs
• Trip circuit healthy/failure
• Trip counters
Function Overview • I2 summation
• Number of waveform and event records stored
• Time and Date
• IDMTL phase overcurrent stage
• Starters
• 3 DTL phase overcurrent stages
• Power on counter
• IDMTL earth-fault stage * 7SG1125 series models only
• 3 DTL earth-fault stages
• 2 instantaneous and DTL SEF/REF stages with har-
monic rejection, available as an option Data Storage and
• Trip circuit supervision
• Circuit breaker failure protection Communication
• CT supervision (7SG111 &7SG112)
• Single pole, three pole and four pole variants
• True RMS measurement Serial communications conform to IEC60870-5-103 or
• Status inputs with independent pick-up and drop-off Modbus RTU protocol. Up to 254 relays may be connected
timers and logic inversion reduce scheme engineering in a ring network and addressed individually.
• Flexible supply voltage ranges A fibre-optic communications port is provided on the rear of
• Low AC/DC burden the relay. It is optimised for 62.5/125μm glass fibre using ST®
• Eight independent settings groups (BFOC/2.5) bayonet connectors. Optionally an RS485 electrical
• Self, hand reset contacts connector can be provided.
• Extensive fault, sequence of event and disturbance
recorder Indication
• Fibre optic interface or RS485 multi-drop electrical
bus LEDs for TRIP, STARTER and PROTECTION HEALTHY status.
• Continuous self-supervision of operation and power 7SG1144 and 7SG1164 relays also have LEDs indicating
supply CB OPEN and CB CLOSED status.
LCD – Alpha-numeric display for settings, instruments
and fault data.

Sequence of event records lowset algorithms. If there is a fault on one of the outgoing
feeders, e.g. Feeder 1, the starter on the 7SG111n will cause
Up to 500 events are stored and time tagged to 1ms resolu- the lowset on the 7SG112n of Incomer 1 to be inhibited. Its
tion. These are available via the communications. IDMTL characteristic will continue to function as a backup.
However, for a fault on the busbar the 7SG112n on Incomer 1
Fault records will be allowed to operate and will quickly clear the fault.
The last 5 fault records are available from the Argus fascia with
time and date of trip, measured quantities and type of fault.
Description of Functionality
Disturbance recorder 7SG11 overcurrent relays provides comprehensive overcurrent
protection with programmable input and output matrix. In
The waveform recorder may be triggered from a protection addition 8 setting groups enable a flexible approach to protec-
function or external input and has a configurable pre-fault tion settings.
trigger. Up to 5 fault waveforms may be stored.
On all models the AC current waveforms are stored together Phase Overcurrent
with the digital states of the status inputs and output relays. One IDMTL/DTL characteristic and 3 DTL characteristics provide
7SG112n models with voltage and power metering addition- phase overcurrent protection, each with independent current
ally store AC voltage waveforms. settings and delays. The IDMT stage has a programmable reset
with a definite time delay to improve detection of flashing
Reydisp Evolution faults.
Reydisp Evolution is common to the entire range of Reyrolle Earth Fault

numeric products. It provides the means for the user to apply One IDMTL/DTL characteristic and 3 DTL characteristics provide
settings, interrogate settings, retrieve events and disturbance phase overcurrent protection, each with independent current
waveforms from the Argus. settings and delays. The IDMT stage has a programmable reset
with a definite time delay to improve detection of flashing
faults.
Application
Sensitive earth fault/Restricted Earth Fault
With reference to Fig 4: Typical Applications for 7SG11 One current setting with two definite time delays are provided
Overcurrent Series Relays for sensitive earth fault protection. This element operates from
fundamental frequency only, 50Hz or 60Hz, and ideally a core
Feeder 1 is a cable circuit; auto-reclosing is not applied, so a balance CT should be used to improve accuracy, if low current
7SG111n relay is used. Transient faults can occur on cables, settings are required.
which are initially self-sealing until the insulation is sufficiently With the addition of a stabilising resistor and, where applica-
weakened for them to become permanent. In this time much ble, non-linear resistors, the sensitive earth fault input may be
damage can occur. In order to protect against these and to used for restricted earth fault protection in a high impedance
maintain system overcurrent grading, a delayed reset of up to scheme.
60 seconds can be set on the IDMTL algorithms.
Trip Circuit Supervision
Feeder 4 is an overhead line so a 7SG1144 with integrated The trip circuit is monitored by a status input. This is linked to
auto-reclosing is used. an alarm and may be configured to operate an output relay.
The 7SG112n directional protection relay is typically applied Circuit Breaker Fail
wherever there is a potential source of power on both sides of The circuit breaker fail function operates by monitoring the
the circuit breaker, i.e. fault current can flow in both current following a trip signal and issues an alarm if the cur-
directions. If there is a fault on the incoming circuits, or the rent does not cease within a specified time interval. A two-
transformers, the dual setting allows for correct grading to be stage time delayed output can be used to operate output con-
applied. This directional protection will ensure that only the tacts to retrip the same circuit breaker, using a second trip coil,
faulted circuit is tripped, and the healthy circuit remains in or to backtrip an upstream circuit breaker.
service.
CT Supervision
On feeders that form a ring where overhead lines are used e.g. CT wiring is monitored by comparing the current levels of the
feeders 2 and 3, the dual directional 7SG1164 relay can be three line currents against each other. This is linked to an
employed to give integrated auto-reclosing, and correct alarm and may be configured to operate an output relay.
grading in both directions around the ring.
An inexpensive buszone protection can be formed using the

Argus relays in an overcurrent blocking scheme. The starters of
the Argus on the outgoing feeders are set to operate status
inputs of the Argus on the incomers, which are set to block the

Circuit Breaker Maintenance Current Inputs: Burdens
A circuit breaker operations counters is provided.
A summation of I2 broken by the circuit breaker provides a 5A Phase/Earth < 0.2VA
measure of the contact erosion. 1A Phase/Earth < 0.05VA
Operations count and I2 alarm levels can be set which, when 5A SEF/REF < 0.4VA
reached, can be used as an input to a condition-based mainte-
1A SEF/REF < 0.2VA
nance regime.
Phase/Earth Current Inputs: Thermal Withstand
Directional Control
7SG112n (Argus 2) and 7SG116n (Argus 6) only.
Directional elements are available as an ordering option. Continuous 3.0 x In
The bi-directional elements provide independent settings for 10 minutes 3.5 x In
each direction of each overcurrent stage. Single phase or two- 5 minutes 4.0 x In
out-of-three directional decisions are available for the phase- 3 minutes 5.0 x In
fault elements. On some models the characteristic angle for 2 minutes 6.0 x In
phase-fault and earth-fault are freely selectable, while on oth- 1A Input 5A Input
ers they are chosen from +30° and +45° for phase-fault, and
3 Second 57.7A 230A
from 0°, -15°, -45° and -65° for earth-fault.
The polarising voltage for phase-fault elements is taken from 2 Second 70.7A 282A
the quadrature phase-phase voltage - see the typical connec- 1 Second 100A 400A
tion diagrams for details. I Cycle 177A 618A
Cold Load Pickup SEF/REF Current Inputs: Thermal Withstand

7SG114n (Argus 4) and 7SG116n (Argus 6) only.
The relay can apply higher current settings with longer time Continuous 2.0 x In
delays, after the circuit breaker has been open for a program- 10 minutes 3.5 x In
mable time.
5 minutes 4.0 x In
When the circuit breaker is closed, these higher settings are
applied for a programmable time, or until the measured cur- 3 minutes 5.0 x In
rent has fallen to normal levels. 2 minutes 6.0 x In
1A Input 5A Input
Auto-Reclose 3 Second 37.5A 202A
7SG114n (Argus 4) and 7SG116n (Argus 6) only. 2 Second 46A 247A
Integrated auto-reclose is available as an ordering option. 1 Second 65A 350A
The relay incorporates a 5 trip/4 close auto-reclose sequence I Cycle 120A 618A
that can be initiated by an internal or external signal.
For each type of protection trip – phase-fault, earth-fault, SEF Voltage Inputs
and external – a separate sequence of instantaneous and de-
layed trips is available. Programmable dead times and reclaim
times with a wide setting range and integrated sequence co- Burden < 0.1VA at 110V
ordination enable virtually all distribution auto-reclose Continuous Withstand 250V
schemes to be realised.
DC Auxiliary supply
Technical Data Rated DC Voltage Operating Range V dc

24/30/48V 18 to 60V
For full technical data refer to the Performance 110/220V 88 to 280V
Specification of the Technical Manual.
Operate State Burden
Quiescent (Typical) 3W
Inputs and Outputs Maximum 10 W
Characteristic energising quantity Allowable superimposed ac ≤ 12% of dc

component voltage
Allowable breaks/dips in
AC Current/Voltage Frequency
supply (collapse to zero from ≤ 20 ms
1A / 5A 50 / 60Hz nominal voltage)
63.5/110V

DC status input
Carry continuously 5A ac or dc
Nominal voltage Operating range Make and carry 20A ac or dc for 0.5s
30V 18 - 37.5 V D C (L/R ≤ 40 ms and V ≤ 30A ac or dc for 0.2s
48V 37.5 - 60 V D C 300V)
Breaking Capacity
110V 87.5 - 137.5 V D C
( ≤ 5 A and ≤ 300 V):
220V 175 - 280 V D C
AC Resistive 1250 VA
Attribute Value DC Resistive 75 W
Min. DC Current for DC Inductive 30 W at L/R ≤ 40ms
Operation: 50 W at L/R ≤ 10ms
30/48V 10mA Minimum number of
110/220V <5mA 1000 at maximum load
operations
Reset/Operate voltage ratio ≥ 90 % Minimum recommended 0.5 Watt minimum of 10mA or
5 ms load 5V
Typical response time
(10ms for Argus 2 type II )
Typical response time when
programmed to energise an < 15 ms Mechanical
output relay contact
Recommended Minimum 40ms with setting of 20ms
pulse duration PU delay for a.c. rejection Vibration (Sinusoidal)
For relays to ES148-4 standard and 110/125 or 220/250
volt DC working a 48 volt status input is supplied for use Vibration response 0.5gn
with external dropper resistors: Vibration endurance 1.0gn
Nominal Voltage Resistor Value Wattage Shock and Bump

110V 2k7 ± 5% 2.5 W IEC 60255-21-2 Class I
220 V 8k2 ± 5% 6.0 W
Shock response 5gn, 11ms
Each status input has associated timers which can be Shock withstand 15gn, 11ms
programmed to give time delayed pick-up and time delayed 10 gn, Bump test, 16ms 10gn, 16ms
drop-off. These timers have default settings of 20ms, thus
providing rejection and immunity to an AC input signal. Seismic
Status inputs will not respond to the following:- IEC 60255-21-3 Class I
250V RMS 50/60Hz applied for two seconds through a 0.1μF Seismic Response 1gn
capacitor.
Discharge of a 10μF capacitor charged to maximum DC
auxiliary supply voltage.
The status inputs with nominal voltage of 30 V to 54 V meet
the requirements of ESI 48-4 ESI 1. Durability In excess of 106 operations
Low Burden Status Inputs

Optionally, low burden status inputs are available directly rated Electrical Tests
for 110/125Vd.c. or 220/250Vd.c. without dropper resistors.
These inputs do not meet the ESI 48-4 ESI 1 requirements.
Where necessary a single external dropper resistor in parallel Insulation
can be fitted to meet ESI 48-4 ESI 1 requirements. IEC 255-5 rms levels for 1 minute
Low Burden Status Input performance Between all terminals and 2.0 kV rms
earth for 1 minute
Nominal Operating Range Typical burden Between independent 2.0 kV rms
87.5 to 137.5 V circuits for 1 minute
110, 125 1.75 to 3.0 mA
DC Across normally open 1.0 kV rms
220, 250 175 to 280V DC 1.75 to 3.0 mA contacts for 1 minute
110/125 V minimum pick-up voltage typically 50 – 60 V d.c.

Output relays

High frequency disturbance
IEC 60255-22-1 class III Performance
2.5kV longitudinal mode General Accuracy
≤ 3% deviation
1.0kV transverse mode
Reference Conditions
Electrostatic Discharge General IEC 60255-3
IEC 60255-22-2 class III Current settings 100% of In
Current input IDMTL: 2 to 30 xIs
8kV, Contact discharge ≤ 5% variation DTL: 5 xIs
Auxiliary supply Nominal
Fast transient Frequency 50 Hz
IEC 255-22-4 class IV Ambient temperature 20 °C
4kV, 5/50ns, 2.5 kHz, ≤ 3% variation General Settings

repetitive Transient overreach of ≤ -5 %
highset/lowset (X/R =
Conducted RFI 100)
IEC 60255-22-6 class IV Disengaging time (see < 42 ms
note)
10 V, 0.15 to 80 MHz ≤ 5% variation Overshoot time < 40 ms
Conducted Limits Note. Output contacts have a programmable minimum dwell

time, after which the disengaging time is as above.
IEC 60255-25
Accuracy Influencing Factors
Frequency Range Limits dB(µV)
Quasi-peak Average
Temperature
0.15 to 0.5 MHz 79 66
-10 °C to +55 °C ≤ 5 % variation
0.5 to 30 MHz 73 60
Frequency
47 Hz to 52 Hz Level: ≤ 5 % variation
Radiated Limits
57 Hz to 62 Hz
IEC 60255-25
Operating ≤ 5 % variation
time:
Limits at 10 m
Frequency Range Harmonic content: Phase-fault and earth-fault elements
Quasi-peak, dB(µV/m)
only. SEF elements reject all harmonics.
30 to 230 MHz 40
Frequencies to 550 ≤ 5 % variation
230 to 10000 MHz 47
Hz
Radio frequency interference

Overcurrent protection
IEC60 255-22-3
Characteristic
10 V/m, 20 to 1000 MHz ≤ 5% variation Setting IEC Normal Inverse (NI)
IEC Very Inverse (VI)
IEC Extremely Inverse (EI)
IEC Long Time Inverse,(LTI )
Environmental DTL
No. of elements 1
Temperature Level
Setting Range Is 0.05, 0.1…2.5 x In
IEC 68-2-1/2
Accuracy Operate: 105% Is, ±4% or
±1%xIn
Operating range -10°C to +55°C
Reset ≥ 95% of operate current
Repeatability ± 1%
IDMTL Time Multiplier
Humidity
Setting 0.025, 0.05…1.6
IEC 68-2-3
Accuracy ± 5% or ± 30 ms
Repeatability ± 1% or ± 5 ms
Operational test 56 days at 40°C and 95%
DTL Delay
RH
Setting 0.00 to 20.00 sec

Accuracy ± 10ms ⎡ K ⎤
Repeatability ± 5 ms t operate = Tm × ⎢ α ⎥
Reset delay ⎢⎣ [IsI ] − 1⎥⎦
Setting 0 to 60 sec
Accuracy ± 1% or ± 10ms I =fault current
Repeatability ± 1% or ± 5 ms Is =current setting
Tm = time multiplier
DTL NI: K = 0.14 α = 0.02
No. of elements 3 VI: K = 13.5 α = 1.0
Level EI: K = 80.0 α = 2.0
Setting Range Is 0.05 to 52.5 x In LTI: K = 120.0 α = 1.0
Accuracy Operate: 100% Is, ±5% or,
±10mA Circuit breaker failure (50BF)
Repeatability ± 1% Characteristics DTL
DTL Delay No. of elements 3
Setting 0.00 to 20.00 sec DTL Delay
Accuracy ± 5ms Re-trip 0.00 to 20.00 sec
Setting
Repeatability ± 1% or ± 5 ms Back-trip 0.00 to 20.00 sec
Accuracy ± 5ms
SEF/REF Repeatability ± 1%
No. of elements 2 delays
Level CT Failure (60CTS)
Setting Range Is 0.005 to 0.96 x In
Accuracy Operate: 100% Is, ±5% Characteristics DTL
Reset ≥ 95% of operate current No. of elements 1
Repeatability ± 1% Level
DTL Delay Setting Range OFF, 0.05 to 1 x In
Setting 0.00 to 20.00 sec DTL Delay
Accuracy ± 5ms Setting 0 to 300 sec
Auto-reclose (79)
Earth fault protection
As overcurrent protection. No. of Shots 1 to 4
Delay
10000
Settings Deadtime 0.2 to 14400 sec
Close Pulse 1.0 to 10.0 sec
Reclaim 0.2 to 14400 sec
1000 Lockout Off, 0.2 to 14400
sec
Accuracy ± 1 % or ± 10 ms
100
Repeatability ± 1%
Instrumentation
Time (s)
10
long time inverse
Currents
Reference conditions I ≥ 0.1 xIn
Accuracy ± 1 % of In
normal inverse
1 Voltages
Reference conditions V ≥ 0.8 xVn
very inverse
Accuracy ± 1 % of Vn
Power and Apparent Power
0.1
Reference conditions V = Vn, I ≥ 0.1 xIn, pf ≥ 0.8
extremely inverse
Accuracy ± 3 % of Pn where Pn = Vn x In
Power Factor
0.01 Reference conditions V = Vn, I ≥ 0.1 xIn, pf ≥ 0.8
1 10
Current (multiple of setting) - I/Is
100
Accuracy ± 0.05
Fig 1. IEC IDMTL Curves

Case Dimensions
7SG11 series relays are supplied in either in E4, E6 or E8 cases.
Dimensions
A B C
E4 Case 103 99.5 52
E6 Case 155 151 103.5
E8 Case 203 203 155.5
Fig 2. Overall dimensions and panel drilling details (All dimensions are in mm)

Connection Diagram
1A +ve
53 13
54 -ve
14
5A A
55 Earth 15
Case
56
earth
1A
49 7
50 Notes
B BO 1 5
5A 1) Diagram shows 3PF + SEF model using a
51 6 ring core CT. See diagram below for
52 alternative connection. Other CT mixes also
In the forward direction
See note 1
Direction of power flow
8
available.
P1
1A
45 BO 2 10
2) Voltage card fitted only on 7SG112n and
S1
46 9 7SG1164 relays. Diagram shows 3 phase and

C earth voltage inputs. See diagram below for
S2
5A
47 16
P2
alternative voltage input.

48 BO 3 18 3) Optional expansion card, fitted only on
1A 17 models with 5 binary inputs and 11 output
25
relays.
S1
11
26
BO 4 4) Optional expansion card, fitted only on
5A E/F models with 9 binary inputs and 7 output
S2
27 12
relays.
28 19
BO 5 5) Diagram shows 3PF + EF model using the
20 Holmgreen connection. Other CT mixes also
+ve available.
3
21
BI 1 6) Voltage card shown can be fitted only on
4
-ve BO 6
22 7SG1125 relays.
23
BO 7
24
Va EXPANSION PCB EXPANSION PCB

81
+ve +ve
Vb 35 35
BI 2 -ve BI 2
Vc 36 -ve
36
+ve +ve
33 33
BI 3 -ve BI 3
82 34 -ve
34
31 31
BI 4 -ve BI 4
32 -ve
32
+ve +ve
83 29 29
BI 5 -ve BI 5
30 -ve
30
See note 2 +ve
37 43
BO 8 BI 6 -ve
Dn 38 44
79
40 41
BO 9 BI 7 -ve
Da 41 42
80
+ve
41 39
BO 10 BI 8 -ve
42 40
7SG11 43
+ve
37
A B C Argus BO 11
44
BI 9 -ve
38
See note 3 See note 4
1A
53
P1
54
S1
5A A
55
S2
Va Va
56 83 83
P2
1A
49
84 84
A B C 50 Vb
5A B Vb
51 81 81
52
Vc 82 82
1A
45
A B C Dn
79 79
Vc
46 A B C
C
See note 5 47
5A Da
80 80
Phase-earth
48
Phase-phase connection
connection
- see note 6
1A - see note 6
25
26
5A E/F
27
28
Fig 3. Connection Diagram for 7SG11 Overcurrent Relay

Typical Applications
7SG112n 7SG112n
51 51N 51 51N
67 67N 67 67N
74TC 50BF 74TC 50BF
7SR24 7SR24
87BD 87BD
Incomer 1 Incomer 2
Feeder 1 Feeder 2 Feeder 3 Feeder 4
7SG111n 7SG1164 7SG1164 7SG1144
51 51N 51 51N 51 51N 51 51N
74TC 50BF 67 67N 67 67N 74TC 50BF
74TC 50BF 74TC 50BF 79
79 79 overhead
line
cable circuit circuit
overhead line circuits
Fig 4. Typical Applications for 7SG11 Overcurrent Series Relays

Ordering Information – 7SG1111 Argus
Nondirectional O/C relay 7 S G 1 1 1 □ - □□□□□ - 0 □A 0

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Over current and earth fault | | | | | | |
protection for radial feeders, | | | | | | |
capacitor banks and industrial and Number of elements | | | | | | |
commercial plant. Single pole relay 1 | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Auxiliary supply /binary input voltage | | | | | |
24/30/48 V DC auxiliary, 30 V binary input 0 | | | | |
110/220 V DC auxiliary, 30 V binary input 1 | | | | |
110/220 V DC auxiliary, 48 V binary input ¹) 3 | | | | |
110/220 V DC auxiliary, 110 V low burden binary input 4 | | | | |
| | | | |
Type of elements | | | | |
Single pole phase-fault or single pole earth-fault A | | | |
Single pole sensitive/restricted earth-fault (SEF/REF) B | | | |
| | | |
Nominal current | | | |
1/ 5 A A | | |
| | |
I/O range | | |
1 Binary Inputs / 7 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover) 0 | |
| |
Communication interface | |
Fibre optic (ST-connector) / IEC 60870-5-103 or Modbus RTU 1 |
RS485 interface / IEC 60870-5-103 or Modbus RTU 2 |
|
Housing size |
Case size E4 (4U high) C
1) High burden 110V & 220V binary inputs compliant with ESI48-4 ESI 1 available via external dropper resistors with 48V binary input version
for 1 binary input and 110 V application, order resistor box VCE:2512H10066 in addition
Refer to website for application note about ESI48-4 compliance.

Nondirectional O/C relay 7 S G 1 1 1 □ - □□□□□ - 0 □A 0

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Over current and earth | | | | | | |
fault protection for radial | | | | | | |
feeders, capacitor banks and Number of elements | | | | | | |
industrial and commercial plant. Three pole relay 3 | | | | | |
| | | | | |
| | | | |
3 pole phase-fault or C | | | |
2 pole phase-fault and earth-fault | | | |
2 pole phase-fault and sensitive/restricted earth-fault (SEF/REF) D | | | |
| | | |
1/ 5 A A | | |
| | |
I/O range | | |
1 Binary Input / 7 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover) 0 | |
| |
|
Housing size |
Case size E6 (4U high) D
for 5 binary inputs and 110 V application, order resistor box VCE:2512H10065 in addition
for 9 binary inputs and 220 V application, order two resistor boxes VCE:2512H10067 in addition
Refer to website for application note about ESI48-4 compliance.

Nondirectional O/C relay □ - □□ □ □ □

7 S G 1 1 1 - 0 □A0
▲ ▲▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
capacitor banks and Number of elements | | | | | | |
industrial and commercial plant. Four pole relay 4 | | | | | |
| | | | | |
| | | | |
3 pole phase-fault and earth-fault E | | | |
3 pole phase-fault and sensitive/restricted earth-fault (SEF/REF) or F | | | |
2 pole phase-fault and earth fault and sensitive/restricted earth-fault | | | |
(SEF/REF) | | | |
| | | |
1/ 5 A A | | |
| | |
I/O range | | |
| |
|
Housing size |
Refer to website for application note about ESI48-4 compliance

Nondirectional O/C relay 7 S G 1 1 1 □ - □□□□ □ - 0 □A 0

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
capacitor banks and Number of elements | | | | | | |
industrial and commercial plant. Four pole relay (fixed I/O) 5 | | | | | |
| | | | | |
| | | | |
| | | |
1A B | | |
5A C | | |
| | |
I/O range | | |
| |
| |
|
Housing size |

Directional O/C relay 7 S G 1 1 2 □ - □□□□□ - □□ A 0

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Ideal for directional overcurrent | | | | | | | |
and earth fault protection of solid | | | | | | | |
ring systems utilising the fully Number of elements | | | | | | | |
independent bi-directional Single pole relay 1 | | | | | | |
feature. | | | | | | |
Auxiliary supply/binary input voltage | | | | | | |
24/30/48 V DC auxiliary, 30 V binary input 0 | | | | | |
110/220 V DC auxiliary, 30 V binary input 1 | | | | | |
110/220 V DC auxiliary, 48 V binary input 1) 3 | | | | | |
110/220 V DC auxiliary, 110 V low burden binary input 4 | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Type of elements | | | | | |
Single pole earth-fault directional G | | | 2 |
Single pole earth-fault directional G | | | 3 |
Single pole sensitive/restricted directional earth-fault (SEF/REF) H | | | 2 |
Single pole sensitive/restricted directional earth-fault (SEF/REF) H | | | 3 |
| | | | |
Nominal current | | | | |
1/ 5 A A | | | |
| | | |
I/O range | | | |
1 Binary Input / 7 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover) 0 | | |
| | |
Communication interface | | |
Fibre optic (ST-connector) / IEC 60870-5-103 or Modbus RTU 1 | |
| | |
RS485 interface / IEC 60870-5-103 or Modbus RTU 2 | |
| |
Directional measurement characteristic angle (CA) | |
0º, -15º, -45º, -65º for earth faults 2 |
|
Housing size |

Directional O/C relay 7 S G 1 1 2 □▲ - □▲ □▲ □▲ □▲ □▲ - □▲ □▲ A 0

independent bi-directional Three pole relay 3 | | | | | | |
feature. | | | | | | |
| | | | | |
3 pole phase-fault directional J | | | 1 E
2 pole phase-fault directional and sensitive/restricted K | | | 1 E
earth-fault (SEF/REF) | | |
2 pole phase-fault directional and earth-fault directional or 2 pole L | | | 4 E
phase-fault directional and earth-fault | | |
2 pole phase-fault directional and earth-fault directional or L | | | 5 E
2 pole phase-fault directional and earth-fault | | |
2 pole phase-fault and earth-fault directional M| | | 2 D
2 pole phase-fault and earth-fault directional M| | | 3 D
| | | | |
1/ 5 A A | | | |
| | | |
I/O range | | | |
5 Binary Inputs / 11 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover) 1 | | |
| | |
| |
+30º, +45º for phase faults 1 |
+30º, +45º for phase faults and 0º, -15º, -45º, -65º for earth faults 4 |
|
Housing size |
Case size E8 (4U high) E

Directional O/C relay 7 S G 1 1 2 □ - □□□□□ - □□ A 0

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
independent bi-directional Four pole relay 4 | | | | | | |
feature. | | | | | | |
| | | | | |
3 pole phase-fault directional and sensitive/restricted N | | | 1 E
earth-fault (SEF/REF) | | | | |
3 pole phase-fault directional and earth-fault directional or 3 pole P | | | 4 E
phase-fault directional and earth-fault | | | | |
3 pole phase-fault and earth-fault directional Q | | | 2 D
| | | | |
1/ 5 A A | | | |
| | | |
I/O range | | | |
| | |
| |
|
Housing size |

Directional O/C relay 7 S G 1 1 2 □ - □□ □□□ - □□ A 0

▲ ▲▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
independent bi-directional fea- Four pole relay (numeric VT) 5 | | | | | | |
ture, includes additional voltage | | | | | | |
protection and energy metering. Auxiliary supply/binary input voltage | | | | | | |
| | | | | |
3 pole phase-fault directional and earth-fault directional R | | | | |
3 pole phase-fault directional and sensitive/restricted S | | | | |
earth fault (SEF/REF) or | | | | |
2 pole phase-fault directional and earth fault directional and sensi- | | | | |
tive/restricted earth-fault (SEF/REF) | | | | |
| | | | |
1/5 A and 63/110 V AC D | | | |
| | | |
I/O range | | | |
| | |
| |
-90º to +90º in steps of 1º 6 |
|
Housing size |

Nondirectional O/C Relay with auto-reclose □ - □□□□□

7 S G 1 1 4 - 0 □A 0
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Integrated overcurrent and earth | | | | | | |
fault relay with multishot | | | | | | |
autoreclose facilities. | | | | | | |
Number of elements | | | | | | |
Four pole relay 4 | | | | | |
| | | | | |
110/220 V DC auxiliary, 48 V binary input 1) 3 | | | | |
| | | | |
3 pole phase-fault and sensitive/restricted earth-fault (SEF/REF) or 2 pole F | | | |
phase-fault and earth fault and sensitive/restricted earth-fault (SEF/REF) | | | |
| | | |
1/ 5 A A | | |
| | |
I/O range | | |
| |
|
Housing size |

Directional O/C relay with auto-reclose 7 S G 1 1 6 □ - □□□□□ - □□ A 0

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Bi-directional version of ARGUS 4. | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
Number of elements | | | | | | | |
Four pole relay 4 | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
Auxiliary supply /binary input voltage | | | | | | |
| | | | | |
3 pole phase-fault directional and sensitive/restricted earth-fault N | | | 1 E
(SEF/REF) | | | | |
| | | | |
1/ 5 A A | | | |
| | | |
I/O range | | | |
| | |
| |
| |
|
Housing size |

Reyrolle
Protection
Devices
7SG117 Argus 7
Synchronising Relay
Answers for energy

7SG117 Argus 7
Synchronising Relay
Fig 1.
Independent check & system synchronising settings
Adjustable slip frequency, phase angle and voltage blocking
Differential blocking
Split system detection
Configurable dead bus and/or dead line charge
Integrated manual close guard feature
Fibre optic or RS485 electrical comms port
Synchronising bypass logic is provided to connect a dead line

or bus to a live line or bus. For manual synchronising the
relay includes a circuit breaker close guard feature, which is
used to prevent the control switch being held closed during
a synchronising operation. This feature is implemented using
internal logic and removes the need for an external relay.
Description Monitoring Functions

The 7SG117 Argus 7 is a combined check and system
synchronising relay which can carry out controlled closing of a
circuit breaker using measurements of the line and bus
Primary voltages
voltages. The relay will prevent closure of the circuit breaker if
Secondary voltages
the differences in phase angle, slip frequency or magnitude of
Frequencies
the voltages fall outside prescribed limits.
Phase angles
If the parameters are within limits, the relay will issue an Status inputs
output which can be used to close the circuit breaker directly Output contacts
or in conjunction with an autoreclose scheme.
Relays are part of the comprehensive range of Argus-platform
based numeric relays. They have extensive control functions,
Data Storage and
which are supplemented by advanced metering, data storage Communication
and fibre-optic communications. Supervisory and self-
monitoring features give added confidence to the user as well
as reduced maintenance and down time. Reydisp relay Serial communications conform to IEC60870-5-103
interrogation software gives user-friendly access to relay protocol. Up to 254 relays may be connected in a ring
settings, meters and operational data. network and addressed individually.
A fibre-optic communications port is provided on the rear of

Function Overview the relay. It is optimised for 62.5/125μm glass fibre using ST®
(BFOC/2.5) bayonet connectors. Optionally an RS485 electrical
connector can be provided.
Indication
LEDs for CHECK/SYS SYNCH, SYS SPLIT and PROTECTION

HEALTHY status.

and fault data.

resolution. These are available via the communications.

Trip/Close records
Inputs and Outputs
The last 10 records are available from the fascia and via the
data communications channel.
Voltage Inputs
The record contains information for the time and date of close
and the voltage, frequency and slip values at the time of close. AC Voltage Frequency
63.5/110V 50 / 60Hz
Disturbance recorder
Burden < 0.2VA
The waveform recorder may be triggered from a synchronising Continuous Withstand 250V
function or external input and has a configurable pre-fault
trigger. DC Auxiliary supply
Up to 5 a.c. voltage waveforms are stored. together with the

Rated DC Voltage Operating Range V dc
digital states of the status inputs and output relays
24/30/48V 18 to 60V
Reydisp Evolution 110/220V 88 to 280V
Reydisp Evolution is common to the entire range of Reyrolle Operate State Burden
numeric products. It provides the means for the user to apply Quiescent (Typical) 3W
settings, interrogate settings and retrieve events and Maximum 10 W
disturbance waveforms from the Relay.
Allowable superimposed ac ≤ 12% of dc
component
Application Allowable breaks/dips in
voltage

Check or system synchronising is required whenever two parts nominal voltage)
of a power system network, each containing generation, have
to be connected or re-connected together. To avoid shock DC status input
loading and possible damage to primary electrical plant the
voltage, frequency and phase angle difference between the Nominal voltage Operating range
two systems should be within acceptable limits relative to one 30V 18 - 37.5 V D C
another.
48V 37.5 - 60 V D C
Where the two systems have been previously interconnected, 110V 87.5 - 137.5 V D C
then the frequencies of the two systems will drift apart slowly 220V 175 - 280 V D C
following circuit breaker tripping and the phase angle
difference will increase. Here the slip rate will be small and the Attribute Value
circuit breaker can be closed using check synchronising Min. DC Current for
settings as the limiting parameters. Operation:
However, if the two systems become asynchronous so one 30/48V 10mA
system is an ‘island’ of generation then a high rate of slip may 110/220V <5mA
result causing the two systems to pass through anti-phase Reset/Operate voltage ratio ≥ 90 %
conditions. The relay will detect this system split condition, Typical response time 5 ms
inhibit the check synchronising algorithms and automatically Typical response time when
apply system synchronising settings as limiting parameters. programmed to energise an < 15 ms
Typically in this mode the slip rate will be much higher and so output relay contact
there will be a narrower allowable phase angle difference Recommended Minimum 40ms with setting of 20ms
before closing. In addition, closure of the circuit breaker will pulse duration PU delay for a.c. rejection
only be allowed under conditions of decreasing difference in
phase angle. The 30V and 48V inputs meet the requirements of the
ESI48-4 ES1 standard. However, the 110V or 220V inputs
will operate with a DC current of less than 10mA. If 110V
Technical Data or 220V inputs compliant with ESI48-4 ES1 are required,
a 48 volt status input can be supplied with external
dropper resistors as follows:
For full technical data refer to the Performance
Specification of the Technical Manual. Nominal Voltage Resistor Value Wattage
110V 2k7 ± 5% 2.5 W
220 V 8k2 ± 5% 6.0 W

Each status input has associated timers which can be Across normally open 1.0 kV rms
programmed to give time delayed pick-up and time delayed contacts for 1 minute
drop-off. The pick-up delays have default settings of 20ms,
thus providing rejection and immunity to an AC input signal. High frequency disturbance
Status inputs will not respond to the following:-
IEC 60255-22-1 class III
• 250V RMS 50/60Hz applied for two seconds through a 0.1
μF capacitor. 2.5kV longitudinal mode
< 3% deviation
• Discharge of a 10μF capacitor charged to maximum DC 1.0kV transverse mode
auxiliary supply voltage.
Output relays IEC 60255-22-2 class III
Carry continuously 5A ac or dc 8kV, Contact discharge ≤ 5% variation

Make and carry 20A ac or dc for 0.5s Fast transient
(L/R ≤ 40 ms and V ≤ 30A ac or dc for 0.2s IEC 255-22-4 class IV
300V)
Breaking Capacity 4kV, 5/50ns, 2.5 kHz, ≤ 3% variation
( ≤ 5 A and ≤ 300 V): repetitive
AC Inductive 250 VA at p.f. ≥ 0.4 Conducted RFI
DC Resistive 75 W
IEC 60255-22-6 class IV
50 W at L/R ≤ 10ms
10 V, 0.15 to 80 MHz ≤ 5% variation
Minimum number of
operations 106 at maximum load
Conducted Limits
Minimum recommended
0.5 W minimum of 10mA or 5V IEC 60255-25
load

Mechanical Quasi-peak Average
0.15 to 0.5 MHz 79 66
0.5 to 30 MHz 73 60
Vibration (Sinusoidal)
IEC 60255-21-1 Class I Radiated Limits
IEC 60255-25
Vibration response 0.5gn ≤ 5% variation
Vibration endurance 1.0gn
Limits at 10 m
Frequency Range
Shock and Bump 30 to 230 MHz 40
IEC 60255-21-2 Class I 230 to 10000 MHz 47
Shock response 5gn, 11ms ≤ 5% variation 5gn,

Radio11ms
frequency interference
Shock withstand 15gn, 11ms 15gn,
IEC60 11ms
255-22-3
10 gn, Bump test 10gn, 16ms 10gn, 16ms
10 V/m, 80 to 1000 MHz ≤ 5% variation
Seismic
Seismic Response 1gn ≤ 5% variation
Electrical Tests
Insulation IEC 255-5

IEC 255-5 rms levels for 1 minute
Between all terminals and 2.0 kV rms

earth for 1 minute
Between independent 2.0 kV rms
circuits for 1 minute

Check and System Synchronising (25)
Environmental
Live and Dead voltage level
Temperature Dead Line/Bus 5.0 to 127.0 V step 0.5 V
IEC 68-2-1/2 Live Line/Bus 10.0 to 132.0 V step 0.5 V
Accuracy Live operate Live setting ± 1%
Operating range -10°C to +55°C Live reset Dead setting ± 1%
Storage range -25°C to +70°C Dead operate Dead setting ± 1%
Dead reset Live setting ± 1%
Humidity Undervoltage level
IEC 68-2-3 Setting 22.0 to 132.0 V step 0.5V
Accuracy Operate Setting ± 1%
Operational test 56 days at 40°C and 95% Reset < 104% of operate
RH level
Voltage difference level
Performance Setting 0.5 to 44.0 V step 0.5V
Accuracy Operate Setting ± 2%
or 0.5 V
General Accuracy Reset > 90% of operate
level
Reference Conditions or
General IEC 60255-3 > operate level –
Auxiliary supply Nominal 2.0V
Frequency 50Hz or 60Hz Slip Frequency
Ambient temperature 20 °C Setting 20 to 2000 mHz step 5 mHz
Accuracy Operate Setting – 15mHz +
Accuracy Influencing Factors 0mHz
Reset Operate – 0mHz +
Temperature 15mHz
-10 °C to +55 °C ≤ 5 % variation Check Sync., System Sync. Phase angle
Frequency Setting 5 to 90° step 1°
Accuracy Operate Setting - 3° + 0°
57 Hz to 62 Hz
Reset Operate - 0° + 3°
Operating ≤ 1 % variation
time: System Split phase angle
Setting 90 to 175° step 1°
Accuracy Operate Setting ± 1.5°
Reset Latched
All timers
Setting 0.1 to 100.0 sec step 0.1 sec
Accuracy ± 1% or 10ms

Case Dimensions

Connection Diagram
7SG117
Va 7
1
BO 1
8
2
9
Vb
BO 2
3 10
16
4
BO 3 18
A B C 17
+ve 11
5
-ve BI 1 BO 4
6 12
+ve 19
27
BI 2 BO 5
20
+ve 21
26
BI 3 BO 6
22
+ve 23
25
BI 4 BO 7
-ve 24
28
+ve
+ve
13
GND
-ve
14
-ve
15 Earth
Term
Case
earth
Fig 3. Connection Diagram for 7SG117 Synchronising Relay

Ordering Information – 7SG117
Check and system synchronising relay 7 S G 1 1 7 □ - □□□□□ - 0 □A 0

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
Two pole relay 2 | | | | | |
| | | | | |
| | | | | |
| | | | |
Type of voltage relay | | | | |
Voltage measuring relay providing check and system synchronising T | | | |
| | | |
| | | |
Nominal voltage inputs | | | |
63/110 V AC E | | |
| | |
I/O range | | |
4 Binary Inputs / 7 Binary Outputs (incl. 1 changeover and 1 4 | |
normally closed) | |
| |
Fibre optic (ST-connector) / IEC 60870-5-103 1 |
RS485 interface / IEC 60870-5-103 2 |
|
Housing size |
for 5 binary inputs and 110V application, order resistor box VCE:2512H10065 in addition
for 5 binary inputs and 220V application, order resistor box VCE:2512H10067 in addition

Reyrolle
Protection
Devices
7SG118 Argus 8
Voltage & Frequency Relay
Answers for energy

7SG118 Argus 8
Voltage and Frequency Relay
Data Storage and

Communication
Serial communications conform to IEC60870-5-103 or

Modbus RTU protocol. Up to 254 relays may be connected
in a ring network and addressed individually.
A fibre-optic communications port is provided on the rear of

the relay. It is optimised for 62.5/125μm glass fibre using ST®
(BFOC/2.5) bayonet connectors. Optionally an RS485 electrical
connector can be provided.
Indication
LEDs for STARTER, TRIP and PROTECTION HEALTHY status.

Description
and fault data.
7SG118 Argus 8 voltage and frequency relays are numerical,
multi-function devices that are designed to be applied for Sequence of event records
the protection of transmission, distribution and industrial
systems. Up to 500 events are stored and time tagged to 1ms
The relay provides phase under and over voltage, neutral
displacement overvoltage, negative sequence overvoltage Fault records
and under and over-frequency protection elements.
The last 10 fault records are available from the fascia with time
These relays have extensive protection functions, which are and date of trip, measured quantities and type of fault.
supplemented by advanced metering, data storage and
communications. Supervisory and self monitoring features Disturbance recorder
give added confidence to the user as well as reduced
maintenance and down time. A menu-based interface gives The waveform recorder may be triggered from a protection
user-friendly access to relay settings, meters and operational function or external input and has a configurable pre-fault
data. trigger. Up to 5 fault waveforms may be stored.
AC voltage waveforms are stored together with the digital

Function Overview states of the status inputs and output relays.
Reydisp Evolution
• 2 or 3 voltage inputs
• Under/Over Voltage
• Negative phase sequence over voltage numeric products. It provides the means for the user to apply
• Neutral voltage displacement settings, interrogate settings and retrieve events and
• Under/Over Frequency disturbance waveforms from the Relay.
• Under voltage blocking
• Fibre optic or RS485 electrical communications port

Application Description of Functionality
Undervoltage and overvoltage Relay variants with two voltage inputs have a '2 Systems A/B‘
Four independent elements are supplied, each of which can connection setting. This allows the voltage of two different
be set to operate for under or over voltage conditions. Each systems each to be assigned two of the under/overvoltage
has separate definite time delay elements. These can be elements.
used to protect generators against over-voltages, motors
against loss of supply or applied as backup protection in the This feature could be used as part of a local generation
event of defective system regulating equipment. scheme with islanding capability, where one input is
allocated to the local system, and the other to the grid.
Negative sequence overvoltage
Two independent elements are supplied, each of which has a Note that in this mode the frequency elements are disabled.
definite time delay element. These can be used to monitor
the quality of the supply and protect plant against system Blocking operation
unbalance. Each protection element can be blocked from operation by a
user-defined status input signal. In addition, the voltage,
Neutral voltage displacement frequency and NPS elements can be protected against
Two independent elements are supplied, each of which has a maloperation during system de-energisation using the
definite time delay element. These can be used to detect Voltage Blocking Threshold. Each frequency element may
earth faults in high impedance earthed or isolated systems. also be blocked by any combination of the voltage elements
For this feature, the residual voltage can be measured starting.
directly from an open delta tertiary winding or (for 3-phase
variants) calculated internally from the phase voltage inputs. Trip circuit supervision
The trip circuit connections can be monitored by a status
These elements include a third harmonic filter, which de- input. This is linked to an alarm and may be configured to
sensitises the elements to any superimposed third harmonic operate an output relay.
frequencies.
Circuit breaker maintenance
Underfrequency and overfrequency A circuit breaker operations counter is provided. An
Four independent elements are supplied, each of which can operations count level can be set which, when reached, can
be set to operate for under or over frequency. Each has be used as an input to a condition-based maintenance
separate definite time delay elements. These can be applied regime.
wherever frequency protection is required to maintain
system stability e.g. in load shedding schemes. The accuracy
and security of operation of the numeric algorithms enables
the relay to be employed to detect any frequency
abnormalities.

The 30V and 48V inputs meet the requirements of the
Technical Data ESI48-4 ES1 standard. However, the 110V or 220V inputs
will operate with a DC current of less than 10mA. If 110V
or 220V inputs compliant with ESI48-4 ES1 are required,
a 48 volt status input can be supplied with external
Specification of the Technical Manual.
dropper resistors as follows:
Inputs and Outputs Nominal Voltage Resistor Value Wattage

110V 2k7 ± 5% 2.5 W
220 V 8k2 ± 5% 6.0 W
Voltage Inputs
Each status input has associated timers which can be
AC Voltage Frequency programmed to give time delayed pick-up and time delayed
63.5/110V 50 / 60Hz drop-off. The pick-up delays have default settings of 20ms,
thus providing rejection and immunity to an AC input signal.
Burden ≤ 0.2VA Status inputs will not respond to the following:-
Continuous Withstand 250V
• 250V RMS 50/60Hz applied for two seconds through a
0.1μF capacitor.
DC Auxiliary supply
• Discharge of a 10μF capacitor charged to maximum DC
Rated DC Voltage Operating Range V dc auxiliary supply voltage.
24/30/48V 18 to 60V
110/220V 88 to 280V Output relays
Operate State Burden Carry continuously 5A ac or dc

Quiescent (Typical) 3W Make and carry 20A ac or dc for 0.5s
Maximum 10 W (L/R ≤ 40 ms and V ≤ 30A ac or dc for 0.2s
300V)
Allowable superimposed ac ≤ 12% of dc Breaking Capacity
component voltage ( ≤ 5 A and ≤ 300 V):
Allowable breaks/dips in AC Resistive 1250 VA
AC Inductive 250 VA at p.f. ≥ 0.4
nominal voltage) DC Resistive 75 W
50 W at L/R ≤ 10ms
DC status input
Minimum number of
operations 106 at maximum load
Nominal voltage Operating range Minimum recommended
30V 18 - 37.5 V D C 0.5 W minimum of 10mA or 5V
load
48V 37.5 - 60 V D C
110V 87.5 - 137.5 V D C
220V 175 - 280 V D C
Attribute Value
Min. DC Current for
Operation:
30/48V 10mA
110/220V <5mA
Reset/Operate voltage ratio ≥ 90 %
Typical response time 5 ms
programmed to energise an < 15 ms
Recommended Minimum 40ms with setting of 20ms
pulse duration PU delay for a.c. rejection

Conducted RFI
Mechanical IEC 60255-22-6 class IV
Vibration (Sinusoidal) 10 V, 0.15 to 80 MHz ≤ 5% variation

Conducted Limits
Vibration 0.5gn ≤ 5% 0.5gn IEC 60255-25
response variation
Vibration 1.0gn 1.0gn Frequency Range Limits dB(µV)
endurance Quasi-peak Average
0.15 to 0.5 MHz 79 66
Shock and Bump 0.5 to 30 MHz 73 60
Radiated Limits
Shock 5gn, 11ms ≤ 5% 5gn, 11ms IEC 60255-25
response variation
Shock 15gn, 11ms 15gn, 11ms Limits at 10 m
Frequency Range
withstand Quasi-peak, dB(µV/m)
10 gn, Bump 10gn, 16ms 10gn, 16ms 30 to 230 MHz 40
test 230 to 10000 MHz 47
Seismic Radio frequency interference

IEC 60255-21-3 Class I IEC60 255-22-3
Seismic Response 1gn ≤ 5% variation 10 V/m, 80 to 1000 MHz ≤ 5% variation
Electrical Tests Environmental
Insulation IEC 255-5 Temperature

IEC 255-5 rms levels for 1 minute IEC 68-2-1/2

earth for 1 minute
Between independent 2.0 kV rms
Humidity
IEC 68-2-3
Across normally open 1.0 kV rms
contacts for 1 minute
RH
High frequency disturbance
2.5kV longitudinal mode

< 3% deviation
8kV, Contact discharge ≤ 5% variation
Fast transient
4kV, 5/50ns, 2.5 kHz, ≤ 3% variation

repetitive

Delay (additional to operating time)
Performance Setting 0.00 to 600 sec
General Accuracy
Neutral Over Voltage protection (59N)
General IEC 60255-3 No. of elements 2
Auxiliary supply Nominal Level
Frequency 50Hz or 60Hz Setting Vs 1.0 to 100.0 V step 0.5 V
Ambient temperature 20 °C Accuracy Operate: setting ± 1%
or ± 0.5 V
Accuracy Influencing Factors Reset: ≥ 95% of operate value
(for Vs > 7.5 V)
Temperature
-10 °C to +55 °C ≤ 5 % variation Operating Time
Frequency Operate 0 V to 1.1x Vs ≤ 85 ms
47 Hz to 52 Hz Level: ≤ 1 % variation 0 V to 2.0x Vs ≤ 85 ms
57 Hz to 62 Hz Operating ≤ 1 % variation Reset 1.1x to 0.9x Vs ≤ 80 ms
time: 1.1xVs to 0 V: ≤ 70 ms
Phase Under/Over Voltage protection (27/59) Setting 0.00 to 600 sec
No. of elements 4
Level Under/Over Frequency protection (81U/O)
Setting Vs 5.0 to 200.0 V step 0.5 V
Hysteresis 1 to 90 % step 1 % No. of elements 4
Accuracy Operate: setting ± 1% or ± 0.25 V Level
U/V reset: (operate + hysteresis) Setting 47.00 to 62.00 Hz step 0.01 Hz
O/V reset: (operate - hysteresis) Accuracy Operate: setting ± 10mHz
U/F reset: ≤ operate + 20 mHz
Operating Time O/F reset: ≤ operate - 20 mHz
Under-Voltage 1.1x to 0.9x Vs: ≤ 65 ms
Reset 0 V to 1.1x Vs ≤ 75 ms Operating Time
0 V to 2.0x Vs: ≤ 65 ms for ROCOF between typically: < 140 ms
Over-Voltage 0 V to 1.1x Vs: ≤ 55 ms 0.1 - 10 Hz/s maximum: 175 ms *
O V to 2.0xVs: ≤ 45ms Delay (additional to operating time)
Reset 1.1x to 0.9x Vs: ≤ 50 ms Setting 0.00 to 600 sec
Delay (additional to operating time) Accuracy ± 1 % or ± 30 ms
Setting 0.00 to 600 sec
Accuracy ± 1 % or ± 30 ms * 7SG118n-nW 300-series meets NGC specification for an
underfrequency operating time of 150ms maximum
Negative Sequence Over Voltage protection (47)
Voltage Blocking Element
No. of elements 2
Level Level
Setting Vs 1.0 to 100.0 V step 0.5 V Setting 1.0 to 100.0 V step 1 V
Hysteresis 1 to 90 % step 1 %
Accuracy Operate: setting ± 1% or ± 0.5 V
Reset: ≥ 95% of operate value
(for Vs > 3.5 V)
Operating Time
Operate 0 V to 1.1xVs ≤ 85 ms
0 V to 2.0xVs ≤ 85 ms
Reset 1.1x to 0.9x ≤ 80 ms
Vs:
1.1xVs to 0 Vs: ≤ 70 ms

Case Dimensions

Connection Diagram
7SG1182
1 7
BO 1
See 8
connection 2
9
diagrams BO 2
10
below 3
16
4
BO 3 18
17
+ve 11
5
-ve BI 1 BO 4
6 12
+ve 19
27
BI 2 BO 5
20
+ve 21
26
BI 3 BO 6
22
+ve 23
25
BI 4 BO 7
-ve 24
28
+ve
+ve
13
OPTIONAL
GND
RS485
-ve
14
-ve
15 Earth
Term
Case
earth
Va
1
1
A B C 3 Vab
Va 2
4
Vb
Phase-earth + 3Vo connection
Vc
3
Vbc
4
A B C
Va
1 2 Phase-phase connection
Vb
Note
A B C 3 For the phase-phase and phase-earth
connections, any phasing may be used
4
Phase-phase + 3Vo connection
Fig 3. Connection Diagram for 7SG1182 Relay

Connection Diagram
+ve
13
55 7SG1183 -ve
14
56 Earth 15
See Case
53 earth
connection
diagrams 7
below 54
BO 1 5
51 6
8
52
BO 2 10
+ve 16
3
-ve BI 1 BO 3 18
4
17
EXPANSION PCB 11
EXPANSION PCB
BO 4
+ve 12 +ve
35 35
-ve BI 2 19
BI 2 -ve
36 36
BO 5
+ve 20 +ve
33 33
-ve BI 3 BI 3 -ve
34 21 34
BO 6
31 22 31
-ve BI 4 BI 4 -ve
32 23 32
+ve
BO 7
29 24 +ve
29
-ve BI 5 BI 5 -ve
30 30
+ve
43 37
-ve BI 6 BO 8
44 38
41 40
-ve BI 7 BO 9
42 41
+ve
39
41
-ve BI 8 BO 10
40
42
+ve
37
43
-ve BI 9 BO 11
38
44
See note 4 See note 3
Note
For the phase-phase and phase-earth
connections, any phasing may be used
Va
55 55
Vae Vab
56 Va 56
Vb Vb
53 53
Vbe Vc Vbc
54 54
51 51
Vc A B C
A B C
Vae Vac
52 52
3 Phase-earth
connection 3 Phase-phase connection

Voltage/frequency relay 7 S G 1 1 8 □ - □□□□□ - 0 □A 0

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
Two pole relay 2 | | | | | |
| | | | | |
| | | | |
Type of relay | | | | |
100 series: Voltage measuring relay providing under & overvoltage, U | | | |
negative sequence overvoltage and neutral voltage displacement | | | |
200 series: Voltage measuring relay providing under & overvoltage, V | | | |
under & over frequency, | | | |
300 series: Voltage measuring relay providing under & overvoltage, W | | | |
Under & over frequency with improved operating time, | | | |
| | | |
63/110 V AC E | | |
| | |
I/O range | | |
4 Binary Inputs / 7 Binary Outputs (incl. 1 changeover and 1 4 | |
normally closed) | |
| |
|
Housing size |
2) An additional unit is required for use with capacitor cones, order 7XG2100-1AA00-0AA0

Voltage/frequency relay 7 S G 1 1 8 □ - □□□□□ - 0 □A 0

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
Three pole relay 3 | | | | | |
| | | | | |
110/220 V DC auxiliary, 48 V binary input 1) 3 | I | | |
| | | | |
Type of relay | | | | |
100 series: Voltage measuring relay providing under & overvoltage, U | | | |
200 series: Voltage measuring relay providing under & overvoltage, V | | | |
under & over frequency, | | | |
300 series: Voltage measuring relay providing under & overvoltage, W | | | |
Under & over frequency with improved operating time, | | | |
| | | |
63/110 V AC E | | |
| | |
I/O range | | |
| |
|
Housing size |
2) An additional unit is required for use with capacitor cones, order 7XG2100-1AA00-0AA0

Reyrolle
Protection
Devices
7SR242 Duobias
Transformer Protection Relay
Answers for energy

7SR242 Duobias
Transformer Protection Relay
51G/N Time Delayed Measured Earth Fault /SEF
81 Under/Over Frequency
User Interface

3 fixed LEDs
16 or 24 Programmable Tri-colour LEDs (Option)
Primary current phases and earth
Description Secondary current phases and earth
Relay Operate and restraint currents
Positive Phase Sequence (PPS) Current
Our new generation of integrated transformer protection Negative Phase Sequence (NPS) Current
relays are designated the 7SR24 series. The relays utilise Zero Phase Sequence (ZPS) Current
years of numeric relay protection experience with the Thermal status
‘Duobias’ family of products. Primary Single phase voltage*
Housed in 4U high, size E8 or E10 cases, these relays provide Secondary single phase voltage*
protection, control, monitoring, instrumentation and Data logging and Demand Metering
metering with integrated input and output logic, data Frequency & fluxing*
logging & fault reports. Communication access to relay Binary Input/binary output and virtual I/O status
functionality is via a front USB port for local PC connection Trip circuit healthy/failure
or rear electrical RS485 port for remote connection. Time and date
Additional rear port options are available. Fault records
Event records
Waveform records
Circuit breaker trip counters
Function Overview I2t summation for contact wear
* Optional voltage measurements from single phase VT
input
Standard Functionality
64H High Impedance REF
74TCS/CCS Trip/Close Circuit Supervision Data Communications
81HBL2 Inrush Detector
81HBL5 Overfluxing Detector
87BD Biased Differential (2Windings) Standard
87HS Current Differential High-Set Communication access to relay functionality is via a front
8 Settings Groups USB port for local PC connection or rear electrical RS485 port
Password Protection – 2 levels for remote connection
Programmable Logic
Self Monitoring Optional
2 Rear ST fibre optic ports (2 x Tx/Rx) + IRIG-B port
24 Over-Fluxing
37 Undercurrent Protocols
46BC Open Circuit
IEC60870-5-103, Modbus RTU and optional DNP 3.0
49 Thermal Overload
protocols – User selectable with programmable data points
50 Instantaneous Overcurrent
50G/N Instantaneous Earth Fault
51 Time Delayed Overcurrent

Each counter has a user set target operations count which,
Description of Functionality when reached, can be mapped to raise Alarms/ Binary
Outputs.
These counters assist with maintenance scheduling.
The circuit breaker fail function may be triggered from an Function LED’s
internal trip signal or from a binary input. Line and neutral 16 or 24 user programmable tri-colour LED’s are provided
currents are monitored following a trip signal and an output eliminating the need for expensive panel mounted pilot
is issued if any current is still detected after a specified time lights and associated wiring. Each LED can be user set to red,
interval. Alternatively, if the trip is from a mechanical protec- green or yellow allowing for clear indication of the
tion the circuit breaker position can be used to determine a associated function’s state. A slip-in label pocket along-side
failure. A second time delay is available to enable another enables the user to insert his own notation. A printer
stage to be utilized if required. An input is also available to compatible template is available.
bypass the time delays when the circuit breaker is known to be
faulty.
64H Restricted Earth Fault - scheme

The measured earth fault input may be used in a high
impedance restricted earth fault scheme. Required external
series stabilising resistor and non-linear voltage limiting
shunt resistor can be supplied.
74TCS/CCS Trip/Close Circuit Supervision

The trip and close circuit(s) can be monitored via binary
inputs. Circuit failure raises an HMI alarm and output(s).
81HBL2 Inrush Detector

Where second harmonic current is detected (i.e. during
transformer energisation) user selectable elements can be
blocked.
81HBL5 Overfluxing Detector

Fifth Harmonic Detectors can be user selected to block the Fig 1 : Tri-colour LED’s
Biased Differential Elements.
87BD Biased Differential

The differential characteristic incorporates two bias stages –
the first stage for steady state errors i.e. tap position and CT
ratios the second stage for transient errors i.e. CT saturation. 24 Over-Fluxing
Two elements each provide a definite time lag (DTL)
87HS High-Set Differential characteristic, the third element provides a user defined
High speed differential elements provide protection against characteristic. Operates if Volts/Hertz ratio is above setting
high levels of internal fault current. for duration of delay.
Programmable Logic 27/59 Under/Over Voltage

The user can map Binary Inputs and Protection operated Each element has settings for pickup level, drop-off level and
outputs to Function Inhibits, Logic Inputs, LEDs and/or Binary Definite Time Lag (DTL) delays. Operates if voltage ‘exceeds’
Outputs. setting for duration of delay. Can be applied in load
The user can also enter up to 16 equations defining scheme shedding schemes.
logic using standard functions e.g. Timers, Latches, AND/OR
gates, Inverters and Counters. 37/37G Undercurrent
Each Protection element output can be used for Alarm & Each element has settings for pickup level and Definite Time
Indication and/or tripping. Lag (DTL) delays. Operates if current falls below setting for
duration of delay.
For each winding two circuit breaker operations counters are 46NPS Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent
provided. The Maintenance Counter records the overall Two DTL and two inverse/DTL elements are provided. NPS
number of operations and the Delta Counter the number of Current elements can be used to detect unbalances on the
operations since the last reset. system or remote earth faults when a delta-star transformer
I2t summation Counters provide a measure of the contact is in circuit.
wear indicating the total energy interrupted by the circuit
breaker contacts.

46BC Open Circuit
Each element has settings for pickup level and DTL delay.
With the circuit breaker closed, if the NPS:PPS current ratio is
above setting this could be due to an open circuit.
49 Thermal Overload
The thermal algorithm calculates the thermal states from the
measured line currents. Outputs are available for thermal
overload and thermal capacity.
50/51 Phase Fault

current, time-multiplier (51) and time-delays. IEC, ANSI or
user defined Time Current Characteristics can be selected.
The IDMT stage has a user programmable DTL or shaped
current/time reset characteristic, to improve grading with
electromechanical protection.
50G/51G/50N/51N Earth Fault

Two earth fault measurement modes are available. One
mode directly measures the earth current from an
independent CT, or the residual connection of the 3 line CTs
(50G/51G). The second mode derives the earth current
internally from the 3 phase CTs (50N/51N).
current, time-multiplier (51) and time-delays. IEC, ANSI or
user defined Time Current Characteristics can be selected..
The IDMT stage has a user programmable reset characteristic
either DTL or shaped current/time reset characteristic to
improve grading with electromechanical protection.
59N Neutral Overvoltage

One element provides a definite time lag (DTL)
characteristic; the second element provides an inverse/DTL
characteristic. Operates if Neutral voltage exceeds setting for
duration of delay.
Neutral overvoltage can be used to detect earth faults in
high impedance earthed or isolated systems.
81 Under/Overfrequency
Definite Time Lag (DTL) delays. Each element operates if
frequency exceeds setting for duration of delay. Typically
applied in load shedding schemes.

Data Acquisition - Reydisp Evolution

resolution.
Fault Records
The last 10 fault records are displayed on the HMI, with time
and date of trip, measured quantities and type of fault.
Waveform recorder
The waveform recorder stores analogue data for all phases,
the states of protection functions, Binary Inputs, LEDs and
Binary Outputs with pre & post trigger data. A record can be
triggered from Protection function, Binary input or via data
communications. 1 record of 10sec, 2 of 5sec, 5 of 2sec or
10 records of 1 second are stored. The ratio of pre-fault to
post fault storage can be set by the user.
Data Log
Provides a rolling record of line currents and voltage (where Reydisp Evolution is common to the entire range of Reyrolle
applicable) over a user selectable period of time. numeric products. It provides the means for the user to apply
settings interrogate settings and retrieve events and
disturbance waveforms from the Duobias relay.
Serial Communications
The relay offers a USB serial port as standard on the front of
all units. All of the relays functions can be set on a PC using
Reydisp Evolution via the USB port. The connection is made
with a USB cable and operates with a ‘plug and play’
connection, so no pre-setting of the relay is required.
The front port can be switched off or set to use either the
MODBUS-RTU, IEC60870-5-103, DNP3.0 (optional) or ASCII
protocols for testing purposes.
A rear RS485 electrical connection is available on all units for
system interface connections. An internal terminating
resistor is provided, which can be connected into the circuit
by adding a wire loop between the relevant terminals.
Fig 2. Typical RS485 connection
The rear RS485 can be user selected to be OFF, IEC60870-5-

103, MODBUS RTU or optional DNP3.0 protocol.

Binary Inputs
Technical Data
For full technical data refer to the Performance Specification 88V dc: Range 74 to 290V dc
Chapter of the Technical Manual. Maximum dc current for 1.5mA
operation
Binary Outputs
Inputs and Outputs
Operating Mode User selectable - Self or Hand
Current Inputs Reset
Contact Operate / Release 7ms / 3ms
Quantity 6 x Phase & 2 x Earth Time.
Rated Current IN 1/5A Making Capacity:
Measuring Range 80 x In Carry continuously 5A ac or dc
Frequency 50/60Hz (L/R ≤ 40 ms and V ≤ 300 30A ac or dc for 0.2s
Thermal Withstand: V)
Continuous 3.0 x In Breaking Capacity
10 Minutes 3.5 x In ( ≤ 5 A and ≤ 300 V):
5 Minutes 4.0 x In AC Resistive 1250 VA
3 Minutes 5.0 x In AC Inductive 250 VA at p.f. ≤ 0.4
2 Minutes 6.0 x In DC Resistive 75 W
3 Seconds 57.7A (1A) 202A (5A) DC Inductive 30 W at L/R ≤ 40ms
2 Seconds 70.7A (1A) 247A (5A) 50 W at L/R ≤ 10ms
1 Second 100A (1A) 350A (5A)
1 Cycle 700A (1A) 2500A (5A)
Burden @ In ≤ 0.1VA (1A phase and Earth Mechanical Tests
element)
≤ 0.3VA (5A phase and earth
element) Vibration (Sinusoidal)
Voltage Inputs
Quantity 1 (optional) Vibration response 0.5 gn ≤5%
Nominal Voltage 40…160V a.c. Range Vibration endurance 1.0 gn ≤5%
Instrumentation ≥ 0.8xVn ±1% Vn
Thermal Withstand: Shock and Bump
Continuous 300V IEC 60255-21-2 Class I
1 Second
Burden @ 110V ≤ 0.1 VA Type Level Variation
Shock response 5 gn, 11 ms ≤5%
DC Auxiliary supply Shock withstand 15 gn, 11 ms ≤5%
Bump test 10 gn, 16 ms ≤5%
30 to 220V dc Range 24 to 290 V dc Seismic
Nominal Voltage Quiescent Quiescent
Burden (typical) Burden (back- Type Level Variation
light) Seismic response 1 gn ≤5%
30V dc 6.0W 7.0W
48V dc 5.50W 6.50W Mechanical Classification
110V dc 6.5W 7.5W
220V dc 7.5W 8.5W Durability >106 operations
Allowable superimposed ac ≤ 12% of dc

component voltage
nominal voltage)

Electrical Tests IEC 60255-25
Insulation Type Limits at 10 m, Quasi-peak

30 to 230 MHz 40 dB(μV)
IEC 60255-5
230 to 10000 MHz 47 dB(μV)
Type Level
and earth
Type Limits
Between independent 2.0 kV AC RMS for 1 min Quasi-peak Average
circuits 0.15 to 0.5 MHz 79 dB(μV) 66 dB(μV)
Across normally open 1.0 kV AC RMS for 1 min 0.5 to 30 MHz 73 dB(μV) 60 dB(μV)
contacts
Radiated Immunity
Transient Overvoltage IEC 60255-22-3 Class III
IEC 60255-5
Between all terminals and 5 kV 80 MHz to 1000 10 V/m ≤5%
earth or between any two 1.2/50 µs MHz
independent circuits 0.5 J
High Frequency Disturbance IEC 61000-4-8, Class V
100 A/m continuous 50Hz; 1.257mT
1000 A/m for 3s
Common 2.5 kV ≤5%
(longitudinal) mode
Series (transverse) 1.0 kV ≤5% Climatic Tests
mode
Electrostatic Discharge Temperature

IEC 60255-22-2 Class IV IEC 60068-2-1/2
Type Level Variation Operating Range -10 °C to +55 °C

Contact discharge 8.0 kV ≤5% Storage range -25 °C to +70 °C
Fast Transients Humidity

IEC 60255-22-4 Class IV IEC 60068-2-3
Type Level Variation Operational test 56 days at 40 °C and 93 %

5/50 ns 2.5 kHz 4kV ≤5% relative humidity
repetitive
IP Ratings
Surge Immunity
IEC 60255-22-5 Type Level
Installed with cover IP 50
Type Level Variation Installed with cover IP 30
Between all 4.0 kV ≤ 10 % removed
terminals and earth
Between any two 2.0kV
Conducted Radio Frequency Interference

IEC 60255-22-6

0.15 to 80 MHz 10 V ≤5%

49 Thermal Overload
Performance
Operate levels Operate and Alarm
27/59 Under/Over Voltage Setting Range Is 0.10, 0.11…3.0 x In
Time Constant Setting 1,1.5…1000min
Operate time ⎧⎪ I 2 − I p2 ⎫⎪
Setting Range Vs 5, 5.5…200V t = τ × In ⎨ 2
)2 ⎬⎪⎭
⎪⎩ I − (k × I B
Hysteresis Setting 0. 0.1…80%
±5% absolute or ±100ms where
Vs Operate Level 100% Vs, ±1% or ±0.25V
Ip = prior current
Reset Level:
Undervoltage (100% + hyst) x Vop, ±1% or
0.25V Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input
Overvoltage (100% - hyst) x Vop, ±1% or
0.25V 50 Instantaneous & DTL OC&EF
Delay Setting td 0.00, 0.01…20, 20.5…100,
101…1000, 1010…10000, Elements Phase (OC), Derived Earth (N)
10100…14400s and Measured Earth (G)
Basic Operate Time : Number of Elements 2 x OC
0 to 1.1xVs 73ms ±10ms 2 x Derived EF (N)
0 to 2.0xVs 63ms ±10ms 2 x Measured EF (G)
1.1 to 0.5xVs 58ms ±10ms Setting Range Is 0.05,0.06…50 x In (OC, N)
Operate time following Tbasic + td , ±1% or ±10ms 0.005…25 x In (G)
delay. Time Delay 0.00…14400s
Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1% x In
Operate time:
37, 37G Undercurrent 50, 50G 0 to 2xIs – 35ms, ±10ms,
0 to 5xIs – 25ms, ±10ms
Number of Elements Phase (37) x 2 50N 0 to 2xIs – 35ms, ±10ms,
Earth (37G) x 2 0 to 5xIs – 30ms, ±10ms
Setting Range Is 0.05, 0.10…5.0 x In Operate time following Tbasic + td , ±1% or ±10ms
delay
Delay Setting td 0.00, 0.01…20, 20.5…100,
Inrush detector
101…1000, 1010…10000,
10100…14400s
51Time Delayed OC&EF)
Basic Operate Time: 35ms ±10ms
1.1 to 0.5xIn
Operate time following Tbasic + td , ±1% or ±10ms Elements Phase (OC), Derived Earth (N)
delay. and Measured Earth (G)
Overshoot Time < 40ms Number of Elements 2 x OC
Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input 2 x Derived EF (N)
4 x Measured EF (G)
46 Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent Characteristic IEC: NI,VI,EI,LTI
ANSI: MI,VI,EI
DTL
Setting Range Is 0.05, 0.1…2.5 x In (OC, N)
DT Setting Range Is 0.05, 0.06…4.0 x In
0.005, 0.01…1.0 x In (G)
DT Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1%xIn
Time Multiplier 0.025,0.05…1.6
DT Delay Setting td 0.00, 0.01…20, 20.5…100,
Time Delay 0, 0.01… 20s
101…1000, 1010…10000,
10100…14400s
Minimum Operate time top =
K
× Tm
DT Basic Operate Time: 40ms ±10ms
0 to 2 x Is
IEC [ IsI ]α − 1
⎡ A ⎤
DT Operate time Tbasic + td , ±1% or ±10ms top = ⎢ P + B⎥ ×Tm
ANSI ⎣[ Is ] −1 ⎦
I
following delay.
IT Char Setting IEC: NI,VI,EI,LTI ± 5 % absolute or ± 30 ms
ANSI: MI,VI,EI Follower Delay 0 - 20s
DTL Reset ANSI decaying, 0 – 60s
IT Setting Range 0.05, 0.06 ..2.5 Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input
Tm Time Multiplier 0.025, 0.050…1.6 Inrush detector
Char Operate Level 105% Is, ±4% or ±1%In

50BF Circuit Breaker Fail 81 Under/Over Frequency
Operation Current check Number of Elements 6 Under or Over

Setting Range Is 0.05,0.055…2.0 x In (Phase) Setting Range Vs 40 … 69.99Hz
0.005,0.010…2.0 x In (Earth) Hysteresis Setting 0. 0.1…80%
2 Stage Time Delays Timer 1 0,5…60000ms Vs Operate Level 100% Fs, ±10mHz
Timer 2 0,5…60000ms Reset Level:
Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1%xIn Over frequency (100% - hyst) x Fop, ±10mHz
Basic Operate time < 20ms Under frequency (100% + hyst) x Fop, ±10mHz
Operate time following Tdelay ±1% or ±10ms Delay Setting td 0.00, 0.01…20, 20.5…100,
delay 101…1000, 1010…10000,
Triggered by Any function mapped as trip 10100…14400s
contact. Basic Operate Time : Typically <110ms
Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input (for ROCOF between 0.1 Maximum <150ms
and 5.0 Hz/sec)
59N Neutral Voltage Displacement Operate time following Tbasic + td , ±1% or ±10ms
delay.
Number of Elements DT & IT Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input
DT Setting Range Is 1…100V
DT Operate Level 100% Vs, ±5% or ±1%xVn 87BD Biased Differential
DT Delay Setting td 0 …14400s
DT Basic Operate Time 76ms ±20ms Number of Elements 1
0V to 1.5xVs Setting Range
DT Operate time Tbasic + td , ±1% or ±20ms Initial 0.1, 0.15 … 2 x In
following delay. 1st Bias Slope 0.1, 0.15 … 0.7x
IT Setting Range 1…100V 1st Bias Slope Limit 1, 2 … 20 x In
Tm Time 0.1…140 2nd Bias Slope 1, 1.5 … 2x
Multiplier(IDMT) 2nd Bias Slope Type Line, curve
Delay (DTL) 0…20s Operate Level:
Reset ANSI Decaying, 0 … 60s Initial setting ±5% of setting or ±0.01 In
Char Operate Level 105% Vs, ±2% or ± 0.5V Bias slope ±10% of setting or ±0.01 In
Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input Reset Level:
Over frequency (100% - hyst) x Fop, ±10mHz
64H Restricted Earth Fault Under frequency (100% + hyst) x Fop, ±10mHz
Delay Setting td 0.000, 0.005 … 1s
Basic Operate Time :
(inrush action Enabled)
Operate Level 100% Is, ±5% or ±1%xIn 0 to 3 x IOP 35ms ±10ms
Time Delay 0.00… 14400s 0 to 10 x IOP 30ms ±10ms
Basic Operate Time 0 to 2 x Is: 40ms ±10ms Operate time following Tbasic + td , ±1% or ±10ms
0 to 5 x Is: 30ms ±10ms delay.
Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input Inhibited by Binary or Virtual Input
74TCS Trip Circuit Supervision
Number of supervisable 6
circuits
Number of BI’s Required 1 or 2 per function

Case Dimensions
Fig 4. E8 Case
Fig 5. E10 Case

RS485

7SR24 Function diagram / example of external connections
7SR242n-2aAn1-0CA0
W1-IL1 (IA) 37 50 50 51
49
81 81
(x2) BF-1 (x2) (x2) HBL2 HBL5
W1-IL2 (IB) 37 50 50 51
49
81 81
(x2) BF-1 (x2) (x2) HBL2 HBL5
W1-IL3 (IC) 37 50 50 51
49
81 81
(x2) BF-1 (x2) (x2) HBL2 HBL5
46 46
50N 51N
BC NPS
(x2) (x2)
(x2) (x4)
50
37G 50G 51G
BF-1 64H
(x2) (x2) (x4)
I4
IG1
ICT
Each function element

can be assigned to W1
or W2 CT inputs.

functions are mutually
exclusive
87HS 87BD ICT
50
37G BF-2 50G 51G 64H
IG2 I4
74
CCS
(x6)
46 46 74
50N 51N
BC NPS TCS
(x6)
W2-IL3 (IC) 50 81 81
37 50 51 49
BF-2 HBL2 HBL5
W2-IL2 (IB) 81
50 81
37 50 51 49 HBL
BF-2 HBL5
2
W2-IL1 (IA) 81
50 81
37 50 51 49 HBL
BF-2 HBL5
2
27
24 59N 81
59
(x3) (x2) (x6)
V1 (VX) (x4)
Fig 7. Standard and Optional Functionality of 7SR24 Relay

Ordering Information – 7SR24 2 Winding Transformer Protection
Duobias 7 S R 2 4 2 □ - 2 □ A □ 1 - 0 □ A 0
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Multifunctional 2 winding | | | | | | | | |
transformer differential Protection Product | | | | | | | | |
protection Transformer 4 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
Relay Type | | | | | | | |
Differential (2 winding) 2 | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
Case I/O and Fascia | | | | | | |
E8 case, 6 CT, 2 EF/REF CT, 1 VT, 9 Binary Inputs / 6 Binary Outputs, 2 | | | | | |
16 LEDs | | | | | | |
E10 case, 6 CT, 2 EF/REF CT, 1 VT, 19 Binary Inputs / 14 Binary Outputs, 3 | | | | | |
24 LEDs | | | | | |
| | | | | |
| | | | | |
1/5 A, 63.5/110V, 50/60Hz 2 | | | | |
| | | | |
| | | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
Protocol | | |
IEC 60870-5-103 and Modbus RTU and DNP 3.0 (user selectable) 2 | |
| |
| |
Option A: Standard version – Included in all models A |
- 81HBL2 Inrush Detector | |
- 81HBL5 Overfluxing detector | |
- 87BD Biased current differential | |
- 87HS Current differential highest | |
For each winding/circuit breaker | |
- 50BF Circuit breaker fail | |
- 64H High impedance REF | |
- 74TCS/CCS Trip/Close circuit supervision | |
| |
Option B: Standard version – plus B |
- 37 Undercurrent | |
- 46BC Open circuit | |
- 46NPS Negative phase sequence overcurrent | |
- 49 Thermal overload | |
- 50 Instantaneous phase fault overcurrent | |
- 50G/50N Instantaneous earth fault | |
- 51 Time delayed phase fault overcurrent | |
- 51G/51N Time delayed earth fault | |
(continued on following page )

Ordering Information – 7SR24 2 Winding Transformer Protection
Duobias 7 S R 2 4 2 □ - 2 □ A □ 1 - 0 □ A 0
(continued from previous Option C: Standard version - plus C
page) - 24 Overfluxing |
- 27/59 Under/overvoltage |
- 59N Neutral voltage displacement |
- 81 Under/overfrequency |
- 37 Undercurrent |
- 46BC Open circuit |
- 46NPS Negative phase sequence overcurrent |
- 49 Thermal overload |
- 50 Instantaneous phase fault overcurrent |
- 50G/50N Instantaneous earth fault |
- 51 Time delayed phase fault overcurrent |
- 51G/51N Time delayed earth fault |
|
|
|
|
|

Reyrolle
Protection
Devices
7SG14 Duobias M
Transformer Protection
Answers for energy

7SG14 Duobias M Optional Functionality
Transformer Protection
High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault per winding (87REF)
Circuit Breaker Fail per winding (50BF)
Instantaneous / definite time overcurrent phase fault and
derived earth fault per winding (50 and 50N)
Inverse definite minimum time phase fault and derived earth
fault per winding (51 and 51N)
Instantaneous/definite time measured earth fault per
winding (50G)
Inverse definite minimum time measured earth fault per
winding (51G)
Overexcitation protection Volts/frequency (2 x DTL + 1 x
IDMTL) (24)
Transformer thermal overload (49)
4-stage under/overvoltage(27/59)
4-stage under/overfrequency (81)
2-stage NPS overcurrent (46)
Description User Interface
The 7SG14 Duobias-M has an established history as a 20 character x 2 line backlit LCD
transformer protection relay going back to the fundamental Menu navigation keys
development of biased differential transformer protection. It 1 fixed LED.
is capable of providing all necessary protection and alarm 16 or 32 programmable LEDs.
functions for protecting a 2 or 3 winding transformer.
The main protection function is current differential with load Monitoring Functions
bias and second harmonic restraining characteristic. This is
supplemented with a number of additional functions to
Analogue values can be displayed on the LCD screen. In
provide a comprehensive transformer protection
addition most values can be obtained via the data
management package.
communications channel(s).
Function Overview Line currents for each winding

Relay currents for each winding (after ratio and vector group
compensation)
Standard Functionality Operate and restrain currents
Biased differential current protection with even harmonic Binary inputs
restraint (87). Output contacts
Instantaneous differential highset (87HS).
Integral current amplitude and vector group compensation.
Variants for 2 or 3 sets of current transformers. Data Communications
E8, E12 or E16 case.
Trip circuit supervision. Communication access to relay functionality is via a front
LEDs for alarm functions removes the need for flag repeat RS232 port for local PC connection.
relays, Buchholz etc Two rear ST fibre optic ports (2 x Tx/Rx) and an IRIG-B are
Compatible with communications software Reydisp also provided.
Evolution.
Metering of external and internal signals for both magnitude
and phase angle aids commissioning Protocols
Settings stored in EEPROM, logic schemes in FLASH memory
Flash upgradeable firmware
Expandable I/O of up to 27 binary inputs and 29 output Serial data comms conform to IEC60870-5-103 and Modbus
contacts that can be programmed from the relay front fascia RTU standards.
Continuous self monitoring

Backup overcurrent & earth fault
Description of Functionality The following backup overcurrent elements can be provided:
The 7SG14 provides all the protection functions required for • Instantaneous/definite time phase fault (50)
power transformers. • Inverse time/definite time phase fault (51)
• Instantaneous/definite time derived earth fault (50N)
Vector group compensation and ratio correction • Inverse time / definite time derived earth fault (51N)
The relay can compensate for all standard transformer
These elements provide backup protection for the
winding vector connections and for differing CT ratios across
transformer and guard against a fault outside the
the transformer, without the need for secondary interposing
transformer CT zone. They can also be used to protect the
CTs.
transformer against damage due to uncleared external faults
while grading with other time-delayed protections.
Biased differential (87)
A biased differential characteristic is provided which gives Measured earth fault
sensitivity for internal faults and stability for through faults
The following earth-fault overcurrent elements are available
and load current.
for each transformer winding:
Two bias slopes are provided, the first allows for measuring
• Instantaneous/definite time measured earth fault (50G)
inaccuracies and transformer ratio variation due to tap-
• Inverse time/definite time measured earth fault (51G)
changing, the second ensures stability for CT saturation on
through faults.
These elements are incompatible with the use of the high
impedance restricted earth-fault elements.
The biased differential element restrains for second
harmonic inrush currents, with a setting for restraint level. Over-excitation (24)
This provides stability under inrush conditions, while
Over-excitation of a transformer can lead to damaging
allowing the protection to be set more sensitively for normal
currents flowing in the transformer. This can be detected
operation.
from fifth harmonic content; however this is subject to
uncertainty. The 7SG14 can offer a Volts/frequency (V/f)
The relay M is stable for fifth harmonic currents, generated
element, which provides direct measurement of excitation.
as a result of transformers operating close to, or above their
The setting level of this type of element is more easily
knee point.
related to the transformer data. Both DTL and user defined
IDMTL characteristics are available. Over fluxing protection
Differential highset (87HS)
is recommended for all generator step up transformers
A differential highset is also provided, this is not subject to
inrush restraint. Thermal Overload (49)
The algorithm calculates the thermal state of the
Optional Functionality transformer from the measured currents.
Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent (46)

Restricted Earth Fault (87REF) One inverse and one definite time lag element are provided.
Faults in the tap-changer windings of a transformer are These may be used as back-up protection or for detection of
common. Restricted earth-fault protection gives improved tap changer faults.
sensitivity for faults at the lower end of the transformer
windings. Circuit breaker fail (50BF)
The circuit breaker fail function operates by monitoring the
Under/overvoltage (27/59) current following a trip signal and issues an output if the
4 Stage under/overvoltage elements can be provided and the current does not cease within a specified time interval. This
undervoltage elements may be guarded via an additional output contact can be used to backtrip an upstream circuit
undervoltage setting to prevent operation during breaker. The circuit breaker fail function has a fast reset
transformer switch on. feature.
Under/overfrequency (81)
4 Stage under/overfrequency elements can be provided and
these may be inhibited with the undervoltage inhibited
setting defined as above, to prevent any unwanted
operation.

Figure 2 shows the flow of fault current for an out-of-zone
Application fault on system, with busbar connected CTs. It is important
that the transformer protection is correctly biased to ensure
stability for CT saturation. This cannot be done correctly if
Transformer configurations
the CTs are paralleled – individual inputs to the transformer
The Duobias M can provide up to 3 sets of analogue inputs
protection must be provided for correct biasing.
(where a single set consists of 3 phase current inputs and an
earth current input) which can be used on a variety of 2 and
3 winding transformer configurations.
Correct Application
The most common configurations of transformer are 2 and 3
winding transformers connected to single lines/busbars, as
in Figure 2. For a 2 winding transformer 2 analogue input 3 Input
sets are required, while for a 3 winding transformer 3
analogue input sets are needed. Input currents may be
summed into a protection element such as overcurrent.
number of
analogue
input sets
HV + LV = 2
(a)
(W1 + W2) OPERATE
HV + LV + LV = 3 RESTRAINT
(b)
(W1 + W2 +W3) (a)
HV + LV(x2) = 3 Incorrect Application

(c) (W1 + W2 +W3)
2 Input
HV(x2) + LV = 3
(d)
(W1 + W2 + W3)
Fig 1. Transformer Configurations
OPERATE
RESTRAINT
(b)
Fig 2. Out of Zone Fault and its Effect on Protection Biasing

– use one relay input set per set of CTs

Reydisp evolution
Data Storage and
Communication

Fault records
The last 10 fault records are available from the fascia with
5 seconds of waveform storage is available and is user-
configurable as 5 x 1s or 1 x 5s records. Within the record
the amount of pre-fault storage is also configurable. The
recorder is triggered from a protection operation, or binary
input. ( e.g. Buchholz flag indication).
The records contain the analogue waveforms of the line

currents and the digital input and output signals.
The relay settings must be appropriately programmed in

order for a wave form to be triggered from an external
protection device.
Fig 3. Disturbance Records in Reydisp Evolution
Communications
Two fibre-optic communications ports are provided on the Reydisp Evolution is common to the entire range of Reyrolle
rear of the relay. They are optimised for 62.5/125μm glass- numeric products. It provides a means for the user to apply
fibre, with BFOC/2.5 (ST®) bayonet style connectors. settings to the relay, interrogate settings and retrieve
disturbance waveforms.
In addition users may interrogate the relay locally with a
laptop PC and the RS232 port on the front of the relay. Reydisp evolution utilises IEC 60870-5-103 protocol.
The relay can be user selectable to either IEC 60870-5-103 or

Modbus RTU as its communications standard.

Binary inputs
Technical Data Nominal Voltage Operating Range V dc
30V 18 to 37.5V
For full technical data refer to the Performance Specification 48V 37.5 to 60V
of the Technical Manual. 110 V 87.5 to 137.5V
220V 175 to 280V
Inputs and Outputs The binary input voltage need not be the same as the main
energising voltage.
Characteristic energising quantity The 30V and 48V inputs meet the requirements of ESI48-4
ESI 1. However, the 110V and 220V inputs will operate with
AC Current/Voltage Frequency a DC current of less than 10mA. Where 110V or 220V inputs
compliant with ESI48-4 ESI 1 are required, a relay with 48V
1A / 5A 50 / 60Hz
binary inputs can be supplied with external series resistors
40 – 160V
as follows:
Current Inputs
Nominal Voltage Resistor Value Wattage
110V 2k7 ± 5% 2.5 W
Current Withstand Time
220 V 8k2 ± 5% 6.0 W
3.0 x In Continuous
3.5 x In 10 minutes Binary input performance
4.0 x In 5 minutes
5.0 x In 3 minutes Parameter Value
6.0 x In 2 minutes Minimum DC current for 10 mA
250A 1 Second operation
625A peak I Cycle (30V and 48V inputs only)
Reset/Operate Voltage Ratio ≥ 90 %
Input Burden Typical response time < 5 ms
5A ≤ 0.3 VA Typical response time when < 15 ms
1A ≤ 0.1 VA used to energise an output
Note: Burdens and impedances are measured at nominal relay contact
current rating. Minimum pulse duration 40 ms
DC Auxiliary Supply Each binary input has an associated timer that can be
programmed to give time delayed pick-up and time delayed
Nominal Voltage Operating Range V dc drop-off. When set to a minimum of 20ms the binary inputs
30V 24 to 37.5V will provide immunity to an AC input signal and will not
48/110V 37.5 to 137.5V respond to the following:
220 V 178.0 to 280.0V 250V RMS 50/60 Hz applied for two seconds through a 0.1µF
capacitor.
110/220V 88 to 275V
500 V RMS 50/60 Hz applied between each terminal and
earth. Discharge of a 10µF capacitor charged to maximum
DC auxiliary supply voltage.
Quiescent (Typical) 15 W
Maximum 27 W
Allowable superimposed ac ≤12% of dc voltage

component
Allowable breaks/dips in ≤20 ms
supply (collapse to zero
from nominal voltage)

Output Relays Transient Overvoltage
IEC 60255-5
Make and carry 20A ac or dc for 0.5s Between all terminals and
(L/R ≤ 40 ms and V ≤ 30A ac or dc for 0.2s earth or between any two 5 kV
300V) independent circuits 1.2/50 µs
Breaking Capacity without damage or 0.5 J
( ≤ 5 A and ≤ 300 V): flashover
AC Inductive 250 VA at p.f. ≤ 0.4 High Frequency Disturbance
DC Resistive 75 W
DC Inductive 30 W at L/R ≤ 40ms IEC 60255-22-1 Class III
50 W at L/R ≤ 10ms
Minimum number of 2.5kV, Longitudinal mode ≤3% variation
1000 at maximum load 1.0kV, Transverse mode
operations
Minimum recommended
0.5 Watt limits 10mA or 5V
load Electrostatic Discharge
Mechanical 8kV, Contact discharge ≤5% variation
Vibration (Sinusoidal) Fast Transient

IEC 60255-21-1 Class 1 IEC 60255-22-4 Class IV
0.5 gn, Vibration response 4kV, 5/50ns, 2.5 kHz, ≤3% variation
≤ 5% variation
1.0 gn, Vibration endurance repetitive
Shock Bump Radio Frequency Interference

IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1 IEC 60255-22-3
5 gn, Shock response, 11ms 10 V/m, 80 to 1000 MHz ≤5% variation

15 gn, Shock withstand,
≤ 5% variation Conducted RFI
11ms
10 gn, Bump test, 16ms IEC 60255-22-6
Seismic 10 V, 0.15 to 80 MHz ≤5% variation

IEC 60255-21-3 Class 1
Conduct limits
1 gn, Seismic response ≤ 5% variation IEC 60255-25
Mechanical Classification Frequency Range Limits dB(µV)
Durability In excess of 106 operations Quasi-peak Average

0.15 to 0.5 MHz 79 66
0.5 to 30 MHz 73 60
Electrical Tests Radiated limits

IEC 60255-25
RMS levels for 1 minute Frequency Range Limits at 10 m
Between all terminals and 2.0 kV 30 to 230 MHz 40
earth 230 to 10000 MHz 47
Between independent 2.0 kV
circuits
Across normally open 1.0 kV
contacts

Biased differential (87)
Environmental
Temperature No. of elements 1
IEC 68-2-1/2 Level
Initial setting 0.1 to 2.0In step 0.05In
Operating -10 °C to +55 °C Bias slope 0 to 0.7 step 0.05
Bias slope limit 1 to 20 xIn step 1In
Storage -25 °C to +70 °C
Delay 0 to 1 sec
Humidity Accuracy Operate:100% of setting
± 5% or ± 10mA
IEC 68-2-3
Reset: ≥ 90% of operate
current
Operational test 56 days at 40 °C and 93%
Repeatability ±1%
RH
Through-fault 50 xIn
stability
Protection Elements Operate Time
Typically 1.5 Cycles
General Accuracy
Inrush Inhibit
Settings Off, 15% to 25% step 1%
General IEC60255
Repeatability ± 1%
Parts 6, 6A & 13
Bias Phase, Cross, Sum
Auxiliary Nominal
Frequency 50/60Hz
Differential highset (87HS)
Ambient Temperature 20ºC
Initial Setting Any setting
No. of elements 1
Bias Slope Any setting
Level
High set Any setting
Initial setting 1 to 30x In step 1x In
Restricted earth fault Any setting
Accuracy Operate:100% of setting
Magnetizing Inrush Any setting ± 5% or ± 10mA
Current amplitude 1.00 Reset: ≥95% of operate
correction current
Vector group compensation Yy0,0º Repeatability ±1%
Operate Time
Accuracy influencing factors
Typically 1 Cycle
Temperature Restricted earth-fault (87REF)

10 °C to +55 °C ≤ 5% variation
Frequency No. of elements Up to 1 per winding
47 Hz to 52 Hz Setting: ≤5% variation Level
57 Hz to 62 Hz Operate Time: ≤ 5% Settings 0.02 to 0.96 In step 0.005In
variation
Accuracy Operate: 100% of setting
± 5% or ± 10mA
Vector group compensation
≥ 95% of operate current
Repeatability ±1%
Interposing CT
No. of elements Per Winding
Operate Time
CT Connection Yy0 0°, Yd1 -30°, Yy2 -60°,
Typically < 1.5 Cycles
Yd3 -90°, Yy4 -120°, Yd5 -
150°, Yy6 180°, Yd7 150°,
Yy8 120°, Yd9 90°, Yy10 Delay
60°, Yd11 30°, Ydy0 0° Setting (td) 0 to 864000s
CT Multiplier 0.25 to 3.00 step 0.01

Phase-fault overcurrent protection (50) Negative Sequence Overcurrent (46)
Characteristic Instantaneous/DTL Characteristic Instantaneous (46DT)

No. of elements Up to 2 per winding No. of elements Up to 1 per winding
Level Level
Settings 0.05 to 25In step 0.05In Settings 0.02 to 4x In
Accuracy Operate: 100% of setting Accuracy Operate: 100% Is
± 5% or ± 10mA ± 5% or ± 10mA
Reset: ≥95% of operate Reset: 95% Iop
current Repeatability ±1%
Repeatability ±1% Delay
Delay Setting (td) 0 to 864000s
Settings 0.0 to 864000s Accuracy 89ms + td
Accuracy ± 5 ms Repeatability + 1% or + 20ms
Repeatability ± 1%
Characteristics IDMTL (46IT)
Phase fault overcurrent (51) No. of elements Up to 1 per winding
Level
Characteristic IDMTL Setting 0.02 to 2.5In
IEC Normal Inverse (NI), Accuracy Operate 105% Is
Very Inverse (VI), + 4% or I 10mA
Extremely Inverse (EI), Reset > 95% Ipo
Long Time Inverse (LTI) Repeatability + 1%
IEEE Moderately Inverse (MI), IDMTL Time Multiplier
Very Inverse (VI), Characteristics IDMTL
Extremely Inverse (EI),
IEC Normal Inverse (NI)
DTL Very Inverse (VI)
No. of elements Up to 1 per winding Extremely Inverse (EI)
Level Long Time Inverse (LTI)
Settings 0.05 to 2.5 In step 0.05In IEEE Moderately Inverse (MI)
Accuracy Operate: 105% of setting Very Inverse (VI)
± 5% or ± 10mA Extremely Inverse (EI)
Reset: ≥ 95% of operate DTL
current Settings 0.025 to 1.6x step 0.025
Repeatability ±1% Accuracy IDMT + 5% or + 50ms
IDMTL Time Multiplier DTL + 1% or + 40ms
Settings 0.025x to 1.600x step 0.025 Repeatability + 1% or + 20ms
Repeatability ± 1%

Earth-fault overcurrent protection Circuit breaker failure
Characteristic DTL Characteristic DTL

No. of elements Up to 2 per winding No. of elements 2
Level Level
Settings 0.01 to 25 x In Settings 0.05 to 2In
Accuracy Operate: 100% of setting Accuracy Operate: 100%Is
± 5% or ± 10mA + 5% or + 10mA
Reset: ≥ 95% of operate Reset: <100%Iop
current + 5% or + 10mA
Repeatability ±1% Repeatability ±1%
Delay Delay
Settings 0.00 to 864000s Settings Re-trip 0.02 to 60sec
Accuracy ± 5 ms Back-trip 0.02 to 60sec
Repeatability ± 1% Accuracy ± 5 ms
Repeatability ± 1%
Characteristic
IDMTL Normal Inverse (NI),
(IEC) Very Inverse (VI),
Long Time Inverse (LTI)
IDMTL Moderately Inverse (MI),
(IEEE) Very Inverse (VI),
DTL
No. of elements Up to 1 per winding
Level
Setting 0.1 to 2.5xIn step 0.05 In
Accuracy Operate: 105% of setting
± 5% or ± 10mA
Reset: ≥ 95% of operate
current
Repeatability ±1%
IDMTL Delay
Settings 0.025x to 1.600x

Case Dimensions

Connection Diagram 7SG14 Duobias M
Notes:
1) CT circuits shown connected to 1A inputs.
2) NLR and stabilising resistor (to be ordered
separately) required for high impedance REF.
3) Spare slots may be occupied by either additional I/
O modules (IO2, IO3), or additional CT set (AN3) up to
a maximum of 29 x RL, 27 x SI and 3 CT sets.
SI = Status Input
RL = Output Relay
1A 1A Shows contacts internal

13 13
to relay case assembly.
14 14
AUX
AUX
Contacts close when the

5A 5A
15 15 relay chassis is
16 16 withdrawn from case
1A 1A
17 17
Rear View: Arrangement of
18 18
A A terminals and modules
5A 5A
19 19
20 20 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
1A 1A A
21 21
N
22
B B
22 C A A 3 IO IO IO P
23
5A 5A
23 P N N or 3 2 1 S
24 24 U 1 2 IO Opt Opt Opt U
25 25 4
Opt
26 26
5A C C 5A
27 28 27 28 27 28 27 28 27 28 27 28 27 28 27 28
27 27
28 28
AN1 AN2 1A +
13 1
40 to
160V - S4 I/O 1
4 14 11 3
NO
AUX
Case Earth
VT
5A +
+ve RL1 5 15 12 5 2
13
NC - S5 RL6
-ve 6 16 7 4
14
1A 1A + 6
7 17 17 9
15 Earth NC S6 RL7
-
RL2 8 18 18 11 8
NO 5A A 5A A +
+ve 9 19 19 13 10
21
S1 - S7 RL8
-ve 10 20 20 15 12
23 NO
1A 1A +
25
+ve RL1 11 21 21 17 14
S2 NC S8 RL9
-ve 12 22 22 16
27
5A B 5A B +
+ve 17 23 23 19 18
26
S3 RL4 - S9 RL10
-ve 19 24 24 21 20
28
+
RL11
18 25 25 23 22
RL5 S10
24
P.S.U. 20 26
C
26
C RL12
5A 5A + 26
27 27 25
- S11 RL13
28 28 27 28
AN3 AN1 (VT)
+ +
2 TX 1 1
ISO Rx
3 - S12 I/O 2 - S20 I/O 3
ISO Tx 3 3
4
ISORTS + +
5 RX 5 2 5 2
ISODTR
6 - S13 RL14 - S21 RL22
ISODTR 7 4 7 4
7
ISOGND + +
20 9 6 9 6
ISODTR
- S14 RL15 - S22 RL23
11 8 11 8
TX
+ 10 + 10
13 13
- S15 RL16 - S23 RL24
15 12 15 12
RX
+ 14 + 14
17 17
S16 RL17 S24 RL25
16 16
+ 18 + 18
19 19
- S17 RL18 - S25 RL26
21 20 21 20
+
RL19 +
RL27
23 22 23 22
S18 S26
24 24
+
RL20 +
RL28
25 26 25 26
- S19 RL21 - S27 RL29
27 28 27 28
Fig 6. 7SG14 Connection Diagram

Module Location
Module location when viewed from relay front with the fascia door open.
E16 case 2 or 3W
A B C D E F G H
PSU I/O 1 (I/O2) (I/O3) (AN3) AN2 AN1 CPU
Or
(I/O4)
E12 case 2 or 3W
A B C D E F
PSU I/O1 (AN3) AN2 AN1 CPU
OR
(I/O2)
E8 case 2 or 3W
A B C D
PSU AN1 AN2 CPU
The following ANSI Function Diagrams illustrate the use of the various models. All transformer vector groups can be
accommodated by selection of appropriate relays settings. The “?” symbol in the MLFB code, shown on these diagrams,
denotes a user selection for rating, I/O count and case size.

ANSI Diagrams Two Winding Models – 7SG142 Duobias M
W2 W1 W2 W1 W2 W1
74 74 74 74 74 74
TCS TCS TCS TCS TCS TCS
3 3 3 3 3 3
1 1 1
AN2 AN1 AN2 AN1 AN2 AN1
W2 W1 W1 W1 W2 W1
W2 50 W2 W1
87 87 50G 50 87 87
x1 50 50
REF REF x2 x2 REF REF
W2 W1
51 51
87 87 W2 87 W1
HS HS 5ON HS 50N
87 87 W2 87 W1
BD BD 51N BD 51N
74 74 74
DUOBIAS M - DU3-201-7SG1421-0□□□□-0□□0-G0D DUOBIAS M - DU3-202-7SG1422-0□□□□-0□□0-G0D DUOBIAS M - DU3-203-7SG1423-0□□□□-0□□0-G0D
W2 W1 W2 W1 W2 W1
74 74 74 74 74 74
3 3 3 3 3 3
1 1 1 1
1

87REF, 50N, 51N can
W2 87 W1 W2 W2 W1 W1 W2 W2 87 W1 87 W1
50
5ON be connected to REF 50 50 5OG 5OG 50 50 REF REF 50
either W1 or W2 CT’s
W2 W1 W2 W2 W1 W1 W2 W1
51N 51
51 87 51 51 51G 87 51G 51 51 87
HS HS HS
W2 W1 W2 W1
5ON 50N 5ON 50N
W2 87 W1 87 W2 W2 87 W1 W1
50BF BD 50BF BD 46IT 46DT BD 46DT 46IT
W1 W1
W2 W2
51N 51N
51N 51N
74 74 74
DUOBIAS M - DU3-204-7SG1424-0□□□□-0□□0-G0D DUOBIAS M - DU3-207-7SG1426-0□□□□-0□□0-G0D DUOBIAS M - DU3-209-7SG1429-0□□□□-0□□0-G0D
W2 W1 W2 W1 W2 W1
74 74 74 74 74 74
3 3 3 3 3 3
1
1 1
1 1 1 1

49 and 51G – can be 49 and 87REF – can W2 W1
W2 27/59 87 W1 W2 W1
W2 27/59 allocated to either W1 51G W1 be allocated to either 87 87
50 x4 x2 50 50 x4 REF 50 50 50
W1 or W2 CT’s. REF REF
or W2 CT’s.
W2 81 24DT 24IT W1 W2 81 24DT 24IT W1 W2 W1

51 x4 x2 x1 51 51 x4 x2 x1 51 51 51
W2 87 W1 W2 87 W1 W2 87 W1
5ON HS 50N 5ON HS 50N 5ON HS 50N
W2 W1 W2 W1 W2 W1
51N W2 87 W1 51N 51N W2 87 W1 51N 51N W2 87 W1 51N
49 BD 49 49 BD 49 50BF BD 50BF
74 74 74
DUOBIAS M - DU3-220-7SG1427-0□□□□-1□□0-G0A DUOBIAS M - DU3-221-7SG1428-0□□□□-1□□0-G0A DUOBIAS M - DU3-223-7SG1429-0□□□□-0□□0-G0A
ANSI CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

DUOBIAS M TWO WINDING TRANSFORMER DIFFERENTIAL RELAYS - 7SG142*
FUNCTION NUMBER - IEEE Std C37.2-1996
24DT OVER FLUXING – DTL V/f 50BF TWO STAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER FAIL 74 ALARM/TRIP LED INDICATION (BUCHHOLZ etc)
24IT OVER FLUXING – User Definable Inverse V/f 51 IDMTL/DTL OVER CURRENT 74TCS TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION/FAIL
27 DTL UNDER VOLTAGE - Single Phase 50G MEASURED INST/DTL EARTH (GROUND) FAULT 87BD BIASED DIFFERENTIAL
46DT DTL NEGATIVE PH. SEQUENCE OVERCURRENT 51G MEASURED IDMTL/DTL EARTH(GROUND)FAULT 87HS DIFFERENTIAL HIGHSET
46IT IDMTL NEGATIVE PH. SEQ. OVERCURRENT 50N DERIVED INST/DTL EARTH (GROUND) FAULT 87REF HIGH IMPEDANCE RESTRICTED (GROUND) EARTH
49 THERMAL OVERLOAD 51N DERIVED IDMTL/DTL EARTH (GROUND) FAULT FAULT (External series setting resistor and non linear
50 INST/DTL OVER CURRENT 59 DTL OVER VOLTAGE - Single Phase resistor required – not shown)

ANSI Diagrams Three Winding Models – 7SG143 Duobias M
ANSI CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

THREE WINDING DUOBIAS M TRANSFORMER DIFFERENTIAL RELAYS - 7SG143*
FUNCTION NUMBER - IEEE Std C37.2-1996
24DT OVER FLUXING – DTL V/f 50BF TWO STAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER FAIL 74 ALARM/TRIP LED INDICATION (BUCHHOLZ etc)
24IT OVER FLUXING – User Definable Inverse V/f 51 IDMTL/DTL OVER CURRENT 74TCS TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION/FAIL
27 DTL UNDER VOLTAGE - Single Phase 50G MEASURED INST/DTL EARTH (GROUND) FAULT 87BD BIASED DIFFERENTIAL
46DT DTL NEGATIVE PH. SEQUENCE OVERCURRENT 51G MEASURED IDMTL/DTL EARTH(GROUND)FAULT 87HS DIFFERENTIAL HIGHSET
46IT IDMTL NEGATIVE PH. SEQ. OVERCURRENT 50N DERIVED INST/DTL EARTH (GROUND) FAULT 87REF HIGH IMPEDANCE RESTRICTED (GROUND)
49 THERMAL OVERLOAD 51N DERIVED IDMTL/DTL EARTH (GROUND) FAULT EARTH FAULT (External Series Setting Resistor
50 INST/DTL OVER CURRENT 59 DTL OVER VOLTAGE - Single Phase and Non-linear Resistor Required – not shown)

Ordering Information 7SG142 Duobias M

Duobias-M (200 series) 7 S G 1 4 □□ - 0 □□□□ - □□□ 0 - □□□
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Two winding transformer differential | | | | | | | | | | | |
protection. | | | | | | | | | | | |
Relay type | | | | | | | | | | | |
200 series – Transformer Protection 2 | | | | | | | | | | |
(2 analogue input sets, 2 winding) | | | | | | | | | | |
Basic protection functionality - included in all models | | | | | | | | | | |
- Vector group compensation and ratio correction | | | | | | | | | | |
- Biased differential protection (87BD) | | | | | | | | | | |
- Differential high-set (87HS) | | | | | | | | | | |
- Internal protections indication | | | | | | | | | | |
(Buchholz, temperature etc.) (74) | | | | | | | | | | |
- Trip circuit supervision (74TC) | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
Protection options 4) | | | | | | | | | | |
Option 01 1 | | | | 0 | | | | |
- Restricted earth-fault (87REF) | | | | | | | | | | |
Option 02 2 | | | | 0 | | | | |
- 2 stage DTL overcurrent (50) | | | | | | | | | | |
- 2 stage DTL measured earth-fault (50G) | | | | | | | | | | |
Option 03 3 | | | | 0 | | | | |
- DTL overcurrent (50) | | | | | | | | | | |
- IDMTL overcurrent (51) | | | | | | | | | | |
- DTL derived earth-fault (50N) | | | | | | | | | | |
- IDMTL derived earth-fault (51N) | | | | | | | | | | |
Option 04 4 | | | | 0 | | | | |
- Restricted earth-fault (one winding) (87REF) | | | | | | | | | | |
- DTL overcurrent (50) | | | | | | | | | | |
- DTL measured earth-fault (one winding) (50G) | | | | | | | | | | |
- IDMTL measured earth-fault (one winding) (51G) | | | | | | | | | | |
- Circuit breaker fail (50BF) | | | | | | | | | | |
Option 07 6 | | | | 0 | | | | |
- DTL overcurrent (50) | | | | | | | | | | |
- DTL measured earth-fault (50G) | | | | | | | | | | |
- IDMTL measured earth-fault (51G) | | | | | | | | | | |
Option 09 9 | | | | 0 | | G 0 D
- DTL overcurrent (50) | | | | | | | | | | |
- DTL NPS DTL overcurrent (46DT) | | | | | | | | | | |
- IDMTL NPS overcurrent (46IT) | | | | | | | | | | |
Option 20 7 | | | | 1 | | | | |
- DTL overcurrent (50) | | | | | | | | | | |
- 2 stage IDMTL measured earth-fault (one winding) | | | | | | | | | | |
(51G) | | | | | | | | | | |
- 4 stage under/overvoltage (27/59) | | | | | | | | | | |
- 4 stage under/overfrequency (81) | | | | | | | | | | |
- Overexcitation (24) | | | | | | | | | | |
- Thermal overload (one winding) (49)

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
(continued from previous page) | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
Option 21 8 | | | | 1 | | | | |
- Restricted earth-fault (one winding) | | | | | | | | | | |
(87REF) | | | | | | | | | | |
- DTL overcurrent (50) | | | | | | | | | | |
- Overexcitation (24) | | | | | | | | | | |
- Thermal overload (one winding) (49) | | | | | | | | | | |
Option 23 9 | | | | 0 | | G 0 A
- Restricted earth-fault (87REF) | | | | | | |
- DTL overcurrent (50) | | | | | | |
- IDMTL overcurrent (51) | | | | | | |
- DTL derived earth-fault (50N) | | | | | | |
- IDMTL derived earth-fault (51N) | | | | | | |
- Circuit breaker fail (50BF) | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
30 V DC auxiliary, 30 V DC binary input A | | | | | |
30 V DC auxiliary, 48 V DC binary input B | | | | | |
48/110 V DC auxiliary, 30 V DC binary input C | | | | | |
48/110 V DC auxiliary, 48 V DC binary input 1) D | | | | | |
48/110 V DC auxiliary, 110 V DC low burden binary input E | | | | | |
220 V DC auxiliary, 110 V DC low burden binary input F | | | | | |
220 V DC auxiliary, 220 V DC low burden binary input G | | | | | |
| | | | | |
I/O range | | | | | |
3 Binary Inputs / 5 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover) A | | | E |
11 Binary Inputs / 13 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover) 2) B | | | | |
19 Binary Inputs / 21 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover) 2) C | | | | |
27 Binary Inputs / 29 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover) 3) D | | | | |
| | | | |
Frequency | | | | |
50Hz 1 | | | |
60Hz 2 | | | |
| | | |
1/ 5 A 0 | | |
| | |
Voltage inputs | | |
Not available 0 | |
63.5/110 V AC 1 | |
| |
Housing size | |
Case size E8 (4U high) E |
Case size E12 (4U high) G |
Case size E12 (4U wide, vertical) H |
Case size E16 (4U high) J |
Case size E16 (4U wide, vertical) K |
|
Communication interface |
Fibre optic (ST-connector) / IEC 60870-5-103 or Modbus RTU B
1)High burden 110V & 220V binary inputs compliant with ESI48-4 ESI 1 available via external dropper resistors with 48V binary input version, 110/125 V application, order combination
of the following resistor boxes to suit number of binary inputs, VCE:2512H10064 (9 inputs, 110V), VCE:2512H10065 (5 inputs, 110V), VCE:2512H10066 (1 inputs, 110V), 220/250 V
application, order resistor box 2512H10066 in addition, VCE:2512H10067 (5 inputs, 220V), VCE:2512H10068 (1 inputs, 220V), Refer to website for application note about ESI48-4
compliance
2) Case size E12, Case size E16
3) Functions are per winding unless stated otherwise, REF models require external resistors and Metrosil (NLR) at additional cost.

Ordering Information 7SG143n Duobias M
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Three winding transformer differential | | | | | | | | | | | |
protection. | | | | | | | | | | | |
Relay type | | | | | | | | | | | |
300 series - Transformer Protection 3 | | | | | | | | | | |
(3 analogue input sets, 3 winding) | | | | | | | | | | |
Basic protection functionality - included in all models | | | | | | | | | | |
- Vector group compensation and ratio correction | | | | | | | | | | |
- Biased differential protection (87BD) | | | | | | | | | | |
- Differential high-set (87HS) | | | | | | | | | | |
- Internal protections indication | | | | | | | | | | |
(Buchholz, temperature etc.) (74) | | | | | | | | | | |
- Trip circuit supervision (74TC) | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
Option 01 1 | | | | 0 | | | | |
Option 02 2 | | | | 0 | | | | |
- 2 stage DTL overcurrent (50) | | | | | | | | | | |
- 2 stage DTL measured earth-fault (50G) | | | | | | | | | | |
Option 03 3 | | | | 0 | | | | |
- DTL overcurrent (50) | | | | | | | | | | |
Option 04 4 | | | | 0 | | | | |
- DTL overcurrent (50) | | | | | | | | | | |
- DTL measured earth-fault (two winding) (50G) | | | | | | | | | | |
- IDMTL measured earth-fault (two winding) (51G) | | | | | | | | | | |
- Circuit breaker fail (50BF) | | | | | | | | | | |
Option 06 5 | | | | 1 | | | | |
- Overexcitation (24) | | | | | | | | | | |
- DTL measured earth-fault (two winding) (50G) | | | | | | | | | | |
- IDMTL measured earth-fault (two winding) (51G) | | | | | | | | | | |
Option 07 6 | | | | 0 | | | | |
- DTL overcurrent (50) | | | | | | | | | | |
- DTL measured earth-fault (50G) | | | | | | | | | | |
- IDMTL measured earth-fault (51G) | | | | | | | | | | |
Option 20 7 | | | | 1 | | | | |
- DTL overcurrent (50) | | | | | | | | | | |
- 2 stage IDMTL measured earth-fault (two winding) | | | | | | | | | | |
(51G) | | | | | | | | | | |
- Overexcitation (24) | | | | | | | | | | |
- Thermal overload (one winding) (49)

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
(continued from previous page) | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
Option 21 8 | | | | 1 | | | | |
- Restricted earth-fault (two winding) (87REF) | | | | | | | | | | |
- DTL overcurrent (50) | | | | | | | | | | |
- Overexcitation (24) | | | | | | | | | | |
- Thermal overload (one winding) (49) | | | | | | | | | | |
Option 23 9 | | | | 0 | | G 0 A
- Restricted earth-fault (87REF) | | | | | | |
- DTL overcurrent (50) | | | | | | |
- IDMTL overcurrent (51) | | | | | | |
- DTL derived earth-fault (50N) | | | | | | |
- IDMTL derived earth-fault (51N) | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
| | | | | |
I/O range | | | | | |
3 Binary Inputs / 5 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover) 2) A | | | | |
11 Binary Inputs / 13 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover) 2) B | | | | |
| | | | |
Frequency | | | | |
50Hz 1 | | | |
60Hz 2 | | | |
| | | |
1/ 5 A 0 | | |
| | |
Not available 0 | |
63.5/110 V AC 1 | |
| |
Housing size | |
|
1) High burden 110V & 220V binary inputs compliant with ESI48-4 ESI 1 available via external dropper resistors with 48V binary input version, 110/125 V application, order
combination of the following resistor boxes to suit number of binary inputs, VCE:2512H10064 (9 inputs, 110V), VCE:2512H10065 (5 inputs, 110V), VCE:2512H10066 (1 inputs, 110V),
220/250 V application, order resistor box 2512H10066 in addition, VCE:2512H10067 (5 inputs, 220V), VCE:2512H10068 (1 inputs, 220V), Refer to website for application note about
ESI48-4 compliance
2) Case size E12
3) Case size E16
4) Functions are per winding unless stated otherwise, REF requires external resistors and Metrosil (NLR) at additional extra cost.

Reyrolle
Protection
Devices
7SG15 – MicroTAPP
Automatic Voltage Control
Answers for energy

7SG15 - MicroTAPP
User-specified system Power Factor eliminates errors associ-
ated with other circulating current schemes.
Automatic Voltage Control Load Drop Compensation counteracts network related volt-
age drop.
Circulating current is minimised to reduce system losses.
Tap-stagger allows circulating current to be introduced for
network operation purposes.
Voltage offsets can be applied either through status inputs
or the IEC60870 communications for Load Reduction and
network operation.
Low system frequencies are detected and this can inhibit
attempts to increase the voltage in, for example, a load
shedding situation.
Homing minimises system disruption due to the switching in
or out of transformers.
Tap position indication accepts inputs from either analogue
or digital sender units.
Fig 1. MicroTAPP AVC Relay Runaway detection locks out the tap-changer to prevent
unwanted tap changes due to electrical or mechanical fail-
ure.
Description
VT Fuse Monitor. Negative-phase sequence (NPS) voltage
element detects blown VT fuses to prevent incorrect voltage
The MicroTAPP range of Automatic Voltage Control (AVC) control.
relays combines the power and flexibility of microprocessor Data Storage is provided through Events, 24-hour Waveforms
technology with the renowned operating philosophy and and Fault Records.
effectiveness of the established Transformer Automatic Par- IEC 60870-5-103 Communications for in-station monitoring
alleling Package (TAPP) method. and control.
Hardware and software watchdogs provide comprehensive
The relay provides three function areas: self-monitoring.
The efficient control of power system voltage levels through MicroTAPP 102
operation of an on-load tap changer
As for the MicroTAPP 101, plus:
Pseudo-VTTM allows control of voltage on remote side of
The monitoring and protection of the power system and tap-
transformer.
changer.
The collection of system data for analysis. User Interface

MicroTAPP represents a complete AVC system, eliminating
complex control schemes and reducing inter-transformer- 40 character x 8 line backlit LCD
panel wiring to a single twisted-pair cable. Menu navigation keys
High integrity and confidence is maintained through the use 5 fixed LEDs
of watchdog self-monitoring and supervision, while inde-
pendent algorithms are provided for the voltage control and
monitoring functions.
Communications using the IEC 60870 standard allows re- Analogue values can be displayed on the LCD screen. In
mote update of settings, and provides access to the relay’s addition most values can be obtained via the data
instrumentation, waveform storage and data collection fa- communications channel(s).
cilities
Primary and secondary currents
Primary and secondary voltages
Function Overview Frequency
Power Factor
MicroTAPP 101 Phase Angles
Transformer & Group Load
Circulating Current voltage control.
PPS and NPS voltage
Enhanced TAPP principle for voltage control.
Tap Position

Status inputs The inter-tap delay sets a minimum period between succes-
Output contacts sive tap instructions to allow time for the tap-changer to
Tap counters operate.
MPPC status
Advanced Control Functionality
Description of Functionality Through its Pseudo-VTTM algorithm the MicroTAPP can calcu-
late and hence control the voltage on the remote side of the
transformer to that on which the VT and CT are located. It
Voltage Control makes use of the tap position, which it ensures is correct
The user specifies target voltage, voltage dead band, initial through an intelligent operation monitor, to calculate the
delay and inter-tap delay. actual transformer ratio and compensate for voltage drops
across the transformer.
When a voltage excursion outside the dead band occurs the
MicroTAPP acts to restore correct system voltage. When de- Voltage Monitoring
ciding on voltage excursion the measured voltage is com- Independent algorithms monitor the system voltage and
pensated for: provide a comprehensive set of blocking elements to prevent
incorrect tap changes.
Load drop compensation (LDC) – compensates for
voltage drop in the network. For added integrity, when a 3-phase VT is used a different
voltage is used for monitoring than for voltage control. The
Corrective coupling voltage (CCV) – acts to eliminate blocking matrix intelligently blocks raise and lower opera-
current circulating between parallel transformers tions depending on system conditions.
due to mis-matches in voltage.
Excessive voltage unbalance can be caused by VT fuse fail-
In service adjustments to the target voltage – ap- ures. If 3-phase VTs are used this condition can be detected
plied either via status inputs or IEC60870 communi- and voltage raise operations blocked.
cations. Voltage
Operate
Time
Block Raise Volts
Initial DTL Upper Band

Delay Initial Normal Operation Block operation for
Delay Lower Band excessive LOAD
Block Lower Volts Allow operation to reduce

CIRCULATING current
IDMTL Block Raise Volts if VT
Initial Fuse failure detected
Delay
80% Volts
Total blocking
Transformer
Load
Full Load
Relay
80% Volts (Transformer Capacity
Deadband
setting)
Fig 2. Tap Change control with Deadband Fig 3. Voltage monitoring blocking matrix
After an initial delay, implemented to allow short-term volt-

If an excessive current flows at normal system power factors
age fluctuations, a tap-change command is issued. The delay
the relay inhibits all tap-changing operations. High currents
is a definite time for low voltages. For high voltages a defi- when the power factor is abnormal may be as a result of
nite time delay (DTL) or an inverse time delay (IDMTL) can be circulating currents. In this situation the relay should act to
specified. If a DTL is specified a fast-tap down can be en- reduce them rather than applying over-current blocking.
abled to provide accelerated operation for very high
system voltages. This provides a fixed high-set of top of
A system voltage below 80% will be due either to the Trans-
Deadband + 2% with a 2 second delay.
former being powered down or a system fault condition and
so all tap-changing is inhibited.

Upper and Lower Alarm levels are provided to indicate ab- Communications
normal voltages. An Alarm will also be issued if the voltage Two fibre-optic communications ports are provided on the
remains outside the Deadband for an abnormal time. rear of the relay. They are optimised for 62.5/125μm glass-
fibre, with BFOC/2.5 (ST®) bayonet style connectors.
Tap-changer Monitoring
An intelligent tap-position indicator and runaway prevention In addition users may interrogate the relay locally with a
algorithm monitors the entire tap-change operation. A Tap- laptop PC and the RS232 port on the front of the relay.
changer runaway is quickly detected and the resulting alarm
can be used to lock-out the tap-changer to prevent damage The relay supports the IEC 60870-5-103 communications
to the system. Incomplete tap-changes are also detected and standard.
indicated.
Reydisp Evolution
If the voltage requires a tap-change beyond the limits of the
tap-changer this is inhibited and a target not achievable
alarm is generated.
Tap Changer Maintenance

A tap-changer operations count and a “sum of I2” count is
provided. Alarm levels can be set which, when reached, can
be routed to a condition-based maintenance system.
Data Storage and

Communication

Fault records Fig 2. Typical ReyDisp Evolution screenshot

The last 10 tap-changer fault records are available from the
This support software is common to the entire range of
fascia with time, date and type of failure.
Reyrolle numeric products. It provides the means for the user
to apply settings to the Delta as well as to retrieve settings,
Graphical records
instruments, events, waveforms and 24 hour data.
Recordings of all operational data, voltage level, transformer
load, summed load etc. are available for up to 24 hours.

Status Inputs
Technical Information
Nominal Voltage Operating Range
For full technical data refer to the Performance 30, 34 VAC/DC 24 to 37.5 VAC/DC
Specification of the Technical Manual. 48, 54 VAC/DC 37.5 to 60 VAC/DC
110, 125 VAC/DC 87.5 to 137.5 VAC/DC
220, 250 VAC/DC 175 to 280 VAC/DC
Inputs and Outputs
Note that the status input voltage need not be the same
Characteristic Energising Quantity as the main energising voltage.
The 30V and 48V inputs meet the requirements of ESI48-

AC Current 1, 5 A, 50/60 Hz
4 ESI 1. However, the 110V and 220V inputs will operate
AC Voltage 63.5 V line-neutral, with a DC current of less than 10mA. Where 110V or
110 V line-line, 50/60 Hz 220V inputs compliant with ESI48-4 ESI 1 are required, a
relay with 48V binary inputs can be supplied with
Thermal Withstand external series resistors as follows:
AC Current Inputs
continuous 3.0 xIn Nominal Voltage Resistor Value Wattage
110V 2k7 ± 5% 2.5 W
10 minutes 3.5 xIn
220 V 8k2 ± 5% 6.0 W
5 minutes 4.0 xIn
2 minutes 6.0 xIn Parameter Value
1 second 250 A Minimum DC current for operation 10 mA
1 cycle 625 A peak (30 V and 48 V inputs only)
AC Voltage Inputs Reset/Operate Voltage Ratio 90 %
Recommended minimum pulse duration 500 ms
continuous 300 V
Output Relays
Burden
AC Current Inputs Carry continuously 5A ac or dc
1A ≤ 0.1 VA Make and carry 20A ac or dc for 0.5s
5A ≤ 0.3 VA (L/R ≤ 40 ms and V ≤ 30A ac or dc for 0.2s
300V)
AC Voltage Inputs Breaking Capacity
( ≤ 5 A and ≤ 300 V):
≤ 0.01 VA
DC Auxiliary Supply DC Resistive 75 W
Nominal Voltage Operating Range 50 W at L/R ≤ 10ms
30 VDC 24 to 37.5 VDC Minimum number of
1000 at maximum load
operations
48, 110 VDC 37.5 to 137.5 VDC
Minimum recommended
220 VDC 178 to 280 VDC 0.5 W limits 10mA or 5V
load
110 VAC 82.5 to 137.5 VAC RMS
Operate State Burden Mechanical

Maximum 20 W
Vibration(Sinusoidal)IEC 60255-21-1 Class 1
Burdens are measured at nominal rating.
0.5 gn, Vibration response
1.0 gn, Vibration endurance ≤ 5% variation
component
Allowable breaks/dips in ≤20 ms

Shock and Bump IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1 Radio Frequency Interference
IEC 60255-22-3
5 gn, Shock response, 11ms
15 gn, Shock withstand, 11ms ≤ 5% variation 10 V/m, 80 to 1000 MHz ≤5% variation
10 gn, Bump test, 16ms
Conducted RFI
Seismic IEC 60255-21-3 Class 1 IEC 60255-22-6
1 gn, Seismic Response ≤ 5% variation 10 V, 0.15 to 80 MHz ≤5% variation
Conduct limits
IEC 60255-25
Durability In excess of 106
operations Frequency Range Limits dB(µV)
Quasi-peak Average
Recommended load 0.15 to 0.5 MHz 79 66
0.5 to 30 MHz 73 60
Minimum recommended load 0.5 W, limits 10 mA or
5V Radiated limits
IEC 60255-25
Electrical Tests Frequency Range Limits at 10 m

30 to 230 MHz 40
230 to 10000 MHz 47
RMS levels for 1 minute
Between all terminals and earth 2.0 kV Environmental

Between independent circuits 2.0 kV
Across normally open contacts 1.0 kV
Temperature IEC 68-2-1/2
Transient Overvoltage
IEC 60255-5 Operating -10 °C to +55 °C
Between all terminals and earth
5 kV
or between any two Humidity IEC 68-2-3
1.2/50 µs
independent circuits without
0.5 J
damage or flashover Operational test 56 days at 40 °C and
95% RH
Protection Elements
2.5kV, Longitudinal mode ≤3% variation
1.0kV, Transverse mode General Accuracy
Parameter Reference or Value
8kV, Contact discharge ≤5% variation General IEC 60255-3
Current Settings 100% of In
Fast Transient Time Multiplier 1.0
Current input (IDMTL) 2x to 20x Is
4kV, 5/50ns, 2.5 kHz, repetitive ≤3% variation Current input (DTL) 5x Is
Frequency 50 Hz
Ambient temperature 20 °C

General Settings General Accuracy
Parameter Value
Reference conditions
Transient Overreach of ≤ 5%
Highset/Lowset (X/R =
100) Parameter Reference or Value
Disengaging Time (1) < 42 ms Auxiliary Supply Nominal
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Overshoot Time < 40 ms
Ambient Temperature 20 °C
Output contacts have a minimum dwell time of 100ms,

after which the disengage time is as above.
Temperature
Indication
Ambient range Variation
-10 °C to +55 °C ≤ 5%
Relay Healthy
Method Green LED
Frequency
Relay Failure Flashing or extinguished
High, Low Voltage
Range Variation
Method Red LEDs
47 Hz to 52 Hz Level: ≤ 5%
Voltage Alarm Flashing
57 Hz to 62 Hz Operate Time: ≤ 5%
Normal Voltage
Method Green LED
Harmonic content
Tap In Progress
Method Amber LED
Range Variation
Lockout Flashing
Frequencies to 550Hz Setting: ≤ 5%
Settings and Instrumentation
Method graphical backlit LCD
Control Elements
Sub-station communications
Voltage Control Method TAPP, Circulating
Current
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103
Voltage Control
Target 85 to 115% Vn
RS-232 interface
Dead band ±0.1 to ±5.0% Vn
Accuracy ±0.1% Vn
Location Fascia
Repeatability ±1%
Form 25-pin female D-type con-
Initial Delay
nector
Characteristics DTL or IDMTL (voltage
Fibre interface
high only)
Location Rear
Setting 2 to 180 s
Quantity 2 x Rx, 2 x Tx
Accuracy ±0.25 s
Form BFOC/2.5 (ST®) bayonet
Repeatability ±0.25 s
connector
General
COM1
No of transformers 1 to 16
Baud rate 75-115200 baud
No of taps 1 to 39
Interface Fibre-optic port
Sender Unit Resistor chain, binary,
COM2 BCD, gray code
Baud rate 75-115200 baud Inter-Tap delay
Interface Auto-switches between Setting Continuous, 1 to 120 s
Fibre-optic and RS-232 Accuracy 1s
Repeatability 1s

Environmental Type Level Variation
5/50ns, 2.5 kHz, repetitive 4kV ≤ 3%
Conducted RFI IEC 60255-22-6
Operating range -10 °C to +55 °C
Storage range -25 °C to +70 °C Frequency Range Level Variation
0.15 to 80 MHz 10 V ≤ 5%
Humidity IEC 68-2-3
Emissions
Operational test 56 days at 40 °C and 95%
RH Conducted limits IEC 60255-25
Transient Overvoltage IEC 60255-5 Frequency Range Limits dB(ΔV)

Quasi-peak Average
Test Levels 0.15 to 0.5 MHz 79 66
Between all terminals and earth or be- 5 kV 0.5 to 30 MHz 73 60
tween any two independent circuits with- 1.2/50 µs
out damage or flashover 0.5 J Radiated limits IEC 60255-25
Frequency Range Limits at 10 m

Insulation IEC 60255-5 Quasi-peak, dB(ΔV/m)
30 to 230 MHz 40
Test Level (rms for 1 min) 230 to 10000 MHz 47
Between all terminals and 2.0 kV
earth
Between independent 2.0 kV Mechanical
circuits
Across normally open 1.0 kV Vibration Sinusoidal IEC 60255-21-1 Class 1
contacts
Immunity Vibration response 0.5 gn ≤ 5%
Auxiliary DC Supply IEC 60255-11
Vibration endurance 1.0 gn
Quantity Value Shock and Bump IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1

Allowable superimposed ≤ 12% of dc
ac component voltage
Allowable breaks/dips in ≤ 20 ms
Shock response, 11ms 5gn ≤ 5%
Shock withstand, 11ms 15gn
Bump test, 16ms 10gn
High Frequency Disturbance IEC 60255-22-1 Class III
Seismic IEC 60255-21-3 Class 1

Common (Longitudinal) Mode 2.5 kV ≤ 3%
Seismic Response 1 gn ≤ 5%
Series (Transverse) Mode 1.0 kV
Electrostatic Discharge IEC 60255-22-2 Class III
Durability In excess of 106 operations

Contact discharge 8 kV ≤ 5%
Radio Frequency Interference IEC 60255-22-3
Frequency Range Level Variation

80 to 1000 MHz 10 V/m ≤ 5%
Fast Transient IEC 60255-22-4 Class IV

tion load current. The LDC effect shall be proportional to
the total connected busbar load. This method will provide
Sample Specification the correct voltage boost given by the chosen LDC set-
ting, irrespective of the number of transformers in ser-
Voltage Control vice. Full LDC functionality shall be retained when parallel
The following standard system conditions should be ca- control based on the minimum circulating current
tered for with minimal or no adjustment to the Automatic method is used.
Voltage Control System (AVC):
Voltage Monitoring
Where a transformer operates in parallel with other trans- Monitoring of the voltage level shall be via separate con-
formers, either within a site or across a network, the AVC nections to those used for voltage control.
should operate in order to (a) maintain the system volt-
age at the correct level and (b) operate at a tap position If the measured system voltage is less than a pre-set un-
where minimal reactive circulating current flows from or der-voltage limit or greater than a pre-set over-voltage
into any system transformer which is a part of the net- limit, the system shall inhibit the appropriate tap control
work. outputs to the relevant transformer but allow tap change
operations that will correct the abnormal voltage. An
In the event of a failure of communications either be- alarm will be generated if the abnormal voltage persists.
tween grouped transformers or from a remote control
centre, the AVC should be able to operate in a stand- Where a 3 phase VT is used the system shall monitor all
alone mode and achieve a satisfactory overall system voltages in order to ensure the integrity of the VT secon-
voltage. dary output. Any abnormalities detected will inhibit the
voltage raise outputs from the system and initiate an
If a transformer in a group is switched IN, no significant alarm.
change in voltage will occur.
If the load current is greater than a pre-set limit, the sys-
If a transformer in a group is switched OUT, no significant tem shall inhibit all tap control outputs to the relevant
change in voltage will occur. transformer(s) and generate an alarm, unless the situa-
tion is caused by circulating current flowing between
The Load Drop Compensation (LDC) method, if used, transformers. In this case tap changing will be allowed to
must remain at the correct level regardless of the number reduce the circulating current.
of transformers connected to a common busbar.
Tap-changer Monitoring
Settings applicable to different network running The tap changer operation monitor circuits shall be pro-
arrangements should be applied to the AVC and be capa- vided for tap changer runaway protection in the event of
ble of implementation by a single instruction (either from a mechanism, wiring or relay fault. The following shall be
a remote source or locally) or plant status change. considered minimum requirements for such protection:
The AVC must be provided with the capability of inde- Protection is required that will detect incorrect tap
pendently protecting against incorrect operation which change operation at the earliest opportunity. An incorrect
would allow abnormal voltages to be applied to the net- tap change operation is defined as “a tap change opera-
work. tion that is not initiated by a ‘true’ control signal”. As an
example, a slow to clear ‘raise’ contactor may allow a
The AVC shall be capable of controlling at least 16 trans- motor drive to continue driving the mechanism at the end
formers operating in parallel as a group. of a tap change cycle such that the tap change maintain-
ing switch recloses and thus allows the tap change to ‘run
The operating characteristics of the voltage regulating away’.
relay is to be such that a raise or lower command will only
be issued after an initial time delay as set on the voltage The preferred scheme should not rely on timing
regulating relay. A definite time characteristic and an systems for determination of this situation, but intelli-
inversely related initial time characteristic shall be select- gently monitor the relationship between the control sig-
able. When a definite time delay is selected a fast tapping nals, the tap change in progress inputs and the tap posi-
feature which bypasses the initial time delay in the event tion.
of substantial voltage excursions above the set band is
preferred. Any subsequent corrective signals for the same If a lockout is required the AVC will initiate contacts
voltage deviation will be delayed by a separate inter-tap both for lockout and alarms. The lockout contacts shall
time delay. provide for the tripping of a mechanically latched contac-
tor or the permissive operation normally open contactor
The voltage regulating relay shall include a ‘Load Drop to remove the tap change motor power supply.
Compensation’ facility. LDC shall be used where the bus-
bar voltage is increased in proportion to the total substa-

Inputs from plant Master/Follower design is NOT the preferred scheme for
To avoid drain on substation batteries, the tap changer submission as a solution.
control supply will provide the supply for all AVC equip-
ment and have a nominal AC voltage of 110V (+10% to – Indication and instrumentation
25%). The following indications shall be provided:
Measuring voltage inputs shall be provided which are Circuit identifier

capable of operating with VTs with secondary rating be- AVC healthy LED
tween 63.5 and 250V. Adjustment shall be provided to Voltage normal/high/low LEDs
eliminate any VT ratio errors. Tap in progress LED
Voltmeter showing system voltage
A measuring current input shall be provided capable of Tap position indication, allowing for unusual tap ar-
operating with CTs of 1 or 5A secondary rating. The relay rangements (e.g. 8A, 8B, 8C)
shall be configurable to allow non-standard CT ratios to Indication of transformer load, transformer load power
be used. The relay shall be capable of using the CT re- factor and total load of all paralleled transformers
gardless of the phase to which it may be connected.
Remote Access
The relay shall be capable of measuring up to 39 tap Remote access shall be provided through both hard-wired
positions, including special tap positions (e.g. 8A, 8B, 8C) inputs and outputs, and using a non-proprietary commu-
from resistor chain, BCD, binary and gray code sender nications protocol, e.g. IEC 60870-5-103. The following
units. features shall be available using both access methods:
When the AVC system is set to remote, it will be possible
A tap-change in progress (TCIP) signal shall be detected to switch the AVC between automatic and manual. When
by the relay from a contact provided in the tap changer. in manual, it will be possible to operate the tap-changer
The TCIP contact will close as the tap change starts and from a remote point.
open at the end of the tap change sequence.
It will be possible to select between a minimum of 3 pre-
Outputs to plant set voltage targets.
The tap raise/lower outputs shall be via normally open
clean contacts with a minimum pulse time of 1.5s rated Alarms will be provided for AVC failure, VT fuse failure,
for 5A AC. voltage out of limits, tap-changer runaway, tap-change
incomplete, target not achievable.
The AVC system will be required to prevent operation of
the tap changer motor drive in the event of unwanted The following data shall be made available using the
operations. Two methods may be used: communications protocol:
Tripping of a mechanically latched contactor connected Metering values of voltage, load, power factor
into the supply for the motor and tap position.
Permissive operation of a normally de-energised contac-
tor connected into the motor supply during the tap Traces of voltage, current, tap position, frequency and a
changing sequence measure of power quality for a minimum period of 24
hours.
To enable either option, change-over clean output con-
tacts rated for at least 5A AC shall be provided.
Operator Controls
The AVC system shall provide the means to:
Switch control points between local (at the AVC) and

remote (network control centre).
Switch between local and automatic control.
Raise and lower the tap-changer manually.
When set to local it shall not be possible for a remote

point to operate the tap-changer or switch the AVC be-
tween manual and automatic modes.
If a Master/Follower tap change control scheme is pro-

posed, additional control switches will be required. A
Typical Connection Diagrams
PSU
13 4
14 5
RL1
15 6
21 7
S1
23 8
RL2
25 9
S2
27 10
26 11
RL3
S3
28 12
17
RL5 RL4
19
18
20
1 IO1
CANH IO1 2
+ -
S4
3 CANL 4
5 CANGND 6
S5
7 8
9 B0 10
S6
11 B1 12
13 B2 14
S7
15 B3 Digital 16
17 B4 TPI 18
S9 S8
19 B5 20
21 COM 22
23 A+ 24
S11 S10
25 wiper Analogue 26
27 A- TPI 28
1 IO2 2
S12
- +
RL7 RL6
see note 3 3 4
5 6
S13
7 8
9 10
RL8
S14
11 12
13 14
RL9
S19 S18 S17 S16 S15
15 16
17 18
RL13,12 RL11,10
19 20
21 22
23 24
25 26
27 28
see note 2
AN1 CPU
23
IRIG-B
24 Ir
see note 1 VA 25
26 Vr Tx-1
VB 27
28 Vs
VC Rx-1
ISO Rx
2 FASCIA
3 Tx-2b
ISO Tx
4 Front serial
ISORTS
5 comms port 2a
ISODTR
ISODTR
6 25 way 'D' Rx-2b
ISOGND
7 connector
20 (female) Rear F.O.
ISODTR
comms ports
Notes
1. Analogue connections show use with a star-connected
VT, other arangements can be used.
2. CT connection is shown on blue phase, any connection
can used.
3. IO2 is provided on MT1-xxx xJ variants only

Fig. 4 shows two options for AC measuring connections, one using a 3-phase VT the other for when only a single-phase VT is
available. Any phase may be chosen for the CT.
Fig. 6 and 7 show typical control circuit connections. Fig. 6 is the traditional connection for use with a step-by-step contactor
(relay in ‘Basic’ mode). In Fig. 7 the step-by-step control is provided by the MICROTAPP software (relay in ‘step-by-step’
mode).
TRANSFORMER
A a
Single
Phase rotation phase VT
B b MicroTAPP
A-B-C or A-C-B
C c module
AN1
VT
MicroTAPP 23
module 24
AN1 25
23
26
24 27
25 28
26
27
28
Fig 4. Typical voltage and current measurement inputs
MicroTAPP MicroTAPP
Top Tap
module IO1 module IO1
B0 9
B1 11
Tap
B2 13
Moving contact
23 position B3 15
25 Switch B4 17
Tap 1 27
B5 19
COM
21
Fig5. Tap position input connections for Resistor Chain and BCD/Binary sender units

110V ac CONTROL SUPPLY
MicroTAPP
A13 POWER A14
SUPPLY
Tap Change A15 - CASE EARTH

mounted control
MicroTAPP
Local Remote enabled
S1
S7
In Progress Motor
Contactors
Raise Operating DSS open
Limit
Switches handle during tap
Interlock change
Lowe Raise
Raise
r RL5
Lower
Lower
RL4
Lockout
RL
2
Master Lockout or
Step by Permissive relay
Raise Sense
S3
Step (runaway
prevention)
Lower Sense
S2
Block Raise
Directional Master Lockout
Sensing reset coil
Block Lower
Switch (closed (example only)
Ballast Resistor during tap
if Required change)
Fig 6. Typical tap-change control circuit with traditional step-by-step contactor
110V ac CONTROL SUPPLY
MicroTAPP
POWER
SUPPLY
Tap Change A15 - CASE EARTH

mounted control
MicroTAPP
Local Remote enabled
S1
S7
In Progress Motor
Contactors
Raise Operating DSS open
Limit
Switches handle during tap
Interlock change
Lowe Raise Rais
r RL5 e
(mechanically
Lower maintained T/
Lower
RL4 C only)
Lockout
RL2
Master Lockout or
Permissive relay
Raise Sense Master (runaway
Lockout reset prevention)
S3
coil (example
Lower Sense only)
S2
Directional
Sensing
Switch (closed
Ballast Resistor
during tap
if Required
change)
Fig 7. Typical tap-change control circuit with step-by-step control internal to the MICROTAPP

3 1 5 3 1 5 5 1 3
7 7 7
Intermediate
MicroTAPP 1 MicroTAPP N
MicroTAPP
module IO1 module IO1 module IO1
MPPC line terminator MPPC screen earthing MPPC Screend twisted MPPC line terminator
link at a single point pair cable link
Fig 8. Connections for MicroTAPP peer-peer communications (MPPC)
Maintaining switch
driven by
mechanism
Lowe
Raise
r
Operating
Overloa Raise Lower handle
Isolator Contactor Contactor Limit Switches Interlock
d
3 phase
power Motor
supply
Master Lockout
Relay trip or
Permissive close
(runaway
prevention)
Fig 9. Typical tap-change motor circuit

Case Drawing
The MicroTAPP is supplied in either a size 8 or size 12 case, depending on the status input and output relay requirement, see
the table below.
Fig 10. Overall Dimensions and panel drilling for Epsilon E8 case
Fig 11. Overall Dimensions and panel drilling for Epsilon E12 case

Ordering Information - MICROTAPP 7SG151
MICROTAPP 7 S G 1 5 □▲ 0 - □▲ □▲ □▲ □▲ □▲ - 0 □▲ □▲ 0
Transformer tap change control and monitoring. | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
Relay type | | | | | | | |
Automatic voltage control (AVC) 1 | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
Protection options | | | | | | |
Basic - Microprocessor based automatic voltage control (AVC) 1 | | | | | |
system operating on the well proven TAPP philosophy | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
Advanced - As basic model only particularly suitable for em- 2 | | | | G |
bedded generation and traction system applications as this | | | | ||
model is capable of controlling the HV or LV voltage | | | | ||
| | | | | |
30 V DC auxiliary, 30 V DC/AC binary input A | | | | |
30 V DC auxiliary, 48 V DC/AC binary input B | | | | |
48/110 V DC auxiliary, 30 V DC/AC binary input C | | | | |
48/110 V DC auxiliary, 48 V DC/AC binary input 1) D | | | | |
48/110 V DC auxiliary, 110 V DC/AC low burden binary input E | | | | |
220 V DC auxiliary, 110 V DC/AC low burden binary input F | | | | |
220 V DC auxiliary, 220 V DC/AC low burden binary input G | | | | |
110 V AC auxiliary, 110 V DC/AC binary input H | | | | |
110 V AC auxiliary, 48 V DC/AC binary input X | | | | |
110 V AC auxiliary, 220 V DC/AC binary input J | | | | |
110 V AC auxiliary, 30 V DC/AC binary input K | | | | |
| | | | |
I/O range | | | | |
11 Binary Inputs / 5 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover) E | | E |
19 Binary Inputs / 13 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover and J | | G |
4 normally closed contacts) | | | | |
19 Binary Inputs / 13 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover) K | | G |
| | | |
Frequency | | | |
50/60Hz 3 | | |
| | |
Nominal current | | |
1/ 5 A 0 | |
| |
Housing size | |
|
Fibre optic (ST-connector) / IEC 60870-5-103 A
1) High burden 110/125V & 220/250V binary inputs compliant with ESI48-4 ESI 1 available via external dropper resistors with 48V binary input version
110/125 V application, order combination of the following resistor boxes to suit number of binary inputs
VCE: 2512H10064 (9 inputs, 110V)
VCE:2512H10065 (5 inputs, 110V)
VCE:2512H10066 (1 inputs, 110V)
220/250 V application, order resistor box 2512H10066 in addition
VCE:2512H10067 (5 inputs, 220V)
VCE:2512H10068 (1 inputs, 220V)
2) For use with resistor sender units, order mounting bracket assembly with 19 off 220ohm resistors – VCE:2512H10072
3) Milliamp transducer FTPT, order 7XG2300-1AA00-0AA0
Averaging VT FAVT, order 7XG2300-2AA00-0AA0
Tap position indication module FTIM, order 7XG2300-3AA00-0AA0

Reyrolle
Protection
Devices
7PG21 – Solkor R/Rf

Pilot Wire Current Differential Protection
Answers for energy

7PG21 – Solkor R/Rf
Pilot Wire Current Differential Protection
Additional Options
15kV Isolation
The Solkor R/Rf relay has an insulation level of 5kV between
pilot connections and the local ground to withstand voltages
induced on the pilot cable due to coupling with the fault
current and to withstand differential ground voltages caused
by the flow of fault current. Experience has shown that 5kV
insulation is usually adequate for most distribution feeders.
For higher voltage systems where feeders may be longer and

fault levels higher, an additional external isolation trans-
former is available for use with the relay in Rf mode to in-
crease the voltage withstand to 15kV.
Description 5kV systems may be suitable for higher voltage systems

where fault levels are low or feeder lengths are short. One
Solkor R & Solkor Rf are well established pilot wire feeder isolation transformer is fitted at each end of the pilot circuit.
differential protections operating on the current balance Tappings at the transformers can be utilised to allow pilots
principle. The R/Rf relay is primarily intended for use in the Rf with inter-core capacitance up to 4μF can be used compared
mode which has the advantage of increased operating speed to the 0.8μF limit imposed by the 5kV standard arrangement.
but can be simply changed to R mode for compatibility with
pre-installed remote end relays which are older 5kv Solkor R Pilot supervision
type relays. Communication via the pilots between the relay pair is es-
sential for correct operation of the Current Differential pro-
The relay is suitable for application on a single pair of pri- tection system.
vately owned pilots with loop resistance up to 2000ohms to
protect 2 ended feeder circuits up to 20km in length. Two Additional external Pilot Supervision equipment can be sup-
compatible relays are used as a pair with one relay con- plied to detect pilot cable open circuit which can lead to
nected to current transformers at each end of the feeder protection operation or short circuit pilots which will greatly
respectively. The Solkor R/Rf relays do not require an auxil- reduce the sensitivity of the relays under subsequent fault
iary DC supply. conditions.
Pilot supervision will not block relay operation but will pro-
Function Overview vide an alarm. Pilot Supervision is available to suit the 5kV or
15kV insulation level of the scheme.
High transient stability.
Overcurrent Guard
High speed operation. Solkor relay trip contacts can be connected in series with
Low phase and earth fault settings. those of an Overcurrent Guard relay driven from the same
current transformers to avoid operation for damaged pilots
Little or no setting variation with pilot length during normal load levels.
Test points at relay fascia
The electromechanical B69 can be used for this which will
Bleed-off up to 20% of rated current
provide variable settings without an auxiliary supply.
Easily reconnected as R or Rf mode
Option of 15kV pilot isolation Alternatively, a numeric relay from the Argus range can be
used which will have negligible additional AC burden on the
Option of pilot supervision current transformer and can be used to add the waveform
Option of intertripping through the same pilot pair recording functionality to the traditional Solkor scheme.

Intertripping
The current differential system will naturally issue a trip at
both ends for an in zone fault. Additional Intertripping
equipment can also be supplied which utilises the pilot con-
nection to initiate a protection operation at the remote end.
This is generally used to cause a trip for an out of zone fault.
There are 3 different methods to achieve this and their appli-
cation depends on the fault current available for the out of
zone fault.
Firstly the pilot loop can be open circuited to allow the re-
mote end to operate on its measured current. To ensure
positive operation of the remote end relay, the current
should be at least twice the normal fault setting.
Secondly, the local end summation transformer can be short

circuited to allow the remote end to operate on its measured
current but with the local end connected in shunt. This can
be successful with R mode where settings are raised to 4x
normal settings but with Rf mode this can be up to 10x nor-
mal settings and this current is often not available.
Thirdly Injection intertripping can be used whereby the pilots

are disconnected from the local relay and an AC signal, pro-
duced by an inverter, is injected to force the remote end to
operate. This method will provide a successful intertrip re-
gardless of the remote relay current level and can be applied
on radial networks.

Typical Equipment Options and Schemes
Fig 1. Installation with existing Solkor R Relay
Fig 2. Standard 5kV Plain Solkor Rf
Fig 3. Standard 15kV Plain Solkor Rf

Fig 4. 5kV Solkor Rf with pilot Supervision
Fig 5. 5kV Plain Solkor Rf with Overcurrent Guard

Fig 6. 15kV Solkor Rf with Pilot Supervision
Fig 7. 15kV Solkor Rf with Pilot Supervision and Overcurrent Guard

Fig 8. 5kV Solkor R Mode with One Way Injection Intertripping
TEC
Solkor Rf 5kV Pilots Solkor Rf
E6 E6
Solkor Rf B34
Inverter
Initiating B34
BOP
Contact E2 1 1/2V
Fig 9. 5kV Solkor Rf Mode with One Way Injection Intertripping
Fig 10. 15kV Solkor Rf with Pilot Supervision and 2 Way Injection Intertripping

Service Conditions and performance data
Application Requirements
Number of Pilot cores required 2
Pilot Requirements
R Mode Rf Mode Rf mode with 15kv Transf.
Tap 1 Tap 0.5 Tap 0.25
Max. Loop Resistance 1000 Ω 2000 Ω 1780 Ω 880 Ω 440 Ω
Max. Inter core Capacitance 2.5μF 0.8 μF 1 μF 2 μF 4 μF
Pilot Current and Voltage

R Mode Rf Mode Rf mode with 15kv Transf.
Tap 1 Tap 0.5 Tap 0.25
Peak Voltage applied to pilots under fault 300v 450v 450v 330v 225v
conditions
Maximum current carried by pilots under 200mA 250mA 250mA 380mA 500mA
fault conditions
Maximum Primary Line Capacitive Charging Current.

Solidly Earthed System, 1/3 times the most sensitive earth fault setting
Resistance Earthed System, 1/9 times the most sensitive earth fault setting

Indication Hand Reset Flag
Mechanical Durability Contact Arrangement 3 N/O
Contact Rating Make and carry for 0.2s a bur-
Vibration, relays comply with BS142 section 2.1 Cate- den of 6600VA with a maxi-
mum of 30A
gory S2. Shock, relays withstand 20G shock or impact
on the panel without operating. Opera-
tion/mechanical life, relays will withstand in excess of
10,000 operations.
Environmental
Temperature
Electrical Performance IEC 60068-2-1/2
Type Level
Characteristic Energising Quantities Operating Range -10 °C to +55 °C
Storage range -25 °C to +70 °C
Rated Current (In) 0.5A
1A
2A Humidity
5A IEC 60068-2-3
6.67A Type Level
Operational test 56 days at 40 °C and 95 %
Rated Frequency (fN) Operating Range
relative humidity
50 Hz 47Hz to 52Hz
60Hz 57Hz to 62Hz
IP Ratings
Insulation
Type Level
Between pilot circuit and all other inde- 5kV rms Installed with cover IP 51
pendent circuits and earth
Between all external terminal and earth 2kV rms Pilot Supervision Equipment
Between terminals of independent circuits 2kV rms
Across normally open contacts 1kV rms Auxiliary Supply
Send End 110/220/240V ac 50/60Hz
Isolation Transformer Receive End 30V dc
50V dc
Between pilot circuit terminals and all 15kV rms 125V dc
240V dc
other terminals and earth
Burdens
Maximum through fault condition for stability 50x
rated current
AC Supervision Supply 10VA approx.
AC supply fail relay 3 to 5VA
Thermal Withstand (AC Multiple of rated current Receive Repeat Relay 1W
current)
Continuous 2x Contact Arrangements
20 minutes 2.8x
10 minutes 3.5x Pilot Supervision Relay(B75) 1NO self reset
5 minutes 4.7x Repeat relay B74 2NO & 2NC
3 minutes 6.0x Supervision supply fail relay 2NO & 2NC
2 minutes 7.3x
3 seconds 60x Contact Ratings
1 second 100x limited to 400A
Type B22, B74 and B75
Make & Carry Continuously 1500VA ac or 1500W dc within
Operating Time R Mode 5kV Rf 15kV Rf Mode limits of 660V and 3A.
Mode Make and carry 8A for 3 secs or 16A
3x fault setting 60ms 50ms 45ms for 1 second.
Break 300VA ac or 75W dc (inductive L/R
5x fault setting 55ms 45ms 40ms 0.04) within limits of 250V and 5A
10x fault setting 50ms 45ms 40ms Indication Flag indicators shown on de-
energisation

Supervision supply fail relay Hand Reset Flag
(B22)
Receive Repeat Relay Self Rest Flag
Injection Intertripping
Rating Vx, 110-125V dc
Burden 1A at 125V dc full output

400mA with economy resistor
Settings
Primary fault settings with insulation between pilot cir- For the above purpose the saturation voltage i.e. the knee
cuits and other terminals and earth 15kV; typical current point of the magnetising curve, may be taken as that point
transformers and zero pilot capacitance are given below. on the curve at which a 10% increase in output voltage
Values are expressed as percentages of the current trans- requires 50% increase in magnetising current.
former rating.
To ensure good balance of the protection the current
transformers at the two ends should have identical turns
Fault Fault Setting ratios. Close balance of the ratio is provided by current
Type transformers to IEC60044: pt1, class px, whose ratio error is
5kV scheme 15kV scheme (Rf
mode only) limited to ±0.25% and these CTs are recommended to meet
the above requirements.
Nominal Typical Nominal Typical
It is recommended that no other burdens should be
N1 N N1 N N1 N N1 N
included in the current transformer circuit, but where this
A-E 16 22 18 25 22 31 25 35
cannot be avoided the additional burden should be added
B-E 18 27.5 21 32 26 39 30 44 to those listed when determining the current transformer
C-E 22 37 25 42 31 52 35 59 output voltage required.
A-B 110 125 155 177
B-C 110 125 155 177 In addition to the above, the secondary magnetising
currents of the current transformers at different ends of the
C-A 55 62 77.5 88.5
feeder should normally not differ by more than In/20 am-
3P 63 72 89 101 peres for output voltages up to 50/In volts where In =
rated current of Solkor Rf relay. This criterion is applied to
The addition of Pilot Supervision will increase the quantify matching of the transient response of the two CTs
nominal settings by up to 20%. so that relay operations do not occur due to differing
responses of the CTs to normal load switching or the
incidence and clearance of out of zone faults. This
Current Transformer condition is usually easily satisfied by modern CTs of
similar size since the magnetising current is usually a
Requirements lower value. Care should be taken when applying a new CT
to be paired with existing CT and also when
interposing CTs are required to match CT ratios.
R mode Rf mode
Maximum output of CT 1.2VA 3VA
required to operate relay
The main requisite is that the saturation voltage of the

current transformers should not be less than that given by
the formula:

Case Dimensions
Fig 11. E2 Case
Fig 12. E4 Case
Fig 13. E6 Case

Fig 14. C11/2 Case

Connection Diagrams

5kV Pilot Supervision Receive End
17 19
Pilots to relay B75 Pilots to remote end
18 20
B74
13 + 14
1 * 3
2 * 4
5 * 7
6 * 8
* contacts may be 2M2B as shown or 4M or 4B
B22 Power Supply Supervision Relay for Pilot Supervision Scheme
+
13 14
1 * 3
2 * 4
5 * 7
6 * 8
* contacts may be 2M2B as shown or 4M or 4B

B34 Delayed Pick-up Relay for Solkor Rf Intertripping
+ * contacts may be 2M2B as shown or as below

13 14
1-3 2-4 5-7 6-8
4M M M M M
1 * 3
3M1B M B M M
2M2B B B M M
2 * 4
1M3B B B M B
5 * 7 0B B B B B
6 * 8
TEC Relay for Solkor Rf 2 stage Intertripping

Initiating Contact
B
+ 10(25) 9(28) -
F OPERATE
Sustained Intertrip
+ 21(26)
RESET
+ 22(27)
Pulsed Intertrip R1
TCD
PRECISION RELAY
INVERTER
24(34) +
300R
23(33) 11(31)
12(32)
15(29) 16(30)
5/15kV Insulation
1(3) 2(15)
3(7) 4(9)
5(16) 6(18)
7(20) 8(22)
Terminal numbers are shown as 5kV(15kV)
Inverter for Injection Intertripping
A11
+
A1
A10 * * _
A5
A3
A4
* Wire link required between A5 to A11 for pulsed intertrip.

300ohm, >18W Economy resistor required between A5 * A11 for sustained Intertrip

Ordering Information - Solkor R/Rf 7PG21
Solkor R/Rf 7 P G 2 1 □□ - □□□□□ - □□□ 0

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Pilot wire current differential | | | | | | | | | |
feeder protection. | | | | | | | | | |
Relay type | | | | | | | | | |
Solkor R/Rf relay 1 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Solkor R/Rf equipment | | | | | | | | |
Solkor R/Rf - Circulating current feeder 1 | | | | | | | |
protection | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
Contact operation | | | | | | | |
Self reset contacts 1 | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
Contact arrangement – NO | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Contact arrangement NC | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | |
| | | | |
Number of contacts | | | | |
Three 3 | | | |
| | | |
Contact type | | | |
NO (Standard) / NC (Standard) 0 | | |
| | |
Solkor mode | | |
Solkor Rf 2) 0 | |
Solkor R 1 | |
| |
Housing size | |
Case size E6 (4U high) D |
|
Rating |
0.5A AC A
1A AC B
2A AC C
5A AC D
6.67A AC E
Solkor R/Rf 7 P G 2 1 □□ - 0 A A 0 0 - 0 □A 0
▲ ▲ ▲
15kV isolation transformer for | | |
use with Solkor Rf. | | |
| | |
Relay type | | |
Solkor R/Rf - Circulating current feeder protection 1 | |
scheme | |
| |
Solkor R/Rf equipment | |
Solkor Rf – 15kV isolation transformer 2 |
|
|
Housing size |
Special A
1) For pilot insulation of between 5kV and 15kV, SOLKOR Rf mode only, order 7PG2112-0AA00-0AA0 isolating transformer with the relay at each feeder-end
2) Relay is set in Solkor Rf mode as default

Ordering Information – Solkor Pilot Supervision 7PG21
Supply transformer rectifier unit 7 P G 2 1 □0 - 0 A A 0 0 - □□□ 0

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
For use with Solkor R/Rf relay, | | | | | | | | |
pilot supervision send end. | | | | | | | | |
Relay type | | | | | | | | |
Supply Transformer/Rectifier unit (send 2 | | | | | | | |
end) 1) | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
Type of Flag | | | | | | | |
No flag 0 | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
Contact Arrangement - NO | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Contact Arrangement – NC | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | |
| | | | |
None 0 | | | |
| | | |
None 0 | | |
| | |
Insulation level | | |
5kV 1 C |
15kV 2 W |
15kV, front connection 3 W |
| |
Housing size | |
Case size E4 (4U high) C |
Case size C1 1/2 Vedette W |
|
Rating 1) |
110/220/240V AC, 50/60Hz A
1) Supply Transformer/Rectifier unit (send end), ratings 110/220/240V ac, 50/60Hz.

2) For required supply supervision relay B22, see 7PG213*.
3) For optional guard relay B69, one 3 phase set (two sets required one at each feeder end), see 7PG217*.

B22-AC 7 P G 2 1 □□ - □□□□□ - □ □□ 0
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
For use with Solkor R/Rf relay, | | | | | | | | | |
pilot supervision send end. | | | | | | | | | |
Relay type | | | | | | | | | |
Supply supervision (B22-AC) 3 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | |
Hand reset reverse acting flag 2 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | |
| | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | |
| | | | |
Four 4 | | | |
| | | |
| | |
Frequency | | |
50Hz 1 | |
60Hz 2 | |
| |
Housing size | |
Case size E2 (4U high) A |
|
Voltage rating |
110V AC A
220V AC B
240V AC C

B75/74 7 P G 2 1 □□ - □□□□□ - □ □□ 0
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
pilot supervision receive end | | | | | | | | | |
(5kV). | | | | | | | | | |
Relay type 1) | | | | | | | | | |
Receive and repeat (B75/B74) 4 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | |
Self reset reverse acting flag 4 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NO A E | | | | |
2 NO C C | | | | |
4 NO E A | | | | |
| | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | |
| | | | |
Four 4 | | | |
| | | |
| | |
5kV 1 | |
| |
Housing size | |
|
Voltage rating |
24V DC A
30V DC B
50V DC C
125V DC E
240V DC F
1) Option selection for B74 element, B75 (3mA, 1NO/0NC) element included as standard

B75 7 P G 2 1 □□ - □□□□□ - □ □□ 0
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
(15kV). | | | | | | | | | |
Relay type | | | | | | | | | |
Receive (B75) 5 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | |
| | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | |
| | | | |
One 1 | | | |
| | | |
| | |
15kV 2 | |
15kV, front connection 3 | |
| |
Housing size | |
|
Current setting |
3mA A

B74 7 P G 2 1 □□ - □□□□□ - □ □□ 0
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
(15kV). | | | | | | | | | |
Relay type | | | | | | | | | |
Receive repeat (B74) 6 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | |
| | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | |
| | | | |
Four 4 | | | |
| | | |
| | |
15kV 2 | |
| |
Housing size | |
|
Voltage rating |
24V DC A
30V DC B
50V DC C
125V DC E
240V DC F

B69 7 P G 2 1 □□ - □□□□□ - □ □□ 0
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
For use with Solkor R/Rf relay as | | | | | | | | | |
overcurrent/earth fault guard. | | | | | | | | | |
Relay type | | | | | | | | | |
Three pole overcurrent/earth fault 7 | | | | | | | | |
guard (B69) (3P O/C or 2P O/C+E/F) | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | |
No flag 0 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | |
| | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | |
| | | | |
Two 2 | | | |
| | | |
| | |
Current rating | | |
1A 1 | |
5A 2 | |
| |
Housing size | |
Case size E6 (4U high) D |
|
Current setting |
Outer elements 50-200%, Inner element 50-200% A
Outer elements 50-200%, Inner element 10-40% B
Outer elements 50-200%, Inner element 20-80% C
1) Optional B69 Guard relays, one 3 phase set. (Two sets required one at each feeder end)

Ordering Information – Solkor Injection Intertripping 7PG21
Inverter 7 P G 2 1 □□ - 0 A A 0 0 - □□□ 0
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Injection intertripping equipment for | | | | |
intertripping of remote Solkor R/Rf | | | | |
relays over pilot wires. Relay type | | | | |
SOLKOR injection intertripping 8 | | | |
(Inverter) | | | |
| | | |
Injection intertripping equipment 2) | | | |
Inverter DC - Solkor R 1 | | |
Inverter AC - Solkor Rf 2 | | |
| | |
15kV 2 | |
| |
Housing size | |
Special A |
|
Voltage rating |
125V DC E
B34 7 P G 2 1 □□ - □□□□□ - □ □□ 0
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Injection intertripping equipment for | | | | | | | | | |
intertripping of remote Solkor Rf | | | | | | | | | |
relays over pilot wires. Relay type 3) | | | | | | | | | |
Solkor Rf injection intertripping (Delay) 8 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Injection intertripping equipment | | | | | | | | |
B34 3 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | |
| | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | |
| | | | |
Four 4 | | | |
| | | |
| | |
5kV 1 | |
| |
Housing size | |
|
Voltage rating |
24V DC A
30V DC B
50V DC C
60V DC D
125V DC E
240V DC F
1) For Solkor Injection Intertripping Send relay, select suitable TEC relay, see 7PG223*
2) ’Inverter DC Solkor R’ can be used as a 15kV isolated DC supply for surge proof intertripping
3) Option selection for B34 (5kV) delay relay, required on Solkor Rf schemes

Ordering Information – TEC 7PG22
TEC 7 P G 2 2 □□ - □□□□□ - □□□ 0

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Intertrip send relay. | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Relay type | | | | | | | | | |
TEC - Intertrip send 3 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Model Type | | | | | | | | |
Pulse or sustained intertrip 1 | | | | | | | |
Two stage intertrip 2 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
Type of Flag | | | | | | | |
Hand reset flag 1 | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | |
| | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | |
| | | | |
Six 6 | | | |
| | | |
Contact type 1) | | | |
| | |
5kV 1 | |
15kV 2 | |
| |
Housing size | |
|
Rating |
24V DC A
30V DC B
50V DC C
60V DC D
125V DC E
240V DC F
1) 2 NO with standard 2kV insulation, 2 NO and 2 NC with 5kV or 15kV (option 13) insulation

Reyrolle
Protection
Devices
7SG18 Solkor N
Current Differential Protection
Answers for energy

7SG18 Solkor N Monitoring Functions
• Local and remote end primary ammeters

• Local and remote end secondary ammeters
• Differential currents (secondary values)
• Differential starters
• Protection signalling link status
• General alarms
• Output contacts
• Status inputs
• Trip circuit healthy/failure
• Trip counter
• I2 summation
• Time and Date
Description • Starters
• Power on counter
The Solkor technique of current differential protection
was developed by Reyrolle over 50 years ago, and has
formed an important part of the product range ever Data Storage and Communication
since. It has now progressed into a microprocessor
controlled, differential feeder
protection system providing complete protection for Serial communications conform to IEC60870-5-103 or
overhead lines and cable feeders. Modbus RTU protocol. Up to 254 relays may be
connected in a ring network and addressed
individually.
Function Overview A fibre-optic communications port is provided on the rear of
the relay. It is optimised for 62.5/125μm glass fibre using
• Three pole, current differential protection with two ST® (BFOC/2.5) bayonet connectors. Optionally an RS485
stage bias characteristic. electrical connector can be provided.
• Intertripping from internal or external initiation.
• Three pole, phase fault overcurrent protection - Indication
IDMTL or DTL with highsets.
• Earth fault overcurrent protection - IDMTL or DTL LEDs for
with highsets. PROTECTION HEALTHY (Green)
• Overcurrent protection can be configured to operate INTERTRIP (Red) – an intertrip has been received
as guard and/or back-up in case of communications I>Is (Yellow) – any function detects current above
setting
failure.
TRIP (Red) – the relay has issued a trip signal
• Communication loop-back test modes.
SIGNAL HEALTHY (Green) – the signalling link is healthy
• Communication link supervision.
• Trip circuit supervision.
• Circuit breaker fail protection.
• Selectable 1A / 5A current inputs.
• Ratio correction for mis-matched line current
transformer ratios.
• Ability to invert current inputs to facilitate
Fault records
commissioning.
• Seven user-programmable output contacts.
The last 5 fault records are available from the relay fascia
• Up to nine user programmable status inputs with
with time and date of trip, measured quantities and type of
pick-up and drop-off timers.
fault.
• End to End communications via electrical or Fibre
Optic channels.

Disturbance recorder back-up IDMTL and DTL characteristics in the event of a
communications link failure
The waveform recorder may be triggered from a protection
function or external input and has a configurable pre-fault Guard Relays
trigger. Up to 5 fault waveforms may be stored. To add security to the differential scheme it is possible to
AC current waveforms are stored together with the digital designate any of the overcurrent elements as a guard
states of the status inputs and output relays. element. The appropriate overcurrent element must then
operate to allow the differential element to trip.
Reydisp Evolution
Intertripping
Reydisp Evolution is common to the entire range of Reyrolle Three auxiliary signalling channels are provided for
numeric products. It provides the means for the user to intertripping.
apply settings, interrogate settings, retrieve events and One internal intertrip dedicated to the differential
disturbance waveforms from the relay. protection. Two independent intertrips which can be used
for either direct or permissive intertripping from an
Description of Functionality external source.
Where an internal fault is fed largely from one end, the
differential comparators at both ends operate identically,
Current Differential Protection but the guard at the low current end may not pick up and
The relay compares magnitude and phase angle of so block the trip. To overcome this, an internal intertrip
measured currents at either end of the protected feeder, signal is sent which can be used at the receive end to
it operates for faults detected within the protected zone. either override the guard so allowing the differential to
The three pole, phase fault differential comparators each trip, or, operate the trip contacts directly.
provide two bias slopes. The first stage of bias
accommodates proportional measuring errors in the Protection Signalling Channels
system. The second stage accommodates additional spill Four types of protection signalling channel are provided
current caused by CT saturation at high fault levels. as follows:
• RS485 level electrical link for distances up to 2km.

• Short range optical link for distances up to 15km
Iremote (typical) using multimode fibres.
• Long range optical link for distances up to 49km
Operate (typical) using single mode fibres.
Restrain • RS232 link to external modem for electrical link up to
10km
Is Fibre optic signaling interface connections are BFOC/2.5

(ST®) bayonet style connectors.
The RS485 signalling interface uses screw terminals to
Is Ilocal suit 3/32” flat blade terminals.
RS232 signalling interface for connection to the external
pilot wire modem uses a male 9 pin D-type connector to
suit the female connector on the end of the 1.9m long
cable supplied with the pilot wire modem.
Operate
Continuous protection signalling link supervision is
provided. Two test modes are included to assist with
commissioning the signalling link.
• In loop test mode the local transmit and receive
terminals can be connected together, allowing relays
at each end to be tested in isolation.
Fig 1. Differential Protection Operating Characteristic
• Line test mode allows the integrity of the whole
signalling channel to be checked. The relay
It is not necessary to have the same CT ratios at either
commands the remote end to ‘echo’ all received data
end of a protected feeder, since ratio compensation is
back to the local end. In line test mode, the remote
settable. It is also possible to invert the current inputs to
differential protection is suspended.
aid in commissioning.
The relay will automatically account for propagation
Backup Overcurrent Protection
delays in the signalling channel up to a maximum of
In addition to the differential protection, comprehensive
9.5ms. For delays in excess of 9.5ms a manual offset can
overcurrent protection for phase and earth faults provides

be applied, with the actual delay falling within a 9.5ms
window centred on the offset.
Trip Circuit Supervision

The trip circuit is monitored by a status input with the
circuit breaker in both the open and closed position. This
is linked to an alarm and may be configured to operate an
output relay.
Circuit breaker Fail

The circuit breaker fail function may be triggered by a trip
signal issued from the relay or from an external device. It
operates by monitoring the line current following a trip
signal and issues an alarm if the current does not stop
within a specified time interval. This alarm can be used to
operate an output contact to backtrip an upstream circuit
breaker. A further time delay enables another backtrip
stage.

A circuit breaker operations counters is provided.
A summation of I2 broken by the circuit breaker provides a
measure of the contact erosion.
Operations count and I2 alarm levels can be set which,
when reached, can be used as an input to a condition-based
maintenance regime.

DC status input
Technical Data
Nominal voltage Operating range
For full technical data refer to the Performance 30V 18 - 37.5 V D C
Specification of the Technical Manual. 48V 37.5 - 60 V D C
110V 87.5 - 137.5 V D C
220V 175 - 280 V D C
Inputs and Outputs Attribute Value

Min. DC Current for
Operation:
Characteristic energising quantity
30/48V 10mA
110/220V <5mA
AC Current Frequency
Reset/Operate voltage ratio ≥ 90 %
1A / 5A 50 / 60Hz Typical response time 5 ms
Current Inputs: Burdens programmed to energise an < 15 ms
5A Phase/Earth < 0.2VA Recommended Minimum 40ms with setting of 20ms
1A Phase/Earth < 0.05VA pulse duration PU delay for a.c. rejection
Phase/Earth Current Inputs: Thermal Withstand For relays to ES148-4 standard and 110/125 or
220/250 volt DC working a 48 volt status input is
Continuous 3.0 x In supplied for use with external dropper resistors:
10 minutes 3.5 x In
5 minutes 4.0 x In
3 minutes 5.0 x In Nominal Voltage Resistor Value Wattage
2 minutes 6.0 x In 110V 2k7 ± 5% 2.5 W
1A Input 5A Input 220 V 8k2 ± 5% 6.0 W
3 Second 57.7A 230A
Each status input has associated timers which can be
2 Second 70.7A 282A
programmed to give time delayed pick-up and time delayed
1 Second 100A 400A drop-off. These timers have default settings of 20ms, thus
I Cycle 700A 2500A providing rejection and immunity to an AC input signal.
Status inputs will not respond to the following:-
DC Auxiliary supply 250V RMS 50/60Hz applied for two seconds through a
0.1μF capacitor.
Rated DC Voltage Operating Range V dc Discharge of a 10μF capacitor charged to maximum DC
24/30/48V 18 to 60V auxiliary supply voltage.
The status inputs with nominal voltage of 30 V to 54 V
110/220V 88 to 280V
meet the requirements of ESI 48-4 ESI 1.
Operate State Burden Low Burden Status Inputs

Quiescent (Typical) 3W Optionally, low burden status inputs are available directly
Maximum 10 W rated for 110/125Vd.c. or 220/250Vd.c. without dropper
resistors. These inputs do not meet the ESI 48-4 ESI 1
Allowable superimposed ac ≤ 12% of dc requirements. Where necessary a single external resistor in
component voltage parallel can be fitted to meet ESI 48-4 ESI 1 requirements.
supply (collapse to zero from ≤ 20 ms Low Burden Status Input performance
nominal voltage)
Nominal Operating Range Typical burden
87.5 to 137.5 V
110, 125 1.75 to 3.0 mA
DC
220, 250 175 to 280V DC 1.75 to 3.0 mA

220/250 V minimum pick-up voltage typically 100 – 120 V
d.c.

Output relays
Between all the terminals
Carry continuously 5A ac or dc and earth or between any 5 kV
Make and carry 20A ac or dc for 0.5s two independent circuits 1.2/50 µs
(L/R ≤ 40 ms and V ≤ 30A ac or dc for 0.2s without damage or 0.5 J
300V) flashover
Breaking Capacity
( ≤ 5 A and ≤ 300 V): High frequency disturbance
AC Resistive 1250 VA IEC 60255-22-1 class III
DC Resistive 75 W 2.5kV longitudinal mode
DC Inductive 30 W at L/R ≤ 40ms < 3% deviation
50 W at L/R ≤ 10ms
Minimum number of
1000 at maximum load Electrostatic Discharge
operations
Minimum recommended 0.5 Watt minimum of 10mA or IEC 60255-22-2 class III
load 5V
Mechanical Radio frequency interference

IEC60255-22-3
Fast transient
Vibration response 0.5gn
Vibration endurance 1.0gn
Shock and Bump
repetitive
Conducted RFI
Shock withstand 15gn, 11ms
10 gn, Bump test, 16ms 10gn, 16ms 10 V, 0.15 to 80 MHz ≤ 5% variation
Seismic Conducted Limits

IEC 60255-21-3 Class I IEC 60255-25
Seismic Response 1gn Frequency Range Limits dB(µV)

Quasi-peak Average
Mechanical Classification 0.15 to 0.5 MHz 79 66
0.5 to 30 MHz 73 60
Radiated Limits
Electrical Tests IEC 60255-25
Limits at 10 m
Insulation Frequency Range
IEC 60255-5 rms levels for 1 minute 30 to 230 MHz 40
230 to 10000 MHz 47
earth for 1 minute
Between independent 2.0 kV rms Environmental
Across normally open 1.0 kV rms
Temperature
contacts for 1 minute
IEC 60068-2-1/2
Transient overvoltage
Operating range 10°C to +55°C
IEC 60255-5
Storage range 25°C to +70°C

Humidity
IEC 60068-2-3

RH
Protection Elements
General Accuracy
General IEC 60255-3
Current settings 100% of In
Current input IDMTL: 2 to 30 xIs
DTL: 5 xIs
Frequency 50 Hz
Ambient temperature 20 °C
General Settings
Transient overreach of ≤5%
highset/lowset (X/R =
100)
Disengaging time (see < 42 ms
note)
Overshoot time < 40 ms
Note. Output contacts have a programmable minimum

dwell time, after which the disengaging time is as above.
Temperature
-10 °C to +55 °C ≤ 5 % variation
Frequency
57 Hz to 62 Hz
Operating ≤ 5 % variation Fig 2. Differential Protection Operating Characteristic
time:
Harmonic content The error limits on these diagrams are as follows:
Frequencies to 550 ≤ 5 % variation
Hz Operate Levels
Differential Magnitude – + 10% or + 10mA
Current differential Initial Threshold
Differential Magnitude – Biased threshold +(10% of
Level Biased Threshold Restraint) or + 10mA
Phase setting Phase setting
Phase bias 1 Phase bias 1 (At low levels) For Restraint <1.6ls
Phase bias 2 Phase bias 2 +ve limit – Biased threshold
+ 10% or +10mA
The Magnitude and Angle of the currents are compared in -ve limit – Initial threshold -
separate comparators. Typical operating threshold 10% or -10mA
characteristics are shown below Differential Comparator + 5º
Angle Threshold

Differential and Intertrip operate times are given by:
Circuit breaker failure (50BF)
t = t0 +td
Operate Level
Where Phase Fault setting Is Off, 0.1, 0.15 … 1.0 xln
t0 is the base operating time Earth Fault setting Is Off, 0.1, 0.15 … 1.0 xln
td is the Differential Delay time Accuracy Operate: 100% Is, ±5% or
±1%xIn
The base operating time depends on the communications Reset 95% of IOP ±5% or ±1%xIn
bit rate. Repeatability ± 1%
Operate Times Operate Time

Differential base operate ≤ 40ms (38400 baud) Characteristics DTL
time (ldiff > 10 ls) ≤ 50ms (19200 baud) No. of elements 2
Differential Delay Time + 1% or + 10ms Setting Re-trip 0.00 to 20.00 sec
Back-trip 0.00 to 20.00 sec
Accuracy ± 5ms
Overcurrent protection Repeatability ± 1% or ± 5ms
Characteristic
Setting IEC Normal Inverse (NI)
IEC Very Inverse (VI)
IEC Extremely Inverse (EI)
IEC Long Time Inverse,(LTI )
DTL
No. of elements 1
Level
Setting Range Is 0.1, 0.15…2.5 x In
Accuracy Operate: 105% Is, ±4% or
±1%xIn
Repeatability ± 1%
IDMTL Time Multiplier
Setting 0.025, 0.05…1.6
DTL Delay
Accuracy ± 10ms
Repeatability ± 5 ms
Reset delay
Setting 0 to 60 sec
Accuracy ± 1% or ± 10ms
DTL
No. of elements 3
Level
Setting Range Is 0.1 to 52.5 x In
Accuracy Operate: 100% Is, ±5% or,
±10mA
Repeatability ± 1%
DTL Delay
Accuracy ± 5ms
Earth fault protection

As overcurrent protection.

Signalling Channel
Sample Specification The protection shall use one of the following methods for
signalling.
The feeder protection device shall integrate the following RS485 electrical link using twisted-pair cable
characteristics: Optical-fibre link
Microprocessor device Electrical twisted pair using external modem
Current differential protection Continuous supervision of the protection signalling link
Guard relay shall be provided. The protection shall be capable of
Protection signalling supervision operating with propagation delays in the signalling
Backup overcurrent protection channel varying up to 9.5ms.
1A and 5A current inputs on same device
Trip circuit supervision Trip Circuit Supervision
Circuit breaker fail detection The protection shall monitor the trip circuit when the
circuit breaker is in both the open and closed position.
The current differential protection shall perform Circuit Breaker Fail
magnitude and phase angle comparison of currents, on a The protection shall provide have the ability to issue a
phase-by-phase basis, although tripping shall be three- backtrip in the event of circuit breaker failure, detected by
phase. the continued presence of current, rather than circuit
The protection shall be capable of compensating for breaker auxiliary switch position.
different CTs at each end of the feeder.
The protection shall be stable for through faults at high Indications
fault levels when the line CTs saturate. The protection shall provide indication of the following:
Protection healthy
Backup Overcurrent Protection Intertrip received
The backup three-phase overcurrent protection shall Protection operating
provide an IDMTL element and 3 DTL elements that will Trip
provide back-up protection for the event of a Signalling channel healthy
communications link failure.
Metering
Guard Relays The device shall be capable of displaying the following
It will be possible to add an overcurrent guard to the measurements without user intervention:
differential protection to add security to the scheme. Local and remote end primary currents
Local and remote end secondary currents
Intertripping Differential primary currents
The protection shall provide an intertrip facility capable of
the following, as selected on the relay: Disturbance Recorder
a trip at the local end directly trips the circuit breaker at In the event of a trip the device shall record a disturbance
the remote end, or, record for a minimum of 1 second of the local and remote
a trip at the local end removes the need for a guard end currents, in primary amps.
operation at the remote end, allowing tripping with a
weak infeed.
Two additional intertrip channels shall be provided which
allow external devices to directly trip remote
Testing
Testing facilities shall be provided that allow
a single end to be tested in isolation,
both ends to be tested together to ensure integrity of the
communications link, and,
both ends to be tested together to prove the directionality
of the CTs

Connection Diagram

Case Dimensions
Fig 4. E8 Case

Pilot Modem
OUTLINE, PANEL DRILLING & ON-SITE PILOT WIRE

CONNECTIONS FOR SOLKOR N RS232 MODEM
Fig 5. Pilot Modem

Ordering Information – 7SG18 Solkor-N
Solkor-N 7 S G 1 8 □▲ □▲ - □▲ □▲ □▲ □▲ □▲ - 0 □▲ □▲ 0
Line differential relay using direct | | | | | | | | |
fibre optic or metallic pilot wires Relay type | | | | | | | | |
for communication. Two terminal Line differential 1 | | | | | | | |
plain feeders only. | | | | | | | |
Protection options | | | | | | | |
Basic functionality 1 | | | | | | |
- 3-phase overcurrent (50/51) | | | | | | | |
- Earth-fault overcurrent (50N/51N) | | | | | | | |
- 3-Phase differential (with fixed settings) (87L) | | | | | | | |
- Trip circuit supervision (74TC) | | | | | | | |
- Circuit breaker fail (50BF) | | | | | | | |
- CT supervision | | | | | | | |
- External/Internal intertrip (96) | | | | | | | |
Basic functionality plus 3 | | | | | | |
- Variable differential settings | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
Protection signalling channel type | | | | | | |
RS485 electrical link (1200m) 1 | | | | | |
RS232 electrical to pilotwire link 2) 5 | | | | | |
1300nm optical fibre link (0-16km) 3) 6 | | | | | |
1300nm optical fibre link (49km) 3) 7 | | | | | |
| | | | | |
24/30/48 V DC auxiliary, 30 V DC/AC binary input A | | | | |
24/30/48 V DC auxiliary, 48 V DC/AC binary input B | | | | |
110/220 V DC auxiliary, 48 V DC/AC binary input 1) C | | | | |
110/220 V DC auxiliary, 110 V DC/AC binary input D | | | | |
220 V DC auxiliary, 220 V DC/AC binary input E | | | | |
| | | | |
I/O range | | | | |
1 Binary Inputs / 7 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover) A | | | |
9 Binary Inputs / 7 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover) C | | | |
| | | |
Frequency | | | |
50Hz 1 | | |
| | |
1/ 5 A 0 | |
| |
Housing size | |
|
RS485 interface / IEC 60870-5-103 or Modbus RTU C
for 9 binary inputs and 220 V application, order two resistor boxes 2512H10067 in addition
2) Pilot wire modem (up to 10km) with RS232 interface in BOP mounting case is available for use with these models, order 7XG1210-1AA00-0AA0.
Distance depends upon pilotwire parameters. Pilotwires must be screened twisted pair and two pairs are required for signalling
3) Fibre Optic communication requires a compatible pair of relays at both ends. If ordering for one end only please specify details of the other end, which may need to be upgraded
to be compatible to the new delivery. Upgrade kits available under VCE:2646G10014K (0-16km) and VCE:2646G10010K (49km).

Reyrolle
Protection
Devices
7SG17 Rho 3
Motor Protection Relay
Answers for energy

7SG17 Rho 3
Motor Protection Relay
• Earth fault trip inhibit for contactor control
application
• Status inputs with programmable independent
pickup and drop off timers.
User Interface
Indication

LEDs for TRIP, MOTOR STARTING, MOTOR RUNNING,
STARTER and PROTECTION HEALTHY status.
Description Monitoring Functions

Monitored quantities can be displayed on the LCD screen or via
The 7SG17 Rho 3 is a multi-function numerical Motor
the communications port. Monitored values include:-
Protection relay suitable for all types of a.c. induction
motors up to the highest ratings available.
• Primary/secondary currents
Whilst medium voltage 3-phase motors are very reliable • Motor full load current
and robust, modern designs operate much closer to the • PPS & NPS currents
limits of thermal margins and to give adequate • Thermal equivalent current
protection, sophisticated protection relays are required. In • Phase difference current
addition, increased industrial use of power electronics • Motor status (Stopped, running)
leads to corruption of power systems and unless specific • Time to trip
equipment is installed to eliminate the corruption it can • Time to start
cause considerable rotor overheating. The relay has been • Thermal capacity used
designed to protect the motor against these phenomena • Total starts
as well as known abuses such as mechanical overload, • Last start time
stalling, single phasing, terminal box and cabling failures, • Last start current
and too frequent starts. • Motor run time
The relay can be set to accurately mimic both the heating • Total run time
and cooling characteristics of the protected motor and • Maximum demand/time
consequently ensure that the thermal withstand of the • Output relay status
machine is not exceeded, at the same time allowing full use • Status inputs
of the motors thermal capability. • Trip circuit healthy/failure
• Trip counters
• I2 summation
Function Overview • Time and Date
• Advanced motor protection - for medium voltage

motors
• Easily programmable settings and user interface
• Thermal overload and restart inhibit protection
• Stall and locked rotor protection
• Short circuit and earth fault protection
• Phase unbalance protection
• Undercurrent detection
• Limitation of number of starts
• Optional thermistor or resistance temperature
detector (RTD) inputs
• Circuit breaker fail
• CT supervision

Data Storage and Settings
Communication
Settings
Serial communications conform to IEC60870-5-103 or

Thermal (lθ) 0.5 to 2.0 x In, Δ 0.05
Modbus RTU protocol. Up to 254 relays may be connected
NPS weight (K) 0.0 to 10.0, Δ 0.1
in a ring network and addressed individually.
A fibre-optic communications port is provided on the rear of Heating time (th) 0.5 to 100.0mins, Δ 0.5
the relay. It is optimised for 62.5/125μm glass fibre using ST® Starting constant (ts) 0.5 to 1.5 x th , Δ 0.05
(BFOC/2.5) bayonet connectors. Optionally an RS485 electrical Cooling constant (tc) 1 to 100 x t h , Δ 1
connector can be provided. Hot/cold ratio OFF, 5 to 100%, Δ 5
Start current 1.5 to 10.0 x In, Δ 0.1
Sequence of event records Stop current 0.05 to 0.2 x In, Δ 0.05
Stall delay 1&2 1 to 250 seconds, Δ 1
Up to 500 events are stored and time tagged to 1ms Phase fault 0.5 to 20.0 x In, Δ 0.1
resolution. These are available via the communications. Earth fault 0.01 to 1.00 x In, Δ 0.01
Earth fault inhibit 4.0 to 10.0 x In, Δ 0.1
Fault records Undercurrent 0.10 to 1.5 x In, Δ 0.05
Phase unbalance Phase difference, NPS, OFF
The last 5 fault records are available from the fascia with time Phase difference 0.05 to 0.40 x lθ, Δ 0.05
and date of trip, measured quantities and type of fault. Negative sequence 0.05 to 0.40 x lθ, Δ 0.05
Time multiplier 0.025 to 2.0, Δ 0.025
Minimum op time 0.1 to 2.0 secs, Δ 0.1
Max. number of starts OFF, 1 to 20, Δ 1
Starts period 1 to 60 mins, Δ 1
trigger. Up to 5 fault waveforms may be stored. Start inhibit delay 1 to 60 mins, Δ 1
AC voltage waveforms are stored together with the digital Min. time between starts OFF, 1 to 60 mins, Δ 1
states of the binary inputs and output relays.. Temperature OFF, 0 to 250°C, Δ 1(1)
(optional) 100 to 350W, Δ 1(2)
Reydisp evolution 100 to 1000W, Δ 10(3)
1100 to 30000W, Δ 100(3)
numeric products, providing means for the user to apply (1) Named RTD setting range
settings to the relay, interrogate settings and retrieve stored (2) Other RTD setting range
data records. (3) Thermistor setting range
Reydisp evolution utilises IEC 60870-5-103 protocol.

Technical Data Mechanical
For full technical data refer to the Performance Vibration (Sinusoidal)

Specification of the Technical Manual. IEC 60255-21-1 Class I
Vibration response 0.5gn

Inputs and Outputs Vibration endurance 1.0gn
Characteristic energising quantity Shock and Bump

AC Current Frequency
1A / 5A 50 / 60Hz
Shock withstand 15gn, 11ms
10 gn, Bump test, 16ms 10gn, 16ms
Current Inputs: Burdens
Seismic
5A Phase < 0.2VA
1A Phase < 0.05VA IEC 60255-21-3 Class I
5A Earth < 0.4VA
Seismic Response 1gn
1A Earth < 0.2VA
DC Auxiliary supply

24/30/48V 18 to 60V
110/220V 88 to 280 Weight
Auxiliary supply: Burdens Rho 3 4.7kg

Rho 3+RTD 6.7kg
Quiescent (Typical) 3W
Maximum 10 W
Electrical Tests
DC status input
Nominal voltage Operating range Insulation IEC 255-5

30V 18 - 37.5 V D C RMS levels for 1 minute
48V 37.5 - 60 V D C
110V 87.5 - 137.5 V D C Between all terminals and 2.0 kV
220V 175 - 280 V D C earth for 1 minute
Between independent 2.0 kV
For relays to ES148-4 standard and 110/125 or 220/250 circuits for 1 minute
volt DC working a 48 volt status input is supplied for use Across normally open 1.0 kV
with external dropper resistors: contacts for 1 minute
Nominal Voltage Resistor Value Wattage Transient overvoltage

110V 2k7 ± 5% 2.5 W IEC 255-4 class III
220 V 8k2 ± 5% 6.0 W
5kV 1.2/50µs 0.5J No damage or flashover.
Output relays (terminals and earth)
7 programmable output relays are available, 3 of which
have a c/o contact and the other 4 have a n/o contact. High frequency disturbance
Contact ratings
2.5kV common mode ≤ 3% deviation
Carry continuously 5A AC or DC 1.0kV series mode ≤ 3% deviation
Make and carry 30A AC or DC for 0.2 sec
Resistive break 75W DC, 1250VA A C

IEC 255-22-2 class III Environmental
8kV contact discharge ≤ 5% deviation Temperature
IEC 68-2-1/2
Radio frequency disturbance
IEC 255-22-3 Operating range 10°C to +55°C
Storage range 25°C to +70°C
20MHz to 1GHz, 10V/m ≤ 5% deviation
Humidity
Fast transient IEC 68-2-3
4kV 5/50ns 2.5kHz ≤ 3% deviation RH
repetitive

Case Dimensions
The 7SG17 is supplied in either a size 6 or size 8 case, depending on the binary input, RTD input and output relay
requirement.

Connection Diagram
1A
53
7SG17 - Rho 3
54
5A A
55
56
+ve
1A 13
49
-ve
14
50
5A B 15
51
Case
52 earth Earth Notes:
1A 7
45
BI = Binary Input
46 BO 1 5
BO = Binary Output
5A C 6
47
48 8
1A BO 2 10 Shows contacts internal

25
9
26 Contacts close when the
5A E/F 16 relay chassis is
27
BO 3 18 withdrawn from case
28
17
+ve 11
3
-ve BI 1 BO 4
4 12
19
BO 5
EXPANSION PCB 20 RTD EXPANSION PCB
+ve 21 61
35
BI 2 BO 6 63
36
-ve 22 RTD1
62
+ve 23
33 64
-ve BI 3 BO 7 66
34 24 RTD2
65
31 67
-ve BI 4 69
32 RTD3
68
+ve
29 70
-ve BI 5 72
30 RTD4
71
+ve
43
73
-ve BI 6
44 75
RTD5
74
41
76
-ve BI 7
42 78
RTD6
+ve 77
39
BI 8 79
-ve
40 81
RTD7
+ve 80
37
-ve BI 9 82
38 84
RTD8
83
57
GND.

Ordering Information – 7SG17 Rho 3
RHO 3 7 S G 1 7 □□ - □□□□□ - □□A 0
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
HV motor & thermal protection. | | | | | | | | |
Relay type | | | | | | | | |
Motor Protection 1 | | | | | | | |
Thermal Protection 2 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
Number of elements | | | | | | | |
Four pole relay 4 | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
24/30/48 V DC auxiliary, 30 V binary 0 | | | | | |
input | | | | | |
110/220 V DC auxiliary, 30 V binary 1 | | | | | |
input | | | | | |
24/30/48 V DC auxiliary, 48 V binary 2 | | | | | |
input | | | | | |
110/220 V DC auxiliary, 48 V binary 3 | | | | | |
input 1) | | | | | |
110/220 V DC auxiliary, 110 V low burden binary 4 | | | | | |
input | | | | | |
110/220 V DC auxiliary, 220 V low burden binary 5 | | | | | |
input | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Type of elements (Type of voltage relay) | | | | | |
| | | | | |
3 pole phase-fault and earth-fault E | | | | |
| | | | |
Nominal current inputs | | | | |
1/ 5 A A | | | |
| | | |
I/O range | | | |
1 Binary Input / 7 Binary Outputs 0 | | |
9 Binary Inputs / 7 Binary Outputs 2 | | |
| | |
Fibre optic (ST-connector) / IEC 60870-5-103 or Modbus 1 | |
RTU | |
| |
RTD inputs | |
No RTD inputs 0 D
RTD inputs 1 E
|
Housing size |

Reyrolle
Protection
Devices
7SG26 – Tau
Autoreclose and synchronization
Answers for energy

7SG26 Tau
Reclosing schemes can provide
Built-in check and system synchronising
Autoreclose and synchronization External check and system synchronising
Automatic isolation
System reconfiguration
Additional features are
Pole discrepancy – alarm and trip
Ferro-resonance suppression – through isolation or earthing
VT failure alarm and blocking
Other features provided as standard are
Up to 43 digital inputs and 45 output relays – all fully
programmable
Up to 32 LEDs for annunciation
Built-in logic eliminates the need for external auxiliary relays

Fig 1. Tau relay in size 12 case and associated wiring
Event recording of up to 500 time tagged records
Industry standard IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
Description Fibre optic rear communication ports plus front (fascia
mounted) RS232 port for relay interrogation
The Tau range of auto-reclosing and synchronising relays

cover all requirements for auto-reclosing in single-busbar, Description of Functionality
double busbar, one-and-a-half breaker and mesh
substations, employing single-pole and three-pole switching.
A number of models are available to meet different Autoreclose
requirements. The autoreclose function has been designed to provide a
The Tau auto-reclosing functionality can also be found built rigorous assessment of the system and plant conditions
into Ohmega distance protection and Delta overcurrent before reclosing.
protection relays.
The Tau 100 and 200 series relays provide all the A number of abnormal conditions can be detected by the
functionality required for high-speed single-pole and three- Tau, any of which will halt a reclose sequence:
pole autoreclose for application to a transmission feeder. Pole discrepancy – for circuit breaker, isolators and earth
The Tau 400 and 500 series relays are suitable for switch
transmission and distribution schemes, and provide all the Failed to close – for circuit breaker, isolators and earth
functionality required for delayed automatic reclosure (DAR) switch
of circuit breakers and isolators. These relays are particularly Failed to open – for circuit breaker, isolators and earth
suited to systems with significant banked plant. switch
The relays have been designed to simplify, as much as DBI (don’t believe it) – for circuit breaker, isolators and earth
possible, the intensive process of creating an autoreclose switch
scheme. Clear setting ranges indicate deadtimes, close pulse Close on to fault
and reclaim time delay settings. To assist commissioning, Slow circuit breaker
front fascia instruments indicate the progress through an VT failure
autoreclose sequence. Isolation failure
The communication interface facilitates system operation by Trip relay reset failure
providing access to settings, event records, counters and a
comprehensive command set, enabling remote control and The close pulse will only be issued if the circuit breaker is
fast post fault data retrieval. open, there are no trips present and, on appropriate models,
if the system synchronism conditions are met.
The relay contains scheme logic that allows input functions
Function Overview and output functions to be configured to meet the
requirements of the scheme. This is achieved by a number of
pre-programmed options and features which enable various
The following features are available within the Tau range: sequences, together with appropriate timer mechanisms to
allow effective control of the autoreclose process.
Reclosing options can be selected from
High-speed single-pole The Tau autoreclose relay is connected to the circuit breaker,
High-speed three-pole protection and associated plant. The following features are
High-speed single-pole plus three-pole available (depending upon model):
Multishot delayed three-pole, with up to 4 recloses

Monitoring of the state of the circuit breaker: CB Open, transformer isolator or closing an earth switch. Both of these
Closed and Indeterminate; per phase signals are provided. methods disrupt the resonant primary circuit and damp the
CB single-pole open and three-pole open outputs can be resonance. The Tau 503 provides two logic schemes that
used as inhibits, e.g. for power swing blocking, zone 1 enable this to occur as an integral part of the autoreclose
extension and DEF scheme.
The first scheme (F3) opens then closes the transformer
VT alarms for line and bus side VTs isolator in order to remove the resonance. The second
CB counter alarms scheme (F4) can be used if the isolators cannot break the
Start autoreclose flexibility: from ‘Trip Reset’ or, on Tau resonant voltages, and closes then opens the line earth
100/200, ‘Trip’ or ‘Trip and CB Open’ switch in order to achieve the same result.
Three-pole trip select logic connection is provided to instruct Ferroresonance must be detected with a suitable relay, e.g.
protection to issue trips as three-pole XR309.
CB In Service and CB Memory prevent unwanted recloses if
the circuit breaker is open or de-energised. Autoreclose is
only allowed to proceed if the circuit breaker was in a closed Monitoring
position prior to the fault
Flexible latched or self reset Lockout
Instrumentation
Flexible connection of the CB Auxiliary switches: can be
On models with synchronising analogue, values can be
normally open, normally closed or normally open and
displayed on the LCD screen. In addition these values can be
normally closed
obtained via the IEC 60870-5-103 communications.
Switching autoreclose In/Out can be from switches,
Line and bus voltage magnitudes
communications, keypad or telecontrol pulses
Line and bus frequencies
Close Mode Selection, determining the autoreclose sequence
Phase difference
employed, may be changed by a selector switch
Slip frequency
Status inputs
The interconnection of this equipment allows the Tau to
Output contacts
issue a number of alarms indicating system conditions and
possible problems.
Flag indication
Check synchronising Either 16 or 32 Flag LEDs are provided, which the user can
assign to indicate status. The number of LEDs depends on
Some Tau models provide support for external the case size, see Technical Information
synchronising, others include check and system
synchronising.
When synchronising is included in the Tau, VTs are provided Data storage and
to measure line and bus voltages. The Tau will automatically
determine circuit breaker reclosure conditions: dead line communication
close, dead bar close or check sync close. If one of these
conditions exists and reclosure under this condition has Sequence of event records
been pre-selected by the user, then reclosure will be Up to 500 events are stored and time tagged to 1ms
initiated. resolution. These are available via the communications.
The relay can automatically select check or system
synchronising from measurements of the relative phase CB Close records
angles between line and bus voltages. The relay will prevent Textual records of the last 10 closes are available from the
closure of the circuit breaker if the phase angle, slip Tau fascia with time and date, measured quantities (for
frequency or the voltage magnitudes of the incoming or models with synchronising) and status.
running voltages fall outside prescribed limits. The check
and system synchronise functions have independent Waveform recorder
settings.
Waveform storage provides five 1 second records. Within the
The relay includes split system detection. Following a system
record, the amount of pre-fault storage is configurable. The
split, closure of the circuit breaker can be performed by
recorder is triggered from a close operation.
either system synchronising parameters (typically 10°), or by
In all models, the records contain the digital input and
the Close On Zero function, which takes account of the
output signals. In models with synchronising analogue
circuit breaker close time. Alternatively, lockout may be
waveforms of the line and bus voltages are also recorded.
selected.
Communications
Ferroresonance suppression logic
Two fibre-optic communications ports are provided on the
With certain substation configurations, at extra high voltage
rear of the relay. They are optimised for 62.5/125μm multi-
levels, ferroresonance can cause damage to transformers.
Ferroresonance is usually eliminated by opening the

mode glass-fibre. Connectors are of the BFOC/2.5 (ST®) Tau 100
bayonet type. Support for external synchronising relay
In addition users may interrogate the Tau locally with a Tau 200
laptop PC and the RS232 port on the front of the relay. Integral check and system synchronising
The Tau uses IEC 60870-5-103 as its communications
protocol. Tau 400/500 series
Tau 400/500 series relays provide multi-shot three-pole de-
layed reclosing. The number of recloses before lockout can
be programmed between 1 and 4.
Tau 400
No support for synchronising
Tau 401
Support for external synchronising relay
Tau 500
Integral check and system synchronising
Auto Switching Tau 500 Functionalty

In addition to the following relays in the Tau 500 series also
provide auto-switching functionality for a variety of applica-
tions:
Fig 2. Waveform record in reydisp Evolution
Tau 501
Reydisp Evolution is common to the entire range of numeric Control of feeder disconnector on banked feeder/transformer
products. It provides a means for the user to apply settings connections.
to the Tau, interrogate settings and retrieve waveforms from Limited applications.
the Tau
Tau 502
Model Selection Control of up to four isolators. Typically applied to distribu-
tion systems – mesh substations, 1½ breaker substations
and applications requiring control of isolators or earth
Tau 100/200 series switches on both sides of the circuit breaker. (UK: TPS12/10)
Tau 100/200 series relays provide high-speed single-pole and
three-pole reclosing. They are typically applied to transmis- Tau 503
sion systems and any application where single-pole reclosing Control of up to four isolators, two earth switches and with
is required. ferroresonance suppression logic. Typically applied to mesh
substations, 1½ breaker substations and applications requir-
Eight different sequences are possible, with up to 2 reclose ing control of isolators on both sides of the circuit breaker.
shots followed by lockout: (UK: NGTS3.24.63)
Off
Single-pole Tau 504
Three-pole Control of two isolators on banked connections. Typically
Single-pole, or three-pole feeder and locally banked transformer.
Single-pole followed by three-pole, or three pole
Two single-pole Tau 506
Two three-pole Control of transformer HV isolater for ferroresonance sup-
Two single-pole, or two three-pole, or single-pole followed pression (F3). Transformer LVCB DAR. Typically for trans-
by three-pole former feeders with long overhead lines.
Tau 510
As Tau 500 but with enhanced interface to allow use with
TPS 6/ 10003 synchronising schemes.

Application
When applying Tau relays to reclosing schemes the general requirement is one relay per circuit breaker.
Plain overhead line applications

The Tau 400 has no synchronising support. It is typically applied to radial distribution systems where no synchronising is
required. The Tau 100 and 401 relays (Figure 2) interface with the protection and an external synchronising relay
Fig 3. a & b Tau auto reclose with external synchronising
The Tau 200 and 500 relays (Figure 3) provide a synchronising function that includes dead line close, dead bus close, check
synchronising, system synchronising and close on zero functions.
TRIP TRIP
Protection Protection
E.g. Ohmega 402 E.g. Ohmega 305
distance protection distance protection
1P/3P Multi-shot 3P
Autoreclose and RECLOSE Autoreclose and
RECLOSE
Synchronising Synchronising
Tau 200 Tau 500
Fig 4. a & b Tau auto reclose with integral check and system synchronising
Auto-isolation
The Tau 501 and 504 provide control of isolators for banked plant, and can be used in a variety of auto-isolation schemes,
usually for teed feeders.
The Tau 501 and 504 are typically used when a transformer is teed off a feeder from a single or double busbar (Figure 6).
The Tau 504, being able to control 2 isolators, can be used in situations where the transformer and feeder have isolators.
The Tau 501 is limited to feeder isolator control.

• For a fault on the feeder, if it is an overhead line, the sequence is: trip, reclose; and if another trip occurs, isolate the
line, reclose.
• For a fault on the feeder, if it is a cable, the sequence is: trip, isolate the cable, reclose.
• For a fault on the transformer the circuit breaker trips, the transformer isolator is opened, then the circuit breaker is
closed again. (A separate reclosing relay controls the circuit breaker on the other side of the transformer.)
Fig 6. Auto-isolation for teed feeders – single or double busbar
Switch-and-a-half and mesh substations
The Tau 502 and 503 are applicable to any application where isolators on each side of the circuit breaker must be controlled.
Switch-and-a-half substations and mesh substations are the most common example of these. These relays can control up to
two isolators on each side of the circuit breaker.
In the switch-and-a-half application (Figure 7) Tau 502s can be used with the centre circuit breaker, while Tau 500s are used
for the circuit breakers at the outsides of the diameter. If single-pole switching is required Tau 200s can be used throughout,
however, auto-isolation is not provided in these.
Fig 7. Switch-and-a-half reclosing using TAU 500 and 502
Reclosing in a mesh substation (Figure 8) is similar to a teed feeder, except there is a need for isolator control on both sides
of the circuit breaker. If all breakers are closed prior to a fault, blocking logic creates a priority such that one Tau will ensure
the correct circuits are isolated before closing its circuit breaker, thus releasing the next Tau to do the same. If a circuit
breaker is open prior to a fault, the lower priority Tau will not be blocked, and will carry out the necessary isolation.
The Tau 503 contains logic differences and ferroresonance suppression logic, compared with the Tau 502, making it particu-
larly suited to transmission mesh substations.

Fig 8. Four-switch mesh reclosing using TAU 502 or 503
Application of Tau 502 to single-switch meshes is particularly easy, because the Tau is associated with a circuit breaker,
rather than a mesh corner, as shown in Figure 9.
Fig 9. Single-switch mesh reclosing using TAU 502 or 503
When there are two transformers per corner, one transformer isolator is controlled by each Tau on the adjacent
sides, Figure 10.
Fig 10. Four-switch mesh reclosing with 2 transformers per corner

Nominal voltage Value Wattage
Technical information 110, 125 V 2k7 ± 5% 2.5 W
General accuracy Reference conditions Status input performance
Parameter Reference or value Parameter Value

General IEC 60255-3 Minimum DC current for operation 10 mA
(30/34V and 48/54V inputs only)
Auxiliary Supply Nominal
Frequency 50 / 60 Hz
Typical response time < 5 ms
Ambient Temperature 20 °C
Typical response time when used to < 15 ms
energise an output relay contact
General accuracy
Minimum pulse duration 40 ms
Parameter Value
Each status input has an associated timer that can be
Voltage level ±1% (range 7V to 132V)
programmed to give time delayed pick-up and time de-
Frequency typically ±10mHz
layed drop-off. When set to a minimum of 20ms the
Phase angle typically ±1° status inputs will provide immunity to an AC input signal
and will not respond to the following:
Accuracy influencing factors • 250V RMS 50/60 Hz applied for two seconds
through a 0.1µF capacitor.
Temperature • 500 V RMS 50/60 Hz applied between each ter-
-10 °C to +55 °C ≤ 5% variation minal and earth.
Frequency • Discharge of a 10 µF capacitor charged to
47 Hz to 52 Hz Setting: ≤ 1% variation maximum DC auxiliary supply voltage.
57 Hz to 62 Hz Operate Time: ≤ 1% variation
Phase Angle: ≤ 1% variation
Protection Elements
Characteristic energising quantity
Autoreclose
AC Voltage 63.5 / 110 V rms
Frequency 50 / 60 Hz Level
Deadtime (1P) 0.05s to 100s step 0.05s
Auxiliary energising quantity DC Power supply Deadtime (3P) 0.1s to 100s step 0.1s
Close pulse 0.1s to 20s step 0.1s
Nominal voltage Operating range Reclaim time 1s to 600s step 1s
48, 110 V 37.5 to 137.5 Accuracy setting ±1% or ±10ms
220 V 178.0 to 280.0
Check and system synchronising
DC Status inputs
Live and dead voltage level
Nominal voltage Operating range Dead line/bus 5% to 150% step 5%
30, 34 V 18.0 to 37.5 V dc Live line/bus 10% to 155% step 5%
48, 54 V 37.5 to 60.0 V dc Accuracy Live operate: live setting ± 1%
110, 125 V 87.5 to 137.5V dc Live reset: dead setting ± 1%
220, 250 V 175.0 to 280.0V dc Dead operate: dead setting ± 1%
Dead reset: live setting ± 1%
The status voltage need not be the same as the main Undervoltage level
energising voltage. Setting line/bus 0 to 150% step 5%
Accuracy Operate: Setting ± 1%
Electricity Association ESI48-4 Reset: < 104% operate level
The 30/34V and 48/54V inputs meet the requirements of Voltage difference level
ESI48-4 ESI 1. However, the 110/125V and 220/250V Setting 0 to 100% step 5%
inputs will operate with a DC current of less than 10mA. Accuracy Operate: setting ±2% or ±0.5V
If 110/125V or 220/250V inputs compliant with ESI48-4 Reset: > operate level – 2V
ESI 1 are required, a Tau with 48/54V status can be sup- (typically > 90% operate)
plied with external dropper resistors as follows:
Slip frequency

Setting 0 to 2000mHz step 5mHz 50 W @ L/R ≤ 10 ms
Accuracy Operate: setting –15mHz +0mHz Minimum number of 1000 at maximum load
Reset: operate –0mHz +15mHz operations
Check sync., system sync. phase angle Minimum recom- 0.5 W, limits 10 mA or 5 V
Setting 5 to 90° step 5° mended load
Accuracy Operate: setting –3° +0
Reset: operate –0 +3° Minimum number of 1000 at maximum load
System split phase angle operations
Setting 0 to 175° step 5° Minimum recom- 0.5 W, limits 10 mA or 5 V
Accuracy Operate: setting ±1.5° mended load
Reset: latched
Timer
Setting 0 to 100s step 0.1s
Mechanical
Accuracy setting ±1% or ±10ms
Vibration (Sinusoidal) IEC 60255-21-1 Class 1
Thermal Withstand
Continuous / Limited period 0.5 gn, Vibration response ≤ 5% variation
1.0 gn, Vibration endurance
250 V rms Continuous
Shock and bump IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1
Burdens
AC Voltage inputs 5 gn, Shock response, 11ms
15 gn, Shock withstand, ≤ 5% variation
63.5V ≤ 0.05 VA 11ms
Note: Burden is measured at nominal rating
Auxiliary supply
1 gn, Seismic Response ≤ 5% variation
TAU 100/40x
Quiescent 9W Mechanical classification
Maximum 14 W
TAU 200/50x Durability In excess of 106 operations
Quiescent 11 W
Maximum 14 W
Electrical Tests
Output Contact
Transient overvoltage IEC 60255-5
Contact rating to IEC 60255-0-2.

Between all terminals and earth or 5kV
between any two independent 1.2/50 µs
Carry continuously 5 A AC or DC circuits without damage or flash- 0.5 J
over
Make and carry
(Limits: L/R ≤ 40ms and V ≤ 300 volts) Insulation IEC 60255-5
RMS levels for 1 minute
0.5 sec 20 A AC or DC
0.2 sec 30 A AC or DC Between all terminals and 2.0 kV
earth
Break Between independent cir- 2.0 kV
(Limits: ≤ 5A or ≤ 300 volts) cuits
Across normally open con- 1.0 kV
ac resistive 1250 VA tacts
ac inductive 250 VA @ PF ≤ 0.4
dc resistive 75 W Immunity
dc inductive 30 W @ L/R ≤ 40 ms Auxiliary DC supply IEC 60255-11

Allowable superimposed ac ≤ 12% of dc voltage
component
Allowable breaks/dips in ≤ 20 ms
High frequency disturbance IEC 60255-22-1 Class III
2.5kV, Longitudinal mode ≤ 3% variation

1.0kV, Transverse mode
Electrostatic discharge IEC 60255-22-2 Class III
Fast transient IEC 60255-22-4 Class IV
4kV, 5/50ns, 2.5 kHz, re- ≤ 3% variation

petitive
Radio frequency interference IEC 60255-22-3
Environmental
Operating -10 °C to +55 °C

Humidity IEC 68-2-3
Operational test 56 days at 40 °C and 95% RH

Application
Additional Status Input and Output Relay Options
TA1-XXX-xB TA1-XXX-xD TA1-XXX-xG TA1-XXX-xM

(no additional I/O) total 27 status inputs, total 27 status inputs, total 43 status inputs,
29 output relays (3c/o, 26no) 29 output relays (3c/o, 22no, 4nc) 45 output relays (3c/o, 42no)
total 11 status inputs,
13 output relays (3c/o, 10no)
1
IO2 2 1
IO2 2 1
IO2 2
3 S12 RL14 4 3 S12 RL14 4 3 S12 RL14 4
PSU 4 5 6 5 6 5 6
13 5 7 S13 RL15 8 7 S13 RL15 8 7 S13 RL15 8
RL1
14 6 9 10 9 10 9 10
15 7 11 S14 RL16 12 11 S14 RL16 12 11 S14 RL16 12
8 13 14 13 14 13 14
RL2
9 15 S15 RL17 16 15 S15 RL17 16 15 S15 RL17 16
21 10 17 18 17 18 17 18
RL18 RL18 RL18
23 S1 11 19 S16 20 19 S16 20 19 S16 20
RL3 RL19 RL19 RL19
25 12 21 S17 22 21 S17 22 21 S17 22
27 S2 17 23 24 23 24 23 24
RL20 RL20 RL20
26 RL4 19 25 S18 26 25 S18 26 25 S18 26
RL21 RL21 RL21
28 S3 18 27 S19 28 27 S19 28 27 S19 28
RL5 20
1
IO3 2 1
IO3 2 1
IO3 2
1
IO1 2 3 S20 RL22 4 3 S20 RL22 4 3 S20 RL22 4
3 S4 RL6 4 5 6 5 6 5 6
5 6 7 S21 RL23 8 7 S21 RL23 8 7 S21 RL23 8
7 S5 RL7 8 9 10 9 10 9 10
9 10 11 S22 RL24 12 11 S22 RL24 12 11 S22 RL24 12
11 S6 RL8 12 13 14 13 14 13 14
13 14 15 S23 RL25 16 15 S23 RL25 16 15 S23 RL25 16
15 S7 RL9 16 17 18 17 18 17 18
RL26 RL26 RL26
17 18 19 S24 20 19 S24 20 19 S24 20
RL10 RL27 RL27 RL27
19 S8 20 21 S25 22 21 S25 22 21 S25 22
RL11 23 24
21 S9 22 RL28 23 24 23 24
25 S26 26 RL28 RL28
23 24 RL29 25 S26 26 25 S26 26
RL12 27 S27 28 RL29 RL29
25 S10 26 27 S27 28 27 S27 28
RL13
27 S11 28
2 ISO Rx 1
IO4 2
AN1 FASCIA 3 ISO Tx 3 S28 RL30 4
4 ISORTS 5 6
port 2a 5 ISODTR 7 S29 RL31 8
25pin 6 ISODTR 9 10
female D 7 ISOGND 11 S30 RL32 12
conn. 20 ISODTR 13 14
15 S31 RL33 16
CP IRIG-B 17 18
RL34
U 19
21
S32
S33
RL35
20
22
25 Tx-1
comms ports
26 23 24
Rear F.O.
RL36
Rx-1 25 S34 26
RL37
27 S35 28
27 Tx-2b
28
1
IO5 2
Rx-2b
3 S36 RL38 4
5 6
7 S37 RL39 8
Module AN1 is only provided 9 10
on TA1-200 and 50x models 11 S38 RL40 12
13 14
15 S39 RL41 16
17 18
RL42
19 S40 20
RL43
21 S41 22
23 24
RL44
25 S42 26
RL45
27 S43 28
TAU series 100, 40x 200, 50x 503

I/O options B,C,H D,G B C,D,G,H M
Case Size E8 E12 E8 E12 E16
A PSU PSU PSU PSU PSU
B IO1 IO1 IO1 IO1 IO1
Module position
C IO2 IO2 AN1 IO2 IO2

D CPU IO3 CPU IO3 IO3
E Spare AN1 IO4
F CPU CPU IO5
G ANI
H CPU
The amount of I/O together with the TAU series (100, 200, 40x, 50x) will determine the required case size – see the table to
the left.
Modules in italic (IO2, IO3) are options.

Case Dimensions
The Tau is supplied in either a size 8, 12 or 16 case, see below.
Fig 11. Size 8 Case
Fig 12. Size 12 Case
Fig 13. Size 16 Case

Ordering Information - TAU 7SG26
TAU (100 series) 7 S G 2 6 □□ - 0 □□□ 0 - □□□ 0

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Autoreclose relay without | | | | | | | |
check synchronising. | | | | | | | |
Relay type | | | | | | | |
1 | | | | | | |
100 series - High speed reclosing with external sync
input
| | | | | | |
Standard functionality
| | | | | | |
Reclose type
| | | | | | |
- Low/high-speed single-pole .
| | | | | | |
- Low/high-speed three-pole reclose
| | | | | | |
Reclosing schemes
| | | | | | |
- External synchronising input
| | | | | | |
Auxiliary functions
| | | | | | |
- Pole discrepancy
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
Functionality | | | | | | |
Model 100 - Standard functionality 0 | | | | | |
| | | | | |
48/110 V DC auxiliary, 30 V DC binary input C | | | | |
48/110 V DC auxiliary, 48 V DC binary input 1) D | | | | |
48/110 V DC auxiliary, 110 V DC low burden binary input E | | | | |
220 V DC auxiliary, 110 V DC low burden binary input F | | | | |
220 V DC auxiliary, 220 V DC low burden binary input G | | | | |
| | | | |
I/O range | | | | |
27 Binary Inputs / 13 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover) H | | | |
| | | |
Frequency | | | |
Not applicable 0 | | |
| | |
Not applicable 0 | |
| |
Housing size | |
|
2512H10064 (9 inputs, 110V)
2512H10065 (5 inputs, 110V)
2512H10066 (1 inputs, 110V)
2512H10067 (5 inputs, 220V)
2512H10068 (1 inputs, 220V)

TAU (200 series) 7 S G 2 6 □□ - 0 □□□ 0 - □□□ 0

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Autoreclose relay with | | | | | | | |
Relay type | | | | | | | |
200 series - High speed reclosing with check and 2 | | | | | | |
system synchronising | | | | | | |
Standard functionality | | | | | | |
Reclose type | | | | | | |
- Low/high-speed single-pole reclose | | | | | | |
- Low/high-speed three-pole reclose | | | | | | |
Reclosing schemes | | | | | | |
- Check and system synchronising | | | | | | |
Auxiliary functions | | | | | | |
- Pole discrepancy | | | | | | |
- VT failure alarm (and blocking) | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
| | | | | |
| | | | |
I/O range | | | | |
27 Binary Inputs / 13 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover) H | | | |
| | | |
Frequency | | | |
50Hz 1 | | |
60Hz 2 | | |
| | |
63.5/110 V AC 1 | |
| |
Housing size | |
|
2512H10064 (9 inputs, 110V)
2512H10065 (5 inputs, 110V)
2512H10066 (1 inputs, 110V)
2512H10067 (5 inputs, 220V)
2512H10068 (1 inputs, 220V)

TAU (400 series) 7 S G 2 6 □□ - 0 □□□ 0 - □□□ 0

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Autoreclose relay without | | | | | | | |
Relay type | | | | | | | |
400 series - Delayed autoreclose 4 | | | | | | |
Standard functionality
| | | | | | |
Reclose type
| | | | | | |
- Multi-shot delayed three-pole reclose
| | | | | | |
Auxiliary functions
| | | | | | |
- Pole discrepancy
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
Model 401 - Standard functionality plus 1 | | | | | |
Reclosing schemes | | | | | |
- External synchronising input | | | | | |
| | | | | |
| | | | |
I/O range | | | | |
11 Binary Inputs / 13 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover) B | | | |
| | | |
Frequency | | | |
Not applicable 0 | | |
| | |
| |
Housing size | |
|
2512H10064 (9 inputs, 110V)
2512H10065 (5 inputs, 110V)
2512H10066 (1 inputs, 110V)
2512H10067 (5 inputs, 220V)
2512H10068 (1 inputs, 220V)

TAU (500 series) 7 S G 2 6 □□ - 0 □□□ 0 - □□□ 0

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Autoreclose relay with | | | | | | | |
Relay type | | | | | | | |
500 series - Multi-shot autoreclose with check and 5 | | | | | | |
system synchronising | | | | | | |
Standard functionality | | | | | | |
Reclose type | | | | | | |
- Multi-shot delayed three-pole reclose | | | | | | |
- Check and system synchronising | | | | | | |
- Pole discrepancy | | | | | | |
- VT failure alarm (and blocking) | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
Model 500 - Standard functionality 0 | B | | E |
- ‘J’ unit equivalent | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
Model 502 - Standard functionality plus 2 | G | |G |
- 4 isolator control for sub-transmission mesh | | | | | | |
- TPS 12/10 equivalent | | | | | | |
Only supplied as part of engineered system 2) | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
Model 503 - Standard functionality plus 3 |M| | J |
- 4 isolator control for transmission mesh | | | | | | |
- Earth switch/transformer isolator | | | | | | |
Ferro-resonance suppression | | | | | | |
- NGTS 3.24 scheme | | | | | | |
Only supplied as part of engineered system 2) | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
Model 504 - Standard functionality plus 4 | D | |G |
- 2 isolator control for Teed feed | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
Model 506 - Standard functionality plus 6 | B | | E |
- Transformer isolator control | | | | | | |
- Ferro-resonance suppression | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
Model 510 - Standard functionality plus 7 | D | |G |
but with revised connections for use with traditional | | | | | |
synchronising and control schemes | | | | | |
| | | | | |
| | | | |
Continued Over

TAU (500 series) 7 S G 2 6 □□ - 0 □ □▲ □▲ 0 - □▲ □▲ □▲ 0

I/O range | | | | |
11 Binary Inputs / 13 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover) B | | | |
27 Binary Inputs / 29 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover) D | | | |
27 Binary Inputs / 29 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover, G | | | |
4 normally closed) | | | | |
43 Binary Inputs / 45 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover) M | | | |
| | | |
Frequency | | | |
50Hz 1 | | |
60Hz 2 | | |
| | |
63.5/110 V AC 1 | |
| |
Housing size | |
|
2512H10064 (9 inputs, 110V)
2512H10065 (5 inputs, 110V)
2512H10066 (1 inputs, 110V)
2512H10067 (5 inputs, 220V)
2512H10068 (1 inputs, 220V)
2) Solutions for mesh corner autoreclose are available as engineered schemes and price supplied on request

Reyrolle
Protection
Devices
7SG22 - Iota
Input/Output Units with Logic Programming
Answers for energy

7SG22 - Iota
Input/Output Units with Logic Programming
Features
• Fully programmable scheme logic using
Reylogic
• Programmable alarm/indication LEDs with text
legend
• Analogue measurements
• Flexible number of inputs and outputs
• Fault, event and waveform recorder
Fig 1. 7SG22 • IEC60870-5-103/MODBUS fibre optic
communications
• Front RS232 communication port
Introduction •
•
IRIG-B time synchronisation input
Continuous self monitoring
The Iota range of Common Services Modules are

programmable logic controllers designed for
general application within the substation Description
environment. Typical applications include direct
replacement for hardwired relay logic schemes.
PLCs developed for the industrial market typically Reylogic
require additional external protection to ensure Reylogic is a Windows based schematic capture
reliable operation in the electrically hostile program used for creating configuration logic
substation environment. Siemens Protection diagrams for use in Iota. The inputs and outputs
Devices Ltd has a long history of designing modular may be interconnected with up to 64 timers, 64
protection and control relays which can withstand counters and 64 latches along with combinational
the environmental extremes that an electricity logic consisting of AND, OR and NOT gates limited
substation must endure and this unit is constructed only by the choice of scan rate for the logic. The
using modules already proven in this environment. default scan rate is 2.5 milliseconds but this may be
adjusted to accommodate more complex logic
The relay consists of a combination of status inputs, schemes.
output relays, current and voltage level detector
modules which can be interconnected using logical The logical elements are simply dragged and
elements such as AND, OR, NOT gates, pickup/drop- dropped onto the drawing page and
off timers, counters and latches to fulfil many interconnections formed by dragging a connection
operational interlocking requirements. wire from the output of an element to the input of
another. This greatly simplifies scheme
The Iota can accommodate a total of 59 input and configuration over other techniques such as ladder
61 output points consisting of a combination of logic used in industrial grade PLCs.
status inputs together with output relays. The basic
models have 3 status inputs and 5 output relays on All timers and counters, drawn on a logic diagram
the power supply module. Additional Input and and set to be visible, appear in the setting lists
output modules can be added to the relay. The accessible via the front fascia to allow on-site
maximum number is only limited by available empty modifications without having to use a PC to modify
module slots in the case. the logic diagrams. All Boolean points marked as
external inputs on the schematic package appear in
16/32 user defined LEDs are also available to the the settings list with a matrix setting which allows
logic schemes for local indication of functions. any combination of output relays and fascia flags to
be selected.
The voltage modules and current modules have 4 Latches and counters can be configured to retain
analogue channels. Each channel has a settable pick their state if the power supply is interrupted.
up level & time delay and its output is fed into the
logic as an input. The measured values can be Fascia unit
displayed in the instruments and are available via The Iota has a user friendly HMI interface which
the IEC communications in a measurand. allows simple modifications to timer and counter
settings as well as simple reconfiguration of the
allocation of inputs and outputs.

The input and output points are fully programmable
to allow easy modification. In addition all Boolean Support Software
outputs are available in the menus and can be
configured to give indications on the LED front Reydisp Evolution
panel. LEDs can be selected to be hand or self reset.
Measurement and Trending

Analogue values can be displayed in primary or
secondary quantities on the LCD screen via the
Instruments Menu. In addition the values can be
obtained via the IEC60870-5-103 communications.
The IEC events can be edited to report any output

Boolean state as an event.
The IEC command files can also be edited to allow

remote operation of the input Booleans in the logic
diagram.
Real time measurements

• Primary and Secondary currents
• Primary and Secondary voltages
• Status inputs
• Output contacts
System Data Fig 2. Typical Reydisp Evolution screenshot
Reydisp Evolution provides the means for the user to

Sequence of Event records apply setting to the Iota, interrogate settings and
Up to 500 events are stored and time tagged to 1ms retrieve disturbance waveforms from the relay.
resolution. These are available via the
communications. Reylogic toolbox
Fault records
The last 10 fault records are available from the Iota
fascia along with time and date of operation.
The Waveform Recorder may be triggered from a
logic Boolean or an external input and has a
configurable pre-fault trigger. Up to 10 seconds of
fault waveforms may be stored with associated
analogue and digital values. This is user
configurable as ten 1-second records, five 2-
second records, two 5-second records or one 10-
second record. Fig 3. Example Reylogic screenshot
The IEC60870-5-103 protocol allows remote Reylogic allows users to design their own logic
operators to control plant and receive indication and schemes and apply them to the relay. The design is
metering information. built from simple building blocks of combinational
logic (and, or, exclusive or) and sequential logic
Fibre-optic communications ports are provided on (timers, counters and latches). These are dropped
the rear of the relay and will be optimised for onto the page and wired to form the scheme.
62.5/125μmm glass-fibre using BFOC/2.5 (ST®)
bayonet-style connectors as standard. When the design is complete it can be tested offline
by simulation in the Reylogic package. The test files
In addition users may interrogate the Iota locally and results can be stored as a record of the tests and
with a laptop PC via the RS232 port on the front of for future repeatability.
the relay. The Reydisp Evolution software described
as follows allows the user to do this.

The logic diagram along with IEC event and Each status input has an associated timer that can be
command configuration files are built into a project programmed to give time delayed pick-up. When a
which can be downloaded to the Iota. The logical 20ms pick-up setting value is applied the status
inputs and outputs of the scheme can then be inputs will not respond to the following:
assigned to physical inputs and outputs in the Iota in • 250V RMS 50/60 Hz applied for two
the settings file via Reydisp or fascia. seconds through a 0.1μF capacitor.
• 500V RMS 50/60 Hz applied between
each terminal and earth.
Technical Information • Discharge of a 10μF capacitor charged to
maximum DC auxiliary supply voltage.
Performance data to IEC 60255-3
Indication
Characteristic energising quantities
Relay Healthy
AC Current 1, 5A Method Green LED
AC Voltage 63.5V line-neutral Healthy Steady
110V line-line 50Hz Failure Flashing or extinguished
Indication
Auxiliary Energising Quantity Method 16/32 Programmable RED
DC power supply LEDs
Settings and Instrumentation
Nominal Voltage Operating range VDC Method Backlit LCD
48, 110V 37.5 to 137.5
220V 176.0 to 280.0
DC status inputs
Nominal Voltage Operating range VDC

30, 34V 18.0 to 37.5
48, 54V 37.5 to 60.0
110, 125V 87.5 to 137.5
220, 1250V 175.0 to 280.0
The status voltage need not be the same as the main

energising voltage.
Electricity Association ESI48-4
The 30/34V and 48/54V inputs meet the

requirements of ESI48-4 ESI 1. However, the
110/125V and 220/250V inputs will operate with a
DC current of less than 10mA. If 110/125V or
220/250V inputs compliant with ESI48-4 ESI 1 are
required, an Iota with 48/54V status can be supplied
with external dropper resistors as follows:
Nominal Resistor Wattage

Voltage Value
110, 125V 2k7 ± 5% 2.5W
220, 250V 8k2 ± 5% 6.0W
Status Input Performance
Parameter Value
Minimum DC current for operation 10mA
(30/34V and 48/54V inputs only)
Reset/Operate Voltage Ratio ≥ 90%
Typical response time < 5ms
Typical response time when used to <15ms
Minimum pulse duration 40ms

Sub-station Communications Burdens
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103/MODBUS Measuring Inputs

RS-232 interface AC Current Inputs
Location Fascia 5A Phase/Earth ≤0.2 VA ≤0.01 Ω
Form 25-pin female D-type connector 1A Phase/Earth ≤0.05 VA ≤0.05 Ω
Fibre interface AC Voltage Inputs ≤0.01 VA
Location Rear
Quantity 2 x Rx, 2 x Tx
Form BFOC/2.5 (ST®) bayonet connector Auxiliary supply
COM1
Baud rate 75-115200 baud Quiescent (Typical) 13W
Interface Fibre-optic port Maximum 25W
COM2
Baud rate 75-115200 baud Burdens are measured at nominal rating.
Interface Auto-switches between Fibre-
optic and RS-232 ports
Output Contacts
General Accuracy Contact rating IEC 60255-23
Reference conditions Carry Continuously 5A AC or DC

Make and Carry (L/R ≤40ms and V≤300
General IEC 60255 volts)
Current Settings 100% of In 0.5 seconds 20A AC or DC
Auxiliary supply Nominal 0.2 seconds 30A AC or DC
Frequency 50Hz Break (I≤5A and V≤300 volts)
Ambient temperature 20 °C ac resistive 1250VA
ac inductive 250VA @ PF ≤0.4
General settings dc resistive 75W
dc inductive 30W @ L/R ≤40ms
Parameter Value 50W @ L/R ≤10ms
Transient Overreach of < 42ms
Disengaging Time (1) Number of Operations
(1)Output contacts have a minimum dwell time of 100ms,
after which the disengage time is as above.
Minimum number of 1000 at maximum load
operations
Temperature Recommended load
-10 °C to +55 °C ≤ 5% variation Minimum 0.5W, limits 10mA or 5V

recommended load
Thermal Withstand
AC Current Inputs
Environmental
continuous Phase 3.0 xln
10 minutes 3.5 xln Temperature IEC 68-2-1/2
5 minutes 4.0 xln
2 minutes 6.0 xln Operating -10 °C to +55 °C
1 second 5A 400 A Storage -25 °C to +70 °C
Phase/Earth
1A 100 A Humidity IEC 68-2-3
Phase/Earth
5A 2500 A Operational test 56 days at 40 °C and
Phase/Earth 95% RH
1 cycle 1A 700 A
Phase/Earth
AC Voltage Inputs
continuous 3.5 xVn

Transient Over voltage IEC 60255-5 5 gn, Shock ≤ 5% variation
response, 11ms
Between all terminals and earth or 5kV 15 gn, Shock
between any two independent 1.2/50μs withstand,
circuits without damage or flashover 0.5J 11ms
10 gn, Bump test,
Insulation IEC 60255-5 16ms
RMS levels for 1 minute 1 gn, Seismic ≤ 5% variation
Between all terminals and earth 2.0 kV Response
Between independent circuits 2.0 kV Mechanical Classification
Across normally open contacts 1.0 kV Durability In excess of 106 operations
Immunity
Auxiliary DC Supply IEC 60255-11

Allowable superimposed ≤ 12% of dc voltage
ac component
Allowable breaks/dips in ≤ 20ms
High Frequency Disturbance IEC 60255-22-1
Class III
2.5kV, Longitudinal mode ≤ 3% variation
Electrostatic Discharge IEC 60255-22-2 Class III
Radio Frequency Interference IEC 60255-22-3
Fast Transient IEC 60255-22-4 Class IV
repetitive
Conducted RFI IEC 60255-22-6
10V, 0.15 to 80 MHz ≤ 5% variation
Emissions
Conducted limits IEC 60255-25

Frequency Limits dB(mV)
Range
Quasi-peak Average
0.15 to 79 66
0.MHz
0.5 to 30 73 60
MHz
Radiated limits IEC 60255-25
Frequency Range Limits at 10m
Quasi-peak, dB(μV/m)
30 to 230 MHz 40
230 to 10000 MHz 47
Mechanical
Vibration (Sinusoidal) IEC 60255-21-1 Class 1

0.5 gn, Vibration ≤ 5% variation
response
1.0 gn, Vibration
endurance
Shock and Bump IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1

Case Dimensions
The Iota is supplied in either a size E8, size E12 or
size E16 case depending on the number of
analogue input sets and the status input and
output requirement
All dimensions are in Millimetres
Fig 4. Epsilon E8 Case
Fig 5. Epsilon E12 Case
Fig 6. Epsilon E16 case

Typical Connection Diagram
Fig 7. Typical connection diagram

Ordering Information - Iota 7SG22
IOTA (100 series) 7 S G 2 2 □▲ □▲ - 0 □▲ □▲ □▲ □▲ - □▲ □▲ □▲ 0

Input/output units. | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Relay type | | | | | | | | |
100 series – Input/Output Units 1 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
Functionality | | | | | | | |
Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs, 2 module positions for 0 | | 0 | 0 | |
additional I/O | | | | | | | |
Binary Inputs, Binary Outputs and 4 Voltage Inputs, 1 1 | | | | 1 | |
module positions for additional I/O | | | | | | | |
Binary Inputs, Binary Outputs and 4 Current Inputs, 1 2 | | | | 0 | |
module positions for additional I/O | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
48/110 V DC auxiliary, 110 V DC binary input E | | | | | |
220 V DC auxiliary, 110 V DC binary input F | | | | | |
220 V DC auxiliary, 220 V DC binary input G | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Additional I/O Modules 2) | | | | | |
3 Binary Inputs / 5 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover), basic I/O A | | | | |
11 Binary Inputs / 13 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover), 1 module B | | | | |
19 Binary Inputs / 21 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover), 2 modules C | | | | |
27 Binary Inputs / 13 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover), 2 modules H | | | | |
| | | | |
Frequency | | | | |
Not applicable 0 | | | |
50Hz 1 | | | |
60Hz 2 | | | |
| | | |
1/ 5 A 0 | | |
| | |
63.5/110 V AC 1 | |
| |
Housing size | |
|
1) These binary inputs may be used from 110/125V & 220/250V via external dropper resistors, order combination of the following resistor boxes to suit number of binary inputs.
2512H10064 (9 inputs, 110/125V)
2512H10065 (5 inputs, 110/125V)
2512H10066 (1 inputs, 110/125V)
2512H10067 (5 inputs, 220/250V)
2512H10068 (1 inputs, 220/250V)
2) Additional input/output modules must not exceed available module positions.

IOTA 7SG

IOTA (200 series) 7 S G 2 2 □□ - 0 □□□□ - □□□ 0

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
| | | | | | | | |
Relay type | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs, 4 module positions for additional I/O 0 | | 0 | 0 | |
Binary Inputs, Binary Outputs and 4 Current Inputs, 3 module 1 | | | | 1 | |
positions for additional I/O | | | | | | | |
Binary Inputs, Binary Outputs and 4 Current Inputs, 3 module 2 | | 0 | 0 | |
Binary Inputs, Binary Outputs, 4 Current and 4 Voltage Inputs, 2 3 | | | | 1 | |
module positions for additional I/O | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
| | | | | |
3 Binary Inputs / 5 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover), basic I/O A | | | | |
11 Binary Inputs / 13 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover), 1 module B | | | | |
27 Binary Inputs / 29 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover), 3 modules D | | | | |
G | | | | |
27 Binary Inputs / 29 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover and 4 N/C), 3 modules | | | | |
35 Binary Inputs / 37 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover), 4 modules L | | | | |
35 Binary Inputs / 37 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover and 4 N/C), 4 modules V | | | | |
| | | | |
Frequency | | | | |
50Hz 1 | | | |
60Hz 2 | | | |
| | | |
1/ 5 A 0 | | |
| | |
63.5/110 V AC 1 | |
| |
Housing size | |
|
1) These binary inputs may be used from 110/125V & 220/250V via external dropper resistors, order combination of the following resistor
boxes to suit number of binary inputs.
2512H10064 (9 inputs, 110/125V) 2512H10067 (5 inputs, 220/250V
2512H10065 (5 inputs, 110/125V) 2512H10068 (1 inputs, 220/250V)
2512H10066 (1 inputs, 110/125V)

IOTA (300 series) 7 S G 2 2 □▲ □▲ - 0 □▲ □▲ □▲ □▲ - □▲ □▲ □▲ 0

Relay type | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs, 6 module positions for additional I/O 0 | | 0 | 0 | |
Binary Inputs, Binary Outputs and 4 Voltage Inputs, 5 module 1 | | | | 1 | |
Binary Inputs, Binary Outputs and 4 Current Inputs, 5 module 2 | | 0 | 0 | |
Binary Inputs, Binary Outputs, 4 Current and 4 Voltage Inputs, 4 module 3 | | | | 1 | |
positions for additional I/O | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
| | | | | |
27 Binary Inputs / 29 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover), 3 modules D | | | | |
27 Binary Inputs / 29 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover and 4 N/C), 3 modules G | | | | |
35 Binary Inputs / 37 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover), 4 modules L | | | | |
43 Binary Inputs / 45 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover), 5 modules M | | | | |
43 Binary Inputs / 45 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover AND 4 N/C), 5 modules M | | | | |
51 Binary Inputs / 53 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover), 6 modules P | | | | |
59 Binary Inputs / 45 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover), 6 modules U | | | | |
35 Binary Inputs / 37 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover and 4 N/C), 4 modules V | | | | |
| | | | |
Frequency | | | | |
50Hz 1 | | | |
60Hz 2 | | | |
| | | |
1/ 5 A 0 | | |
| | |
63.5/110 V AC 1 | |
| |
Housing size | |
|
1) These binary inputs may be used from 110/125V & 220/250V via external dropper resistors, order combination of the following resistor boxes to suit number of binary inputs.
2512H10064 (9 inputs, 110/125V)
2512H10065 (5 inputs, 110/125V)
2512H10066 (1 inputs, 110/125V)
2512H10067 (5 inputs, 220/250V)
2512H10068 (1 inputs, 220/250V)

Reyrolle
Protection
Devices
7SG23 - MSCDN
Capacitor Bank Protection
Answers for energy

7SG23 - MSCDN
Capacitor Bank Protection
Self Monitoring
The relay incorporates a number of self-monitoring features.
Each of these features can initiate a controlled reset recov-
ery sequence, which can be used to generate an alarm out-
put. In addition, the Protection Healthy LED will give visual
indication.
A watchdog timer continuously monitors the microproces-

sor. The voltage rails are also continuously supervised and
the microprocessor is reset if any of the rails falls outside of
their working ranges. Any failure is detected in sufficient
time so that the micro can be shut down in a safe and con-
trolled manner.
Description
Capacitor banks require a varied range of protection devices
to monitor the system. Traditional solutions use many dif-
ferent relay types most of which were designed for other RMS capacitor bank currents (primary, secondary and relay)
purposes. The MSCDN-MP has a unique range of purpose RMS overall differential currents (secondary and relay)
designed functions to cover all of the protection require- RMS capacitor spill currents (primary, secondary and relays)
ments in three multi-functional boxes: RMS Phase unbalance currents (primary, secondary and
relay)
MSCDN-MP1 System voltage (Primary, secondary)
MSCDN-MP2a Digital input status
MSCDN-MP2b Output relay
Time & Date
Function Overview
Application
MSCDN-MP*
The MSCDN range represents an integration of the protec-
Analogue Inputs tion elements required to provide a single box Main 1 and
Current & Voltage signals are sampled at 32 samples per Main 2 protection of EHV capacitor banks.
cycle which provides accurate measurements up to 750Hz Applications covered include overall differential protection,
(15th Harmonic). capacitor unbalance protection additional phase unbalance
backup protection, true RMS phase by phase resistor thermal
Output Relays overload protection, resistor open circuit protection, true
RMS phase-by-phase reactor thermal overload protection,
All the output relays are capable of handling circuit breaker
backup overcurrent and earth faults protection and over-
tripping duty. All relays are fully user configurable and can
voltage protection.
be programmed to operate from any or all of the control
functions. In normal operation output relays remain ener-
gised for a minimum of 100ms and a maximum dependent
on the energising condition duration. However outputs can M P1
be programmed as latching relays.
Status Inputs C1 M P2b
The Status Inputs can be programmed to be used for any R1 R2

function, a timer is associated with each input and a pickup C2
time setting may be applied. Each input can also be logically M P2 a
inverted and each input may be mapped to the fascia LED’s
or any output relay contact. Status inputs can be used to
give a trip circuit supervision scheme.
B a ck u p O /C
Fascia LED’s
There are 32 user programmable LED flag indicators on the
front fascia of each relay. The user can customise which LED
is used for which purpose as well as being able to program
each LED as being latching or self-resetting. Fig 1. Typical application for the MSCDN range

Function Diagram – 7SG231
MSCDN-MP1
Ov erall Differential and C apacitor Unbalance Protection
87- 1 Ia
A N1C1 - C3 87/50 87/5 0
R 87- 1 Ib
- 1-1 - 1-2
87- 1 Ic
87- 2 Ia
A N2 C1 - C3 87/50 87/5 0
R 87- 2 Ib
- 2-1 - 2-2
87- 2 Ic
Ia
A N1C4,A N2C4,A N3C4
Ib 5 0N
Ic
R EF ER ENC E
C 1 Ia SP IL L
C1 AN3 C1 - C3 C1 C1 C1
C 1 Ib C ORR E
CTIO N 50-1 50 -2 50- 3
C 1 Ic
R1 R2
C 2 Ia SPI LL
C2 AN4C1 - C3 C2 C2 C2
C 2 Ib C OR R E
C TI ON 50-1 50 -2 50- 3
C 2 Ic
Fig 2. MSCDN MP1 Overview
Overall Differential (87/50) Capacitor bank current. This expected spill current is then
The overall differential protection uses the high imped- compared with the measured phase spill current and this
ance circulating principle. The protection consists of two difference is the operating quantity for the two DTL ele-
DTL over-current 87/50-1 and CT-1, 87/50-1 is set for ments available per unit.
tripping and the CT-1 element is utilised for CT supervi-
sion. The protection is duplicated for dependability, with Each DTL element is phase segregated, but utilises a
elements 87/50-2 and CT-2 available for this purpose. common operate setting.
Capacitor Unbalance Protection (C1 50 and C2 50) Phase Unbalance Protection (50N)
The relay contains two identical Capacitor Unbalance The operating quantity for the 50N element, is calculated
protection units, which are primarily designed to protect from the RMS residual of the three phase currents, which
phase segregated capacitor stacks, with a central ‘H’ con- is then connected to a DTL overcurrent element.
nection, although application to alternative stack ar-
rangements is possible. Thus providing complete capaci- Trip circuit supervision
tor unbalance protection for main and auxiliary capacitor Status inputs on the relay can be used to supervise trip
stacks. circuits while the associated circuit breakers (CB) are
either open or closed. Since the status inputs can be
For each unit, expected capacitive spill current for each programmed to operate output contacts and LED’s alarm
phase is calculated, based on a proportion of the overall can be also generated from this feature

C1
M S C D N -M P 2 A
T h e r m a l O v e rl o a d a n d O p e n C ir c u it
R1 R2 P ro te c t io n
C2
A N 1 C1 - C3 R1
49
50
A N 2 C1 - C3 R2
49
Fig 3. MSCDN MP2A Overview
k = Multiplier resulting in the overload pickup setting

Resistor R1 and R2 Thermal Overload (R1 49, R2 49)
k.I B
The relay provides thermal overload protection for R1 and
R2. The elements, one per phase, use 32 samples/cycle to I = The measured resistor current
provide a flat frequency response up to 550Hz and be- τ = Thermal time constant
yond. Additionally, an alarm can be given if the thermal state of
The temperature of the protected equipment is not the system exceeds a specified percentage of the pro-
measured directly. Instead, thermal overload condition tected equipment’s thermal capacity (Capacity alarm)
are detected by calculating the RMS of the current flow-
ing in each phase of the resistor. Resistor R1 and R2 Open Circuit 50OC
Should the RMS current rise above a defined level (the The resistor open circuit protection works by comparing
overload setting) for a defined time (the operating time the current in resistor R1 and resistor R2 on a phase-by-
t), the system will be tripped to prevent damage. phase basis. Because the resistors are the same value
then the current through each resistor should be equal.
An instantaneous/time delayed overcurrent element
⎧ I 2 − I P2 ⎫
t = τ * In⎨ 2 ⎬ monitors the difference between the currents on a
⎩ I − (k * I B ) ⎭ phase-by-phase basis. If the element operates then the
resistor, which has the lowest current, is indicated on the
Fascia LEDs. For an open circuit condition then this will
Where
be the faulty resistor. However if there has been a short
I P = Previous steady state current level circuit in a resistor then this will not be true. The wave-
I B = Basic current of resistor, typically the same as In form records should be downloaded to confirm the actual
fault condition that has occurred.

MSCDN-MP2B
Reactor Thermal Overload, Backup Overcurrent and Earth
Fault, Under and Overvoltage Protection plus VT
Supervision
AN3C4
Vx 27
Ia
AN2C1 - C3
Ib 50 50N 51 51N
Ic
VTS
Va
C1 Vb
Vc
AN3C1 - C3
59DT 59IT
R1 R2
C2
L Ia
AN1C1 - C3
L Ib 49
L Ic
Fig 4. MSCDN MP2B Overview
Backup Overcurrent and Derived earth fault Protec- Inverse Time Overvoltage Protection
tions 50/50N/51/51N The relay provides true RMS measuring three-phase defi-
The relay provide true RMS backup overcurrent and earth nite time over voltage protection. The inverse curve is
fault protection for the capacitor bank. The elements, specified using a 7 point user defined curve. The ele-
one per phase, use 32 samples/cycle to provide a flat ments one per phase, use 32 samples per cycle to pro-
frequency response up to 550Hz and beyond. vide a flat frequency response up to 550Hz and beyond.
Undervoltage Detector 27 VT Supervision

The relay provides true RMS measuring single-phase The VTS function is performed using an undervoltage
definite time under voltage detector. A guard element element (27VTS) and a current check element (50VTS)
may be enabled to prevent the under voltage element on a phase by phase basis. Each element is usually set
from operating when there is a complete loss of voltage. instantaneous. Fuse failure operates if both the current
check element (50VTS) and the undervoltage element
Definite Time Overvoltage Protection 59DT (27VTS) is picked up for the VTS delay setting period,
The relay provides true RMS measuring three-phase defi- which indicates the capacitor bank is energised, and
nite time over voltage protection. The elements one per operates, which is set to 10 seconds by default i.e. A
phase, use 32 samples per cycle to provide a flat fre- sustained condition of rated current without rated volts
quency response up to 550Hz and beyond. indicates a fuse failure on a per phase basis

Reydisp Evolution
Function Overview
Measurements and indication

Analogue values can be displayed on the LCD screen. In
addition most values can be obtained via the IEC60870-
5-103 communications.
System data
Fault records
The last 10 fault records are available from the fascia
with time and date of trip, measured quantities and type
of fault.
10 seconds of waveform storage is available and is user
configurable as 10*1s, 5*2s or 1*10s records. Within the
record the amount of per-fault storage is also configur- Reydisp Evolution is common to the entire range of Rey-
able. The recorder is triggered from a protection opera- rolle numeric products. It provides a means for the user
tion, or status input. to apply settings to the MSCDN, interrogate settings and
retrieve disturbance waveforms from the MSCDN
currents, the relay currents after vector group correction Figure (of screen shot of disturbance records in Reydisp
and the digital input and output signals. Evolution
Communications
Two Fibre-optic communications ports are provided on
the rear of the relay. They are optimised for 62.5/125µm
glass-fibre, with BFOC/2.5(ST®) bayonet style connectors.
In addition users may interrogate the MSCDN locally with

a laptop PC and the RS232 port on the front of the relay.
The MSCDN uses IEC 60870-5-103 as its communications

standard

Technical Information Quiescent (Typical) 15 Watts
Max 27 Watts
A.C Current Inputs

Accuracy Reference Conditions
1 Amp and 5 Amp current inputs are both available on the
General IEC60255 rear terminal blocks for most functions except Capacitor
Parts 6, 6A & 13 Unbalance.
Auxiliary Supply Nominal
Frequency 50 Hz
Ambient Temperature 20°C Electrical
Modular II Specification Insulation - IEC 60255-5
Between all terminals and earth 2.0kV rms for 1 min

Between independent circuits 2.0kV rms for 1 min
Mechanical Across normally open contacts 1.0kV rms for 1 min
Vibration (Sinusoidal) –IEC 60255-21-1 Class 1 High Frequency Disturbance -

Variation
Vibration response 0.5gn ≤ 5% Variation
Vibration endurance 1.0gn ≤ 5% 2.5kV Common (Longitudinal) ≤ 5%
Mode
Shock and Bump–IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1 1.0kV Series (Transverse) Mode ≤ 5%
Variation Electrostatic Discharge -

Shock response 5 gn 11ms ≤ 5% IEC 60255-22-2 Class IV
Shock withstand 15 gn 11ms ≤ 5%
Bump test 10 gn 16ms ≤ 5% Variation
8kV contact discharge ≤ 5%
Seismic – IEC 60255-21-3 Class 1
Conducted & Radiated Emissions -
Variation EN 55022 Class A (IEC 60255-25)
Seismic Response 1gn ≤ 5%
Conducted 0.15MHz – 30MHz
Radiated 30MHz – 1GHz
Conducted Immunity -
Auxiliary Energizing Quantity (IEC 61000-4-6; IEC 60255-22-6)
DC Power Supply
Variation
0.15MHz – 80MHz 10V rms 80% ≤ 5%
Nominal Operating Range modulation
30V 24V to 37.5V dc
48/110V 37.5V to 137.5V dc
220/250V 175V to 286V dc Radiated Immunity -
IEC60255-22-3 Class III
Auxiliary DC Supply – IEC 60255-11
Variation
Allowable superimposed ac com- ≤ 12% of DC voltage 80MHz to 1000MHz, 10V/m ≤ 5%
ponent 80% modulated
Allowable breaks/dips in supply ≤ 20ms
(collapse to zero from nominal Fast Transient – IEC 60255-22-4 Class IV
voltage)
Variation
D.C. Burden
4kV 5/50ns 2.5kHz repetitive ≤ 5%

Surge Impulse - 110Vrms 0.05 VA
IEC 61000-4-5 Class IV; (IEC 60255-22-5) 63.5Vrms 0.01 VA
Variation Rated Frequency

4KV Line-Earth (O/C Test voltage ≤ 10
±10%) Two operating frequencies are available
2KV Line-Line Frequency: 50Hz or 60Hz
Frequency
Environmental Withstand
Range 47Hz to 52Hz or
Temperature - IEC 60068-2-1/2 57Hz to 62Hz
Setting variation ≤ 5%
Operating range -10°C to +55°C Operating time variation ≤ 5% or 5ms
Humidity - IEC 60068-2-3

Operational test 56 days at 40°C and 93% RH Temperature
Transient Overvoltage –IEC 60255-5 Ambient range -10°C to +55°C

Variation over range ≤ 5%
Between all terminals and earth 5kV 1.2/50µs 0.5J
or between any two independent Output Contacts
circuits without damage or flash-
over
Output contacts functionality is fully programmable. The
basic I/O module has 5 output contacts three of which
Thermal Withstand are change over. Additional modules can be added with
consequential increase in case size, to provide more con-
tacts. These are added in-groups of eight up to a maxi-
Continuous and Limited Period Overload mum of 29
AC Current Inputs Output Contact Performance
Contact rating to IEC 60255-0-2.
3.0 x In Continuous
3.5 x In for 10 minutes Carry continuously
4.0 x In for 5 minutes 5A ac or dc
5.0 x In for 3 minutes
6.0 x In for 2 minutes Make and Carry
250A for 1 second
625A peak for 1 cycle
(limit L/R ≤ 40ms and V ≤ 300 volts)
for 0.5 sec 20A ac or dc
A.C. Burden for 0.2 sec 30A ac or dc
1A tap ≤0.1 VA Break

5A tap ≤0.3 VA
(limit ≤ 5A or ≤ 300 volts)
NB. Burdens are measured at nominal rating. Ac resistive 1250VA
Ac inductive 250VA @ PF ≤ 0.4
A.C Voltage Inputs Dc resistive 75W
Thermal Withstand Dc inductive 30W @ L/R ≤ 40 ms
50W @ L/R ≤ 10 ms
Continuous Overload Minimum number 1000 at maximum load
of operations
AC Voltage 320Vrms (452Vpk) Minimum recom- 0.5W, limits 10mA or 5V
mended load
A.C. Burden Status inputs

Status Inputs functionality is fully programmable. The Phase segregated High impedance Overall Differential
basic I/O module has 3 status inputs these can be set to scheme using external stabilizing resistors. Function is
high speed for signalling. Additional modules can be insensitive to third harmonic currents.
added to provide more inputs. Additional inputs are
added in-groups of eight up to a maximum of 27. A Accuracy
pickup timer is associated with each input and each input
may be individually inverted where necessary.
Pickup 100% of setting ± 5% or ± 0.01 In
Nominal Voltage Operating Range Reset 80% of Is
30 18V to 37.5V Repeatability ± 2%
48 37.5V to 60V Transient Over- 5%
110 87.5V to 137.5V reach
220 175 to 280V
Operating Time
NB: the status input operating voltage does not have to
be the same as the power supply voltage.
Current Applied Typical
2 x setting ≤ 1.5 cycle
Status Input Performance 4 x setting ≤ 1 cycle
Minimum DC current for op- 48V 10mA C1/2 50-x Capacitor Unbalance
eration 110V 2.25mA
220V 2.16mA
Phase segregated Capacitor Unbalance element, whose
Reset/Operate Voltage Ratio ≥ 90%
operate quantity is calculated from the ratio of capacitor
Typical response time < 5ms
Typical response time when < 15ms load current and the measured spill current, followed by
programmed to energise an three identical instantaneous Overcurrent elements with
output relay contact following time delay
Minimum pulse duration 40ms
Accuracy
250V RMS 50/60Hz applied for two seconds through a
0.1μF capacitor. Pickup 100% of setting ± 5% or ± 0.02 In
500V RMS 50/60Hz applied between each terminal and Reset 80% of Is
earth. Repeatability ± 2%
Discharge of a 10μF capacitor charged to maximum DC Operate Time ± 1% or ± 10ms
auxiliary supply voltage. Operating Time
Auxiliary Timer Accuracy

Auxiliary Timers are those timers created in Reylogic, Current Applied Typical
whose delay settings appear in the reylogic elements 2 x setting 1.5 cycles
4 x setting 1 cycle
menu
Accuracy 50N Cap Bank Phase Unbalance
Derived phase unbalance quantity, from the sum of phase
Timing < +1% or +10ms currents, applied to an instantaneous overcurrent
element with following time delay.
Accuracy Influencing Factors Accuracy
Common Performance Pickup 100% of setting ± 5% or ± 0.01 In

Disengaging Time Reset 80% of Is
Repeatability ± 2%
Disengaging Time 30ms Operate Time ± 1% or ± 10ms
Note: Output contacts have a minimum dwell time of Operating Time

100ms, after which the disengaging time is as above.
87/50-x-x Overall Differential Current Applied Typical

2 x setting 1.5 cycles
4 x setting 1 cycle
R1/2 49 Resistor Thermal Overload

Thermal overload element applied to each phase of
each resistor independently. Pickup 100% of setting ± 5% or ± 0.02 In
Reset 95% of Is
Accuracy
Repeatability ± 2%
Operate Time ± 5% or ± 0.1s
Frequency Range 1st, 2nd …15th Harmonic
Operating Time
Operating Time
Characteristic Ranges
Operate times are calculated from: Characteristic Ranges
⎧ I 2 − I 2P ⎫ Operate times are calculated from:
t = τ × ln ⎨ 2 2⎬ ⎧ I 2 − I 2P ⎫
⎩ I − (k × I B ) ⎭ t = τ × ln ⎨ 2 2⎬
Thermal ⎩ I − (k × I B ) ⎭
IEC 60255-8 τ = thermal time constant THERMAL
I = measured current IEC 60255-8 τ = thermal time constant
IP = prior current I = measured current
IB = basic current IP = prior current
k = constant IB = basic current
k = constant
50 Resistor Open Circuit Factor 1 to 1000 Δ 0.5 minutes
An instantaneous/delayed overcurrent element measures
the difference in currents on each resistor on a phase-by- 50 Backup Overcurrent
phase basis.
Three phase definite time overcurrent element.
Accuracy
Accuracy
Reset 95% of Is Pickup 100% of setting ± 5% or ± 0.02 In
Repeatability ± 2% Reset 95% of Is
Operate Time ± 1% or ± 10ms Repeatability ± 2%
Operate Time ± 1% or ± 10ms
Operating Time
Operating Time
2 x setting 2 cycles
4 x setting 1.5 cycle Current Applied Typical
2 x setting 2 cycles
49 Reactor Thermal Overload 4 x setting 1.5 cycle
50N Backup Earth Fault

Thermal overload element applied to each phase of the Definite time derived earth fault element.
reactor independently.
Accuracy Accuracy
Pickup 100% of setting ± 5% or ± Pickup 100% of setting ± 5% or ± 0.02 In

0.02 In Reset ≥ 95% of Is
Reset ≥ 95% of Is Repeatability ± 2%
Repeatability ± 2% Operate Time ± 1% or ± 10ms
Operate Time ± 5% Frequency Range 1st, 2nd …15th Harmonic

Operating Time 51N Derived Earth Fault
Inverse time derived earth fault element.
2 x setting 2 cycles Accuracy
4 x setting 1.5 cycle
Pickup 105% of setting ± 5% or ±
51 Backup Overcurrent 0.02 In
Three phase inverse time overcurrent element. Reset 95% of Is
Repeatability ± 2%
Accuracy Operate Time ± 5% or ± 40ms
Pickup 105% of setting ± 5% or ±

0.02 In Operating Time
Reset 95% of Is
Repeatability ± 2% Characteristic Ranges
Operate Time ± 5% or ± 40ms Operate times are calculated from:
⎡ K ⎤
t = Tm × ⎢ I α ⎥
Operating Time
⎣⎢ [ Is ] − 1⎦⎥
IEC I = fault current
Characteristic Ranges IDMTL Is = current setting
Operate times are calculated from: CURVES Tm = time multiplier
⎡ K ⎤ NI: K = 0.14, α = 0.02
t = Tm × ⎢ I α ⎥ VI: K = 13.5, α = 1.0
⎣⎢ [ Is ] − 1⎦⎥ EI: K = 80.0, α = 2.0
IEC LTI: K = 120.0, α = 1.0
I = fault current
IDMTL Is = current setting
CURVES Tm = time multiplier Time Multiplier 0.025 to 1.600 Δ 0.025 sec
NI: K = 0.14, α = 0.02
VI: K = 13.5, α = 1.0
Reset 0.0 to 60.0 Δ 1.0 sec
Operate times are calculated from:
EI: K = 80.0, α = 2.0
LTI: K = 120.0, α = 1.0 ⎡ A ⎤
t = M ×⎢ + B⎥
Time Multiplier 0.025 to 1.600 Δ 0.025 sec
0.0 to 60.0 Δ 1.0 sec ANSI
⎢⎣ []
I P
Is
−1 ⎥⎦
Reset IDMTL I = fault current
Operate times are calculated from: CURVES Is = current setting
⎡ A ⎤ M = time multiplier
t = M ×⎢ + ⎥ MI: A = 0.0515, B = 0.114, P = 0.02
[]
B
−1
P
⎢⎣ ⎥⎦ VI: A = 19.61, B = 0.491, P = 2.0
I
ANSI Is
EI: A = 28.2, B = 0.1217, P = 2.0
IDMTL I = fault current Operate times are calculated from:
CURVES Is = current setting
M = time multiplier ⎡ R ⎤
t = M ×⎢ I 2 ⎥
⎣⎢ [ Is ] − 1⎦⎥
MI: A = 0.0515, B = 0.114, P = 0.02
VI: A = 19.61, B = 0.491, P = 2.0 ANSI
EI: A = 28.2, B = 0.1217, P = 2.0 RESET I = fault current
Operate times are calculated from: CURVES Is = current setting
⎡ R ⎤ M = time multiplier
t = M ×⎢ ⎥ MI: R = 4.85
⎣⎢ [ Is ] − 1 ⎦⎥
I 2
VI: R = 21.6
ANSI
I = fault current EI: R = 29.1
RESET
Is = current setting
CURVES
M = time multiplier 27 Undervoltage
MI: R = 4.85 Single phase definite time undervoltage element. An
VI: R = 21.6 under voltage guard element may be used to block this
EI: R = 29.1 elements operation.

Accuracy
Accuracy
Pickup 100% of setting ± 0.1% or ± 0.1 V
Reset ≤ 100.5% of Vs (Adjustable) Pickup 100% of setting ± 0.1% or ± 0.1 V
Repeatability ± 0.1% Reset ≥ 99.5% of Vs
Operate Time ± 1% or ± 20ms Repeatability ± 0.1%
Operating Time
Operating Time
Operate Time < 3 cycles Operate Time < 4 cycles
59DT Definite Time Overvoltage 50 VTS Current Check

Three phase definite time overcurrent check element
Three phase definite time overvoltage element
Accuracy
Accuracy
Pickup 100% of setting ± 0.1% or ± 0.1 V Reset ≥ 95% of Is
Reset ≥ 99.5% of Vs Repeatability ± 2%
Repeatability ± 0.1% Operate Time ± 1% or ± 10ms
Operating Time
Operating Time

Operate Time < 4 cycles 2 x setting 2 cycles
4 x setting 1.5 cycle
59IT Inverse Time Overvoltage
Three phase inverse time overvoltage element specified
using seven user defined points on a curve.
Accuracy
Pickup ± 0.1% of setting or ± 0.1 V

Reset ≥ 99.5% of Vs
Repeatability ± 0.1%
Operate Time ± 5% or ± 0.1s
Operating Time
Characteristic Ranges
7 Point user defined inverse curve
X0,Y0
:
CURVE
X6,Y6
Xi:=1.00xVn … 2.00xVn
Yi:=0.1 … 20000s
VT Supervision
The VT supervision element operates when the 27 VTS
and the 50 VTS element operate to indicate that the
capacitor bank is energised but rated voltage has not
been applied to the relay on a phase by phase basis.
27 VTS Undervoltage
Three phase definite time undervoltage element

Ordering Information – 7SG23 MSCDN-MP
MSCDN-MP 7 S G 2 3 □▲ 0 - 0 □▲ □▲ □▲ □▲ - □▲ □▲ □▲ 0
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
Relay type | | | | | | | |
MSCDN-MP1 1 | C | 1 0 J |
- Two overall unit protection elements | | | | | | | |
- CT supervision | | | | | | | |
- Two capacitor out of balance units | | | | | | | |
- Phase unbalance | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
MSCDN-MP2a 2 | B | 0 0G|
- Resistor thermal overload | | | | | | | |
- Resistor open circuit | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
MSCDN-MP2b 3 | C | 0 1 J |
- Reactor thermal overload | | | | | | |
- Excessive RMS overcurrent | | | | | | |
- Capacitor under/overvoltage | | | | | | |
- Overcurrent and earth-fault | | | | | | |
- VT supervision | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
| | | | | |
I/O range | | | | | |
11 Binary Inputs / 13 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover) B | | | | |
19 Binary Inputs / 21 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover) C | | | | |
| | | | |
Frequency | | | | |
50Hz 1 | | | |
| | | |
1/ 5 A 0 | | |
1A 1 | | |
| | |
Not available 0 | |
63/110 V AC 1 | |
| |
Housing size | |
|
1) High burden 110/125V binary inputs compliant with ESI48-4 ESI 1 available via external dropper resistors with 48V binary input version
VCE:2512H10064 (9 inputs, 110V)
VCE:2512H10065 (5 inputs, 110V)
VCE:2512H10066 (1 inputs, 110V)

Reyrolle
Protection
Devices
7SG12 DAD N
Numerical High Impedance
Answers for energy

7SG12 DAD N PR O TECTED
ZO N E
Numerical high Impedance
S tabilising
R esistor
D AD -N (7SG 12)
1A
17
18
5A A
19
N on-linear 20
R esistors 1A
21
22
5A B
23
24
1A
25
26
5A C
27
28
Description
AN1
Fig 1. Simplified Typical A.C. Schematic Diagram

The 7SG12 DAD-N overall differential protection uses the
high impedance circulating current principle; a single line
diagram of such a scheme is shown in fig. 1.
Function Overview
The 7SG12 is a three phase relay providing high-speed, high
impedance phase segregated current differential protection High speed phase segregated differential protection
and phase segregated open circuit monitoring of the Harmonic rejection
current transformer secondary circuits (CT supervision). Integrated open circuit current transformer monitoring
Outputs from the differential and CT supervision elements Continuous self monitoring
operate when their input current exceeds their individual Compatibility with generic communications software
current settings. The programmed time delays, LEDs and Reydisp Evolution
output contacts are initiated. Settings stored in EEPROM
Storage of up to 500 time tagged event records
Relays can be supplied with binary input/output and LED Storage of up to 10 waveform records in non-volatile
combinations as follows: memory without the use of batteries.
Metering of analogue and digital quantities.
3BI + 5BO + 16 LEDs, E8 case Expandable I/O of up to 27 binary inputs and 29 output
11BI + 13BO + 16 LEDs, E8 case contacts replaces the need for external trip lockout relays.
19BI + 21BO + 32LEDs, E12 case Programmable LEDs for trip and alarm conditions.
27BI + 29BO + 32LEDs, E12 case. E8 or E12 case.
All output contacts are fully programmable to any relay

function listed in the output relay menu. Output relays can
be configured as self reset or hand reset. User Interface
It is recommended that class ‘PX’ current transformers to IEC
60044-1 are used with high impedance protection.
1 fixed LED.
16 or 32 programmable LEDs.

Monitoring Functions Theory of High Impedance
Current Balance Protective
Monitored quantities can be displayed on the LCD screen or
via the data communications channel(s). Monitored values
Schemes and their Application
include:-
Determination of Stability
• Differential currents The stability of a current balance scheme using a high
• Binary inputs impedance relay circuit depends upon the relay voltage
• Output relays setting being greater than the maximum voltage which can
appear across the relay under a given through fault
condition. This maximum voltage can be determined by
Application means of a simple calculation which makes the following
assumptions:
Typically applied to provide 3 – phase high impedance One current transformer is fully saturated making its
differential protection of busbar, connections, auto- excitation impedance negligible.
transformers, reactors and motors, see figure 4. The resistance of the secondary winding of the saturated
current transformer together with the leads connecting it to
High impedance protection is recommended for all the relay circuit terminals constitute the only burden in
applications where faults must be cleared in the shortest parallel with the relay.
possible time and where discrimination must be ensured. The remaining current transformers maintain their ratio.
High impedance schemes can provide lower fault settings
and better through fault stability than is possible with most Thus the maximum voltage is given by:
other schemes.
(1) (
V = Imax R CT + RL )
The stability of the high impedance scheme depends upon
the operate voltage setting being greater than the Where:
maximum voltage which can appear across the relay under
a given through fault condition. An external series RL = The largest value of pilot loop Resistance
stabilising resistor and shunt non-linear resistor per phase between the current transformer and the relay
complete the scheme. The series resistor value is circuit terminals
determined by the voltage level required for stability and
the value of relay current calculated to provide the required RCT = Current transformer secondary winding
primary fault setting. Non-linear resistors protect the relay resistance
circuit from high over-voltages.
Imax = Current transformer secondary current
The current setting and the operating voltage of the corresponding to the maximum steady state
relay/stabilising resistor combination is calculated taking through fault current of the protected equipment.
into account:-
For stability, the voltage setting of the relay VS must be
• Transient stability under through fault conditions made equal to or exceed, the highest value of V calculated
as verified by calculation assuming worst case above.
conditions. Experience and extensive laboratory tests have proved that
if this method of estimating the relay setting voltage is
• The required operate level for internal fault adopted, the stability of the protection will be very much
conditions. greater than the value of I used in the calculation. This is
because a current transformer is normally not continuously
The CT supervision function of the DAD-N relay provides saturated and consequently any voltage generated by this
monitoring of CT secondary wiring connections, this is current transformer will reduce the voltage appearing
particularly relevant where current transformer wiring is across the relay circuit.
switched as in some busbar protection arrangements.

Method of Establishing Relay Setting Current
Relay setting current is given by: Data Storage and
Communication
(2) IS = IF − (∑ Imag + INLR )
Where: Sequence of event records
IS = Relay setting current resolution. These are available via the communications.
IF = Current transformer secondary current at the Fault records

primary fault setting required i.e. at VS. The last 10 fault records are available from the fascia with
ΣImag = Current transformer magnetising currents at the
value of VS. Disturbance recorder
5 seconds of waveform storage is available and is user-
INLR = Current taken by the non-linear resistor/voltage
configurable as 5 x 1s or 1 x 5s records. Within the record
limiting device at VS (this value is usually small and
the amount of pre-fault storage is also configurable. The
often may be neglected).
recorder is triggered from a protection operation, or binary
input. ( e.g. Buchholz flag indication).
Equation (2) should properly be the vector sum, however
arithmetic addition is normally used.
currents and the digital input and output signals.
The relay settings must be appropriately programmed in
Establishing the Value of Setting Resistors
order for a wave form to be triggered from an external
Resistor value R is given by: protection device.
VS
(3) R= Communications
IS Two fibre-optic communications ports are provided on the
rear of the relay. They are optimised for 62.5/125μm glass-
Exact resistor values are not necessary, a higher resistor
standard value may be chosen provided a check calculation
using that value shows sufficient margin ie:
laptop PC and the RS232 port on the front of the relay.
The relay can be user selectable to either IEC 60870-5-103 or
(4) V < Vactual setting < 0.5VCT knee point
Modbus RTU as its communications standard.
The required watt-second rating of the resistor is Reydisp evolution
established at setting and at the maximum fault rating –
short time rating. Stabilising resistors should be mounted
numeric products, providing means for the user to apply
vertically in a well ventilated location and clear of all other
settings to the relay, interrogate settings and retrieve stored
wiring and equipment to avoid the effects of their power
data records.
dissipation
Reydisp evolution utilises IEC 60870-5-103 protocol.

Binary Input
Settings
Nominal Voltage Operating Range
Current Inputs 30V 18V to 37.5V
48V 37.5V to 60V
Description Range Default
110V 87.5V to 137.5V
87/50 Element Disabled, Disabled
Enabled 220V 175 to 280V
87/50 Setting 0.005, 0.006 0.5xln
…0.100In Performance
0.105, 0.110
…2.000In 48V 10mA
87/50 Delay 0,0.01…60s 0.00s Minimum DC current for
110V 2.25mA
operation
CT 50 Element Disabled, Disabled 220V 2.16mA
Enabled
Reset/Operate Voltage Ratio ≥90%
CT 50 0.001, 0.002 0.10xln
Setting …0.100In Typical response time <5ms
0.105, 0.110
...2.000In Typical response time when
programmed to energise an <15ms
CT 50 0.1,0.2…60s 10.00s
Delay
Minimum
40ms
pulse duration
Technical Data
Output Contacts
Specification Section Contact rating to IEC 60255-0-2
Inputs and Outputs Make and Carry

(limit L/R ≤ 40ms and V ≤ 300 volts)
For 0.5 sec 20A ac or dc
DC Power Supply For 0.2 sec 30A ac or dc
Nominal Operating Range Break

30V 24V to 37.5V dc (limit ≤ 5A or ≤ 300 volts)
48/110V 37.5V to 137.5V dc
Ac resistive 1250VA
220V 175V to 286V dc
Ac inductive 25VA @ PF ≤ 0.4
Dc resistive 75W
Auxiliary DC Supply – IEC 60255-11
30W @ L/R ≤ 40 ms
Dc inductive
30W @ L/R ≤ 40 ms
Allowable superimposed ac ≤ 12% of DC voltage
component Minimum number of 1000 at maximum load
Allowable breaks/dips in ≤ 20ms operations
supply (collapse to zero Minimum recommended 0.5W, limits 10mA or 5V
from nominal voltage) load
D.C. Burden
Quiescent (Typical) 15
Max 27

Mechanical IEC 60255-22-1 Class III
Variation
2.5kV Common ≤ 5%
IEC 60255-21-1 Class 1
(Longitudinal) Mode
1.0kV Series (Transverse) ≤ 5%
Variation Mode
Vibration response 0.5gn ≤ 5%
Vibration 1.0gn ≤ 5% Electrostatic Discharge
endurance
Shock and Bump
Variation
IEC 60255-21-2 Class1
8kV contact discharge ≤ 5%
Variation
Conducted & Radiated Emissions
Shock response 5 gn 11ms ≤ 5%
Shock withstand 15 gn 11ms ≤ 5% EN 55022 Class A (IEC 60255-25)
Bump test 10 gn 16ms ≤ 5%
Conducted 0.15MHz – 30MHz
Seismic IEC 60255-21-3 Class 1 Radiated 30MHz – 1GHz
Variation Conducted Immunity

Seismic Response 1gn ≤ 5% (IEC 61000-4-6; IEC 60255-22-6)
Mechanical Classification Variation

0.15MHz – 80MHz 10V rms ≤ 5%
Durability In excess of 106 operations 80% modulation
Ambient range -10°C to +55°C Radiated Immunity

Variation over range ≤ 5% IEC60255-22-3 Class III
Variation
Electrical Tests 80MHz to 1000MHz, 10V/m ≤ 5%
80% modulated
Fast Transient
IEC 60255-5
Between all terminals and 5kV 1.2/50µs 0.5J
earth or between any two Variation
independent circuits 4kV 5/50ns 2.5kHz ≤ 5%
without damage or repetitive
flashover
Surge Impulse
Insulation IEC 61000-4-5 Class IV; (IEC 60255-22-5)
IEC 60255-5
Variation
Between all terminals and 2.0kV rms for 1 min 4KV Line-Earth (O/C Test ≤ 10
earth voltage 10%)
Between independent 2.0kV rms for 1 min 2KV Line-Line
circuits
Across normally open 1.0kV rms for 1 min
contacts

CT-50 CT Supervision
Environmental
± 5% of setting or ± 0.01 In
Pickup
Temperature whichever is the greater
Reset 0 95% of Is
IEC 60068-2-1/2
Repeatability ± 2%
Operate Time Operate Time
2 x Setting < 1.5 cycles
Time Delay setting +/- 5%
Time Delay or +/- 10 milliseconds,
Humidity whichever is the greater**
IEC 60068-2-3
Operational test 56 days at 40°C and 93% RH
Protection Elements
General Accuracy
General IEC60255
Parts 6, 6A & 13
Auxiliary Nominal
Frequency 50/60Hz
Accuracy influencing factors
Temperature
10 °C to +55 °C ≤ 5% variation
Frequency
47 Hz to 52 Hz Setting: ≤5% variation
57 Hz to 62 Hz Operate Time: ≤ 5%
variation
87/50-1, 87/50-2 Differential
± 5% of setting or ± 0.01 In
Pickup
whichever is the greater
Reset 0.95% of Is
Repeatability ± 2%
Operate Time Operate Time
2 x Setting 1 cycle ± 5ms
4 x Setting < 1 cycle
± 1% or ± 5ms
Time Delay
whichever is the greater

Case Dimensions
The 7SG12 is supplied in either a size 8 or size 12 case, depending on the binary input and output relay requirement.
Fig 2. Case Dimensions

Connection Diagram
+ve
1 2
7SG12 DAD-N -ve BI 4 BO 6
3 4
Case Earth +ve
4 5 6
13
+ve BO 1 NO -ve BI 5 BO 7
5 7 8
14
-ve BO 1 NC +ve
6 9 10
-ve BI 6 BO 8
15 Earth 7 11 12
BO 2 NC +ve
8 13 14
BO 2 NO -ve BI 7 BO 9
+ve 9 15 16
21
-ve SI 1 10
+ve
23 17 BO 10 18
BO 3 NO BI 8
+ve 11 BO 11 20
25
SI 2 BO 3 NC +ve
-ve 12 19 22
27
-ve BI 9
+ve 17 21 BO 12 24
26
SI 3 BO 4 +ve
-ve 19 23 BO 13 26
28
BI 10
18 28
BO 5 +ve
20 25
PSU BI 11
-ve
27
I/O 1
I/O 1 – If fitted
+ve
I/O 2 – If fitted 1 2
-ve BI 12 BO 14
3 4
I/O 3 – If fitted
+ve
5 6
1A -ve BI 13 BO 15
17 7 8
+ve
18 9 10
5A A -ve BI 14 BO 16
19 11 12
+ve
20 13 14
1A -ve BI 15 BO 17
21 15 16
+ve
22 17 BO 18 18
5A B BI 16
23 BO 19 20
+ve
24 19 22
1A -ve BI 17
25 21 BO 20 24
+ve
26 23 BO 21 26
5A C BI 18
27 28
+ve
28 25
AN1 -ve BI 19
27
I/O 2
IRIG-B
+ve
Tx-1 1 2
Rx-1 -ve BI 20 BO 22
F.O.
3 4
Tx-2
+ve
Rx-2 CONT. 5 6
-ve BI 21 BO 23
7 8
+ve
9 10
BI 22 BO 24
Notes: 11
-ve
12
1) Alternative output contact arrangement available: +ve
13 14
3 Change-over + 22 normally open + 4 normally closed BI 23 BO 25
-ve
2) NLR and stabilising resistors to be ordered separately. 15 16
+ve
17 BO 26 18
BI = Binary Input BI 24
BO = Binary Output BO 27 20
+ve
19 22
-ve BI 25
21 BO 28 24
Shows contacts internal +ve
23 BO 29 26
BI 26
Contacts close when the 28
relay chassis is 25
+ve
withdrawn from case -ve BI 27
27
I/O 3

Typical Applications
AUTO
TRANSF.
Stabilising
Resistors
NLR
7SG12
a) AUTO-TRANSFORMER
PROTECTED
ZONE
REACTOR
(Connections
Or
Busbars)
Voltage limiting
devices (NLR) Trip
RSTAB Relay(s)
Series stabilising
NLR resistors
7SG12 Zone
Discriminating & Shorting
CT Supervision relay Relay
b) MOTOR or GENERATOR or REACTOR
C) TYPICAL BUSBAR PROTECTION SCHEME COMPONENTS
Fig 4. Typical Applications of 7SG1211 Relay

Ordering Information – 7SG12 DAD-N
Nondirectional O/C Relay 7 S G 1 2 □▲ □▲ - 0 □▲ □▲ □▲ □▲ - 0 □▲ B▲ 0

Numeric high impedance | | | | | | | |
circulating current protection. | | | | | | | |
Relay type | | | | | | | |
100 series - High Impedance Circulating Current Protection 1 | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
Protection options | | | | | | |
Option 01 1 | | | | | |
- CT supervision (CT50) | | | | | |
- Overall differential (87/50-1, 87/50-2) | | | | | |
| | | | | |
30 V DC auxiliary, 30 V DC binary input A | | | | |
30 V DC auxiliary, 48 V DC binary input B | | | | |
| | | | |
I/O range 1) | | | | |
3 Binary Inputs / 5 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover) A | | E |
11 Binary Inputs / 13 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover) B | | E |
19 Binary Inputs / 21 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover) C | | | |
27 Binary Inputs / 29 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover) D | | | |
| | | |
Frequency | | | |
50Hz 1 | | |
60Hz 2 | | |
| | |
1/ 5 A 0 | |
| |
Housing size | |
|
VCE:2512H10064 (9 inputs, 110V)
VCE:2512H10065 (5 inputs, 110V)
VCE:2512H10066 (1 inputs, 110V)
220/250 V application, order resistor box VCE:2512H10066 in addition
VCE:2512H10067 (5 inputs, 220V)
VCE:2512H10068 (1 inputs, 220V)

Reyrolle
Protection
Devices
7SG16 Ohmega
Distance Protection
Answers for energy

7SG16 Ohmega
Distance Protection
• Permissive underreach and Permissive overreach
Signalling Schemes are provided in addition to time
stepped operation.
• Self monitoring. Hardware and software watchdogs and
data integrity checks ensure that the relay operates in
the correct manner
•
Optional
• 4th distance protection zone
• Quadrilateral characteristics for earth fault
• Single-pole tripping
• Blocking, acceleration and loss of load schemes
• Stub protection
•
Description Directional Earth-Fault (DEF) (High Resistance Earth-
Fault) protection (single or dual) with Permissive
Overreach and Blocking signalling schemes.
The 7SG16 Ohmega range of numeric distance relays • Sensitive Earth-Fault protection
combines the power and flexibility of microprocessor • Autoreclose (high-speed single-pole or three-pole as
technology with the proven measuring techniques of appropriate) with Reach extension scheme
previous impedance relays. • Check synchronising
7SG16 relays provide mho or quadrilateral elements • Overvoltage and undervoltage protection
operating as a full scheme distance protection. All fault
loops and all zones are continuously monitored providing
superior fault coverage when compared to relays employing
starters.
The distance protection is supplemented by integrated
signalling schemes allowing the relays to be applied as unit Analogue values can be displayed in primary or secondary
protections. quantities on the LCD screen.
Complementing the distance protection is a range of
protection and control features, which are combined in the • Primary current per phase
various models in the range to suit different applications. • Primary earth current
Communications facilities using the IEC 60870 standard • Secondary current per phase
allow remote update of settings and provide access to the • Secondary earth current
instrumentation, waveform storage and data collection • Primary phase voltages
features of the relay. • Secondary voltages
7SG163n series relays are suitable for distribution networks.
• Apparent power and power factor
7SG164n series relays are suitable for sub-transmission
• Real and reactive power
networks.
• Direction
• Autoreclose status
Functional Overview • Check sync line and bus voltages
• Check sync differential voltage
• Check sync phase difference
Standard
• Bus and line frequency
• 3 zone Distance protection with mho characteristics and • Check sync slip frequency
earth fault compensation.
• Output contacts
• Voltage Transformer supervision detects blown VT fuses
• Status inputs
by monitoring sequence components of voltage and
current.
• Trip counters
• Switch on to fault (SOTF) protection provides fast • Number of waveform and event records stored
tripping if the CB is closed with earthing clamps left in • Time and Date
place.
• Transient - free Highset overcurrent protection. LED indication
• Power swing detection can be set to block distance 32 user programmable LEDs are provided, these can be
protection tripping. assigned to indicate fault and alarm status.
• Fault locator provides the location of the fault in either
miles, kilometres or line percentage.

Description of Functionality Optional Functionality
7SG16 relays use proven phase comparator techniques to Phase-fault (highset) overcurrent
provide full scheme distance protection with mho and A transient free phase-fault definite-time overcurrent
quadrilateral characteristics. All fault loops are continuously element is provided, which operates with a DTL
measured, requiring no starter characteristics. This allows characteristic.
developing faults to be correctly cleared.
The reach of each zone is set independently with separate Directional earth-fault
settings for phase and earth fault protection. Time delays To achieve effective clearance of high impedance earth-
may be set separately for phase and earth faults on all faults a directional earth-fault protection is available. This
zones. provides a directional element operating from residual
The distance protection can trip the CB directly, or a current and voltage, and an overcurrent element operating
signalling scheme can be used to verify a trip decision. The from the residual current.
section below describes the standard schemes available. A second DEF element can be provided to detect faults in
On some models the signalling schemes include current forward and reverse directions.
reversal detection, circuit breaker echo and weak infeed A variety of signalling schemes are available for use with DEF
detection to ensure correct operation of the relay. protection – see section on ‘Application’ below.
Power swing Sensitive earth-fault

System power swings can lead to an apparent drop in A non-directional sensitive earth fault protection operating
impedance, due to heavy load variation or remote system from residual current is available. It can be set down to 2% of
faults, which can lead to the measured impedance entering nominal current to allow clearance of very high impedance
a protection zone and causing operation. This can be earth faults. A definite-time delay is provided to allow the
detected using two dedicated impedance characteristics that SEF to be graded with the distance protection.
encompass the protection zones. They are arranged so that
one is larger than the other, a fault will cause them to pick Overvoltage and undervoltage
up in quick succession while a power swing will cause a
Two overvoltage elements and two undervoltage elements
longer delay between the outer element picking up and the
are available, with definite-time delays. These monitor line
inner one.
voltages providing alarm and trip levels of operation.
Once a power swing is detected the distance protection can
be inhibited.
Autoreclose
An integrated autorecloser is available. This provides delayed
Switch on to fault
or high-speed autoreclose following a zone 1 or scheme-
Inadvertent closing of the circuit breaker with the earth
generated trip.
clamps left in place causes a 3 phase short circuit fault.
The 7SG163n, with three-pole tripping only, provides a
Switch on to fault (SOTF) protection detects this condition
single-shot three-pole autoreclose.
and provides instantaneous fault clearance. Two styles of
The 7SG164n recloser can provide up to 2 reclosing shots. A
SOTF are provided, AC SOTF is for use where line VTs are
variety of sequences may be set up, to allow trips and
fitted, DC SOTF is for use with bus VTs.
recloses in different combinations of single- and three-pole.
Voltage transformer supervision
Check Synchronising
Loss of supply from the VTs can cause unwanted operations
An integrated synchroniser is available, which prevents the
of the distance protection. To avoid this, the sequence
circuit breaker being closed if the two power systems are not
component voltages present on the voltage inputs are
synchronised with one another.
monitored. During healthy conditions no residual or NPS
voltage is present. If a VT fuse fails, residual and NPS voltage
are generated with no increase in the corresponding
sequence current. The VT supervision operates and raises an
alarm. If required, it can also inhibit operation of the
distance protection.
Circuit breaker fail (50BF)

The circuit breaker fail function operates by monitoring the
current following a trip signal and issues an output if the
current does not cease within a specified time interval. This
output contact can be used to backtrip an upstream circuit
breaker. The circuit breaker fail function has a fast reset
feature.

Application Blocking Overreach Type 2 (Zone 4)
Zone 2 is set to overreach giving instantaneous coverage
Time Stepped Distance over 100% of the line length. It is blocked for out of zone
faults by the remote Zone 4 reverse element.
Time delayed Zones 2,3 & 4. Direct intertripping can be
applied.
Signalling link
Relay Relay
A B
Z1A
Z2A
Z3A
Z1A
Z1B
Z2B
Z3B
Z4B
Permissive Overreach Type 2 (POR2)

Permissive Underreach (PUR) Zone 2 is set to overreach giving instantaneous coverage of
Zone 1 is typically set to give instantaneous coverage up to 100% of the line length with a permissive signal from the
80% of the line length and aided tripping using accelerated remote Zone 2.
Zone 3 (7SG163n) or Zone 2 (7SG164n) for the remaining
20%.
Zone 2 Accelerated (PA)

Zone 1 is set to give instantaneous coverage typically up to
80% of the line length and aided tripping using accelerated
Zone 2 for the remaining 20%.
Reach extension (RE)

Instantaneous coverage up to Zone 1 extended setting for
the first fault detected with delayed stepped distance for
persistent faults. For relays with autoreclose, instantaneous
coverage with Zone 1 can be extended for the initial fault.
Time stepped distance is applied for persistent faults.
Blocking Overreach Type 1 (without Z4)

Zone 2 is set to overreach giving instantaneous
coverage over 100% of the line length. It is blocked for
out of zone faults by the remote Z3.Z2 elements.
DEF Permissive Overreach (DPOR)

Signalling link
Relay Relay
A B
Z1A Overreach DEF to give short time delayed coverage over

Z3A
Z2A
100% of the line length for earth faults, with a permissive
Z1B signal from the remote DEF.
Z2B
Z3B
Current Reversal Logic

This logic is used in conjunction with permissive overreach
schemes applied to dual circuit lines. Tripping of the faulted
feeder at one end may result in sudden reversal of fault
current in the adjacent feeder. This may otherwise cause
false tripping of the healthy adjacent feeder due to delayed
resetting of the permissive signal.

Data Storage and Reydisp Evolution
Communication

Fault records
The last 10 fault records are available from the fascia with
trigger. Up to 10 fault waveforms may be stored with
associated analogue and digital values.
Communications
Two fibre-optic communications ports are provided on the
rear of the relay. They are optimised for 62.5/125μm glass-
laptop PC and the 25-pin female D-type connector RS232
port on the front of the relay.
The relay data comms are compliant with IEC 60870-5-103
communications standard. Fig 1. Disturbance Records in Reydisp Evolution

numeric products. It provides a means for the user to apply
settings to the relay, interrogate settings and retrieve
disturbance waveforms.
Reydisp Evolution utilises IEC 60870-5-103 protocol.

Technical Data component
Allowable breaks/dips in supply ≤20 ms
For full technical data refer to the Performance Specification (collapse to zero from nominal
of the Technical Manual. voltage)
Binary inputs
Inputs and Outputs
Nominal Voltage Operating Range V dc
Characteristic energising quantity 30V 18 to 37.5V
Performance data To IEC 60255-3 48V 37.5 to 60V
110 V 87.5 to 137.5V
AC Current/Voltage Frequency 220V 175 to 280V
1A, 2A or 5A ,3-phase 50 / 60Hz The binary input voltage need not be the same as the main
63.5V line-neutral, 3-phase energising voltage.
Current Inputs Binary input performance
Thermal Withstand Parameter Value

12A continuous Minimum DC current for operation 10 mA
(30V and 48V inputs only)
15A 10 minutes
30A 2 minutes
Typical response time < 5 ms
240A 2 Seconds
Typical response time when used to < 15 ms
340A 1 Second
625A peak I Cycle
Minimum pulse duration 40 ms
Burden
Binary inputs will not respond to the following:
5A ≤ 0.625 VA 250V RMS 50/60 Hz applied for two seconds through a 0.1µF
≤ 0.1 VA capacitor.
1A ≤ 0.025 VA 500 V RMS 50/60 Hz applied between each terminal and
Note: Burdens are measured at nominal rating. earth.
Discharge of a 10µF capacitor charged to maximum DC
Voltage Inputs: Thermal Withstand auxiliary supply voltage.
Thermal Withstand Output Relays

3.5 x Vn continuous
Burden Make and carry 20A ac or dc for 0.5s
(L/R ≤ 40 ms and V ≤ 300V) 30A ac or dc for 0.2s
≤ 0.01 VA
Breaking Capacity
Note: Burdens are measured at nominal rating.
( ≤ 5 A and ≤ 300 V):
DC Auxiliary Supply AC Inductive 250 VA at p.f. ≤ 0.4
DC Resistive 75 W
Nominal Voltage Operating Range V dc DC Inductive 30 W at L/R ≤ 40ms
30V 24 to 37.5V 50 W at L/R ≤ 10ms
48/110V 37.5 to 137.5 Minimum number of operations 1000 at maximum load
220 V 178.0 to 280.0 Minimum recommended load 0.5 Watt limits 10mA or 5V
110/220V 88 to 275

Maximum 27 W

Mechanical Radio Frequency Interference
IEC 60255-22-3
IEC 60255-21-1 Class 1 10 V/m, 80 to 1000 MHz ≤5% variation
0.5 gn, Vibration response Conducted RFI

≤ 5% variation IEC 60255-22-6
1.0 gn, Vibration endurance
10 V, 0.15 to 80 MHz ≤5% variation

Shock Bump
IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1
Conducted limits
IEC 60255-25
5 gn, Shock response, 11ms
15 gn, Shock withstand, 11ms ≤ 5% variation
Quasi-peak Average
0.15 to 0.5 MHz 79 66
Seismic
0.5 to 30 MHz 73 60
IEC 60255-21-3 Class 1
Radiated limits
1 gn, Seismic response ≤ 5% variation
IEC 60255-25
Frequency Range Limits at 10 m
30 to 230 MHz 40
230 to 10000 MHz 47
Electrical Tests
Environmental
Insulation
IEC 60255-5 RMS levels for 1 minute
Temperature
IEC 60068-2-1/2
Between all terminals and earth 2.0 kV
Between independent circuits 2.0 kV
Across normally open contacts 1.0 kV
Humidity
IEC 60255-5
IEC 60068-2-3
Between all terminals and earth or 5 kV
Operational test 56 days at 40 °C and 93% RH
between any two independent 1.2/50 µs
circuits without damage or flashover 0.5 J

2.5kV, Longitudinal mode ≤3% variation

8kV, Contact discharge ≤5% variation
Fast Transient
IEC 60255-22-4Class IV
4kV, 5/50ns, 2.5 kHz, repetitive ≤3% variation

Directional earth-fault protection
Protection Elements
Characteristic DTL
General Accuracy Level
Settings 0.05 to 4.00 x In
Reference Conditions Accuracy Operate: Setting ± 5%
General IEC60255 Reset:≥ 95% of operate level
Parts 6, 6A & 16 Delay
Auxiliary Nominal Settings 0 to 20s steps 1ms
Frequency 50Hz Accuracy Setting ± 1% or 5ms
Impedance setting 6 Ohms Phase-fault (highset) overcurrent protection
Line angle 750
Z0/Z1 2.5 Characteristic DTL
Level
Accuracy influencing factors Settings 0.1 to 35.0 x In
Accuracy Operate: Setting ± 5%
Temperature Reset:≥ 95% of operate level
10 °C to +55 °C ≤ 5% variation Delay
Frequency Settings 0 to 1000ms
47 Hz to 52 Hz Setting: ≤5% variation Accuracy Setting ± 1% or 10ms
57 Hz to 62 Hz Operate Time: ≤ 5% variation
Distance Protection
Impedance Reach
ZN setting 0.1 to 250 Ω
ΦN Angle 0 to 90° step 5°
Accuracy (ZN = 6Ω, mho characteristic, 3-phase fault)
ZN1 (Φ =Φ N ± 3°) ZN ± 5% or 0.1 Ω for SIR <30
ZN ± 10% or 0.1 Ω for SIR ≥30
Z (Φ =Φ N ± 10°) ZN1 x cos(Φ N -Φ) ± 0.05ZN Ω
Z (0° ≤ Φ ≤ 90°) ZN1 x cos(Φ N -Φ) ± 0.1ZN Ω
Accuracy (all ZN) class index plus an error not
exceeding class index
Transient overreach class index plus an error not
exceeding class index
Operating time (see Technical Manual)
Operating time min. 17ms (7SG164n)
min. 35ms (7SG163n)
Setting 0 to 10 s step 10 ms
Accuracy Setting ± 1 % or 10

Case Dimensions

Connection Diagram 7SG16 Ohmega
Rear View: Arrangement of

terminals and modules +ve
13 4
-ve
RL 1 NO
14 5
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
RL 1 NC
15 Earth 6
I I Case
7
earth
C A A O O I P RL 2 NC
8
P N N 3 2 O S RL 2 NO
+ve 9
21
U 1 2 1 U SI 1
-ve 10
Opt Opt 23
RL 3 NO
+ve 11
25
SI 2 RL 3 NC
27 28 27 28 27 28 27 28 27 28 27 28 27 28 27
-ve 12
+ve 17
26
NOTES SI 3 RL 4
-ve 19
28
1) The fourth CT input is required only for the
18
sensitive earth fault and directional earth fault
RL 5
functions. It is recommended that a ring-core CT is 20
P.S.U.
used
2) The fourth VT input is required only for +ve +ve
1 1
synchronising. Any phase relationship may be SI 4 I/O 1 SI 12 I/O 2
-ve -ve
used. 3 3
3) Input/Output modules I/O 2 and I/O 3 are 5
+ve 2 5
+ve 2
optional, dependent on the model ordered. -ve SI 5 RL 6 SI 13 RL 14
7 4 -ve 4
7
Shows contacts internal 9
+ve 6 +ve
9 6
to relay case assembly. SI 6 RL 7 SI 14 RL 15
-ve 8 -ve
Contacts close when 11 11 8
the relay chassis is +ve 10 +ve
13 13 10
withdrawn from case -ve SI 7 RL 8 SI 15 RL 16
15 12 -ve 12
15
+ve 14 +ve
17 17 14
SI = Status Input SI 8 RL 9 SI 16 RL 17
16 16
RL = Output Relay
+ve
19 RL 10 18 19
+ve
RL 18 18
-ve SI 9 SI 17
21 RL 11 20 21
-ve
RL 19 20
+ve 22 +ve
23 23 22
SI 10 SI 18
RL 12 24 RL 20 24
+ve RL 13 26 +ve
25 25 RL 21 26
-ve SI 11 -ve SI 19
27 28 27 28
+ve
1
SI 20 I/O 3
23 -ve
3
‘A’ CT
P1
24 +ve 2
5
S1
-ve SI 21 RL 22
7 4
S2
1A +ve
9 6
P2
-ve SI 22 RL 23
25 11 8
‘B’ CT
26 +ve 10
13
-ve SI 23 RL 24
15 12
+ve 14
17
SI 24 RL 25
27 16
‘C’ CT
28 +ve
19 RL 26 18
-ve SI 25
21 RL 27 20
1A +ve
23 22
21 SI 26
RL 28 24
See note 1 AUX CT
22 +ve RL 29 26
25
-ve SI 27
AN 1 27 28
Va
23
See note 3
V1 V2 V2 V1 24
Vb
25
26
Vc 27
A B C
28
21
See note 2
22
AN 2

Ordering Information 7SG163 Ohmega
Ohmega (300 series) 7 S G 1 6 □▲ □▲ - 0 □▲ □▲ □▲ □▲ - □▲ □▲ □▲ 0

Distance protection for sub-transmission and distribution networks | | | | | | | | |
. | | | | | | | | |
Relay type | | | | | | | | |
OHMEGA 300 series - Standard functionality 3 | | | | | | | |
Numeric distance protection with a range of integrated | | | | | | | |
standard functions. | | | | | | | |
All relays can accommodate 1, 2 and 5A inputs and | | | | | | | |
communications using IEC60870-5-103 protocol. | | | | | | | |
Distance Protection (21/21N) | | | | | | | |
- Phase and earth-fault mho characteristics | | | | | | | |
- Loss of load | | | | | | | |
- Power swing blocking (68) | | | | | | | |
- Switch on to fault | | | | | | | |
- Fault locator (21FL) | | | | | | | |
Distance signalling schemes | | | | | | | |
- Time-stepped distance, permissive underreach, | | | | | | | |
permissive overreach | | | | | | | |
- Accelerated underreach | | | | | | | |
- Current reversal, CB echo, weak infeed | | | | | | | |
Auxiliary functions | | | | | | | |
- VT supervision | | | | | | | |
- Phase-fault overcurrent (50) | | | | | | | |
- Trip circuit supervision (74TC) | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
OHMEGA 305 - Relay specific functionality 1 | | | | | | |
- Three mho impedance zones | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
- Three mho impedance zones | | | | | | | |
- Earth-fault quadrilateral characteristics | | | | | | | |
Directional (high impedance) earth-fault (67N) | | | | | | | |
- IDMTL direct tripping and permissive overreach | | | | | | | |
schemes | | | | | | | |
- Current reversal and CB echo | | | | | | | |
- Single shot auto-reclose (79) | | | | | | | |
- Check synchronising (25) | | | | | | | |
- Sensitive earth-fault (50G) | | | | | | | |
- Two stage DTL undervoltage (27) | | | | | | | |
- Two stage DTL overvoltage (59) | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
OHMEGA 311 - Relay specific functionality 3 | | 1 | | | |
Distance Protection (21/21N) | | | | | | |
- Three mho impedance zones | | | | | | |
Directional (high impedance) earth-fault (67N) | | | | | | |
- IDMTL direct tripping and permissive overreach | | | | | | |
schemes | | | | | | |
- Current reversal and CB echo | | | | | | |
- Single shot auto-reclose with reach extension | | | | | | |
scheme (79) | | | | | | |
- Check synchronising (25) | | | | | | |
- Broken conductor | | | | | | |

Ohmega (300 series) 7 S G 1 6 □ □▲ - 0 □▲ □▲ □▲ □▲ - □▲ □▲ □▲ 0

(continued from previous page) | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
- Four mho impedance zones | | | | | | | |
- Blocking overreach | | | | | | | |
Dual directional (high impedance) earth-fault (67N) | | | | | | | |
- IDMTL direct tripping and permissive overreach | | | | | | | |
schemes | | | | | | | |
- Blocking scheme | | | | | | | |
- Single shot auto-reclose with reach extension | | | | | | | |
scheme (79) | | | | | | | |
- Sensitive earth-fault (50G) | | | | | | | |
- Two stage DTL undervoltage (27) | | | | | | | |
- Two stage DTL overvoltage (59) | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
- Four mho impedance zones | | | | | | |
- Earth-fault quadrilateral characteristics | | | | | | |
- Overcurrent guard | | | | | | |
Distance signalling schemes | | | | | | |
- Blocking overreach | | | | | | |
Dual directional (high impedance) earth-fault (67N) | | | | | | |
- IDMTL direct tripping and permissive overreach | | | | | | |
schemes | | | | | | |
- Blocking scheme | | | | | | |
- Current reversal, CB echo, weak infeed | | | | | | |
- Single shot auto-reclose with reach extension | | | | | | |
scheme (79) | | | | | | |
- Check synchronising (25) | | | | | | |
- Sensitive earth-fault (50G) | | | | | | |
- Two stage DTL undervoltage (27) | | | | | | |
- Two stage DTL overvoltage (59) | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
110/220 V DC auxiliary, 110 V DC low burden binary input L | | | | | |
| | | | | |
I/O range | | | | | |
11 Binary Inputs /29 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover) 2) F | | | | |

Ohmega (300 series) 7 S G 1 6 □□ - 0 □ □ □▲ □▲ - □▲ □▲ □▲ 0

(continued from previous page) | | | | |
| | | | |
Frequency | | | | |
50Hz 1 | | | |
60Hz 2 | | | |
| | | |
1, 2 or 5 A 1 | | |
| | |
Voltage inputs 1 | |
63/110 V AC | |
| |
Housing size | |
|
1) High burden 110V & 220V binary inputs are available via external dropper resistors with 48V binary input version
VCE:2512H10064 (9 inputs, 110V)
VCE:2512H10065 (5 inputs, 110V)
VCE:2512H10066 (1 inputs, 110V)
VCE:2512H10067 (5 inputs, 220V)
VCE:2512H10068 (1 inputs, 220V)
2) Case size E16

Ohmega (400 series) 7 S G 1 6 □▲ □▲ - 0 □▲ □▲ □▲ □▲ - □▲ □▲ □▲ 0

Distance protection for sub- | | | | | | | | |
transmission networks | | | | | | | | |
Relay type | | | | | | | | |
OHMEGA 400 series - Standard functionality 4 | | | | | | | |
Numeric distance protection (Sub-transmission) with a | | | | | | | |
range of integrated standard functions. | | | | | | | |
All relays can accommodate 1, 2 and 5A inputs and | | | | | | | |
communications using IEC60870-5-103 protocol. | | | | | | | |
- Four mho impedance zones | | | | | | | |
- Phase and earth-fault mho characteristics | | | | | | | |
- Switch on to fault | | | | | | | |
- Fault locator (21FL) | | | | | | | |
- Time-stepped distance, permissive underreach, | | | | | | | |
permissive overreach | | | | | | | |
- Blocking overreach | | | | | | | |
- VT supervision | | | | | | | |
- Phase-fault overcurrent (50) | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
Distance Protection (21/21N), three pole tripping | | | | | | | |
- Stub protection | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
- Single pole tripping | | | | | | | |
- Loss of load | | | | | | | |
- Stub protection | | | | | | | |
Directional (high impedance) earth-fault (67N) | | | | | | | |
- DTL direct tripping and permissive overreach schemes | | | | | | | |
- Current reversal and CB echo | | | | | | | |
- Weak infeed | | | | | | | |
- Two shot 1P/3P auto-reclose with reach extension | | | | | | | |
scheme (79) | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
- Earth-fault quadrilateral characteristics | | | | | | |
- Single pole tripping | | | | | | |
Distance signalling schemes | | | | | | |
- Current reversal, CB echo, weak infeed | | | | | | |
- Thermal overload | | | | | | |

Ohmega (400 series) 7 S G 1 6 □□ - 0 □▲ □▲ □▲ □▲ - □▲ □▲ □▲ 0

(continued from previous page) | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
110/220 V DC auxiliary, 110 V DC low burden binary input L | | | | | |
| | | | | |
I/O range | | | | | |
11 Binary Inputs /29 Binary Outputs (incl. 3 changeover) 2) F | | | | |
| | | | |
Frequency | | | | |
50Hz 1 | | | |
60Hz 2 | | | |
| | | |
1, 2 or 5 A 1 | | |
| | |
Voltage inputs 1 | |
63/110 V AC | |
| |
Housing size | |
|
1) High burden 110V & 220V binary inputs are available via external dropper resistors with 48V binary input version
VCE:2512H10064 (9 inputs, 110V)
VCE:2512H10065 (5 inputs, 110V)
VCE:2512H10066 (1 inputs, 110V)
VCE:2512H10067 (5 inputs, 220V)
VCE:2512H10068 (1 inputs, 220V)
2) Case size E16

Reyrolle
Protection
Devices
7SG24 Sigma
Communication Interface
Answers for energy

7SG24 Sigma
Communication Interface
Description
The 7SG24 provide a range of relay communication

interface devices between RS232 electrical and fibre optic
connections.
The 7SG24 can be used to provide a single point of
communication with a number of relays within fibre optic
systems having a loop connected or star connected
topology.
7SG243
Functional Overview Provides a dual RS232 to fibre optic interface for use with
a single relay or ring of relays.
Power indicator
Powered from RS232 pc connection
Input for external power supply
7SG241
Fibre optic hub with 5, 10, 20 or 30 channels (channel 1 is
always the master channel)
Power and channel activity indicators.
Front mounted RS232 connection with automatic
switchover from rear fibre master channel.
Light off and light on modes.
Suitable for glass fibres up to 3km in length

Optical Interface
Connectors ST
Optimised for use 62.5/125µm
Wavelength 1300nm
Launch power -24.7 max to -20.7 min dbm
Receiver sensitivity -24 to -9 dbm
Electrical Interface
Type RS232
7SG244 Optimised for use 25 way female D-type
Provides a RS232 to fibre optic interface. Pin out
Powered from RS232 pc connection 2 Rx (Input)
Input for external power supply 3 Tx (output)
4-5 RTS/CTS (internally connected)
6-8-20 DSR/CD/DTR (internally
connected)
7 Ground
9 External power (6-15V)
Auxiliary power supply input 7SG243 & 7SG244
Type Jack socket tip +ve

Fig 3. 7SG244 Connection Diagram Auxiliary input 6-15V dc 50mA
Auxiliary power supply input 7SG241
Type Rear terminals 13+ve

14-ve
Nominal Operating Range V dc
48/110v 37.5 to 137.5
220v 178.0 to 280.0
Burden 15w
Quiesent (typical)

Ordering Information – 7SG241 Sigma 1

Sigma 1 7 S G 2 4 □ 0 - □□ A 0 0 - □□ A 0 - □□□
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
| | | | |
| | | | |
Relay type | | | | |
Fibre Optic hub 1 | | | |
| | | |
Channel options | | | |
5 channel 1 | | C
10 channel 3 | | C
20 channel 5 | | D
30 channel 7 | | E
| | |
Auxiliary supply | | |
48/110V DC auxiliary A | |
220V DC auxiliary B | |
| |
Fibre optic (ST connector) 1 |
|
Housing size |
Case size E4 C
Case size E6 D
Case size E8 E

Sigma 3 7 S G 2 4 □ 0 - □□ A 0 0 - 0 □ A 0 - □□□
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
| | | |
| | | |
Relay type | | | |
Fibre Optic to RS232 converter providing two RS232 3 | | |
interfaces. | | |
| | |
Channel options | | |
1 channel, ST connectors for glass fibre 3 | |
| |
Auxiliary supply | |
External – see note 1 A |
|
Housing size |
Case special – see note 2 A
1) Self powered from PC or via pin 9 on D connector or optional external supply 6-15V DC @50mA to jack socket (tip +ve)
2) Housing Dimensions – 4U high, size 2 width panel mounted, 140mm depth, excluding fibre bend radius
3) Housing Dimensions – 85mm (l) x 58mm (w) x 19mm (h)


Sigma 4 7 S G 2 4 □ 0 - □□ A 0 0 - 0 □ A 0 - □□□
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
| | | |
| | | |
Relay type | | | |
Fibre Optic to RS232 converter providing one RS232 4 | | |
interface. | | |
| | |
Channel options | | |
1 channel, ST connectors for glass fibre 3 | |
| |
Auxiliary supply | |
External – see note 1 A |
|
Housing size |
Case special – see note 3 A
1) Self powered from PC or via pin 9 on D connector or optional external supply 6-15V DC @50mA to jack socket (tip +ve)
2) Housing Dimensions – 4U high, size 2 width panel mounted, 140mm depth, excluding fibre bend radius
3) Housing Dimensions – 85mm (l) x 58mm (w) x 19mm (h)

Reyrolle
Protection
Devices
7PG111 & 7PG112 AR

Auxiliary Relay
Answers for energy

7PG111 & 7PG112 AR
First Digit Second Digit Third Digit Type of
Type of flag contact reset
Auxiliary Relay Number of 0 No flag 1 Self
identical 1 Hand reset 2 Hand
elements 2 Hand reset 3 Electrical &
reverse acting hand
3 Self reset 4 Hand & self
4 Self reset 6 Electrical
reverse acting
Table 1. Relay Features
Suffix letters are used to identify further features:

Suffix D – indicates a relay fitted with a suppression diode
across the coil to reduce the effects of back emf on switch-
off.
Suffix SB – identifies a relay with a series break contact to
cut-off the operating coil, thus the relay burden becomes
zero after operation of this contact. Only available with AR
relays which have hand reset contacts.
Description
Type Number of Flag Contact
Contacts Reset Reset
The 7PG111 & 7PG112 AR range of electromechanical relays AR101 2,4,6 or 8 N.A. Self
are available with up to eight self, hand or electrically reset N.A. Elec & Hand
AR103 4,6 or 8
contacts. They can be supplied in most combinations of
AR106 2, 4, or 6 N.A. Elec
contact, flag and reset arrangements. Fixed time delay
AR111 2,4,6 or 8 Hand Self
models are also available.
AR112 2,4,6 or 8 Hand Hand
AR113 4, 6 or 8 Hand Elec & Hand
AR relays are voltage operated from either AC or DC supplies.
AR114 4 or 6 Hand Hand & Self
Heavy duty contacts are available on most devices.
AR121 2,4,6 or 8 Hand* Self
AR124 4,or 6 Hand* Hand & Self
Features AR131 2,4,or 6 Self Self
AR133 2,4,6 or 8 Self Elec & Hand
AR136 2,4 or 6 Self Elec
• Consistent positive action
AR141 2,4,or 6 Self* Self
• Robust design for a long, reliable, service life
AR101T 2,4,or 6 N.A. Self
AR111T 2,4,or 6 Hand Self
Type AR relays are a range of electro-mechanical relays with
AR112T 2,4,or 6 Hand Hand
up to 8 contacts and complying to BS142. They can be
supplied in most combinations of contact, flag and reset AR121T 2,4,or 6 Hand* Self
arrangements and with a fixed time delay. Heavy duty AR131T 2 or 4 Self Self
contacts are available on most models. AR141T 2 or 4 Self* Self
The relays are identified by a series of numbers and letters * Indicates a reverse acting flag indicating on de-energisation.
which define important relay features. Table 2. Relay Features
The following comments are provided as a guide to the
various features of type AR relays. Suffix T – identifies time delayed relays. The reference is
completed by adding a code number:
AR - 1 Up to 8 self reset contacts, in any combination of
normally open or normally closed as required. Delay on De-energisation
AR - 2 Up to 8 self reset contacts, in any combination of Number of contacts available
normally open or normally closed as required. Suffix Nominal AR101T, AR111T, AR AR
AR - 3 Electrical and hand set contacts supplied with a Time AR112T, AR121T 131T 141
contact reset mechanism in the relay case cover. T
AR - 4 Hand and self reset contacts, can be supplied with 2 T1 Up to 100ms 6 4 4
hand reset contacts and a maximum of 4 self reset contacts. T2 101 to 200ms 6 4 4
All the contacts may be either normally open or normally T3 201 to 300ms 4 2 2
closed. T4 301 to 400ms 2 N.A. N.A
AR - 6 Electrical reset contacts with optional self reset flag. Delay on Energisation
AR – 3 & 6 Reset coils are short time rated, we recommend T6 50ms max. 6 6 4
that reset circuits include a normally open (cut-off) contact Table 3.Summary of Time Delayed Operation

Technical Data IEC 60255-5
Between all terminals and

Inputs and Outputs earth or between any two 5 kV
independent circuits 1.2/50 µs
without damage or 0.5 J
Rated Voltage (Vn) flashover
A.C. 63.5, 110, 220, 240V
D.C. 12, 24, 30, 50, 125, 240V
Mechanical
Operating Range
A.C. 80% to 110% of rated
voltage
D.C. 70% to 115% of rated
IEC 255-21-1 The relays meet the
voltage
requirements of Class 1
for vibration response and
Burden
endurance
3 to 5W/VA depending upon Dependent on rating.
BS142 section 2.1 relays will withstand a
rating Rectified a.c. relays
category S2 20G shock or impact on
nominal power factor =
the panel without
0.96
operating
Output Contacts
Shock Bump
Make and carry 1250VAa.c. or 1250Wd.c.

continuously IEC 255-21-2 Class 1 severity
within the limits of 660V and
BS142, sub-section 1.5.2. Class 1 severity
5A
(1989)
Make and carry for 3 7500VAa.c. or 7500Wd.c.
seconds within the limits of 660Vand
30A Mechanical Life
Breaking Capacity
( ≤ 5 A and ≤ 250 V): Durability in excess of 10,000
AC Resistive 1250 VA operations with the contact
DC Resistive 100 W rating at a rate of 600
DC Inductive 50 W L/R = 40ms operations per hour
Minimum number of
1000 at maximum load
operations
Minimum recommended
0.5 Watt limits 10mA or 5V
Environmental
load
Temperature
Electrical Tests IEC 68-2-1/2

Insulation
IEC 60255-5 RMS levels for 1 minute
Humidity
Between contacts to earth 2.0 kV IEC 68-2-3
and to the coil
Between any case terminal 2.0 kV Operational test 56 days at 40 °C and 95%
and earth RH
Between case terminals of 2.0 kV
Across normally open 1.0 kV
Performance
contacts
Instantaneous Operating time
Typically 25ms
Range 10ms to 50ms

Case Dimensions

Connection Diagram 7PG11 AR
Fig 3. Connection Diagrams

Ordering Information – 7PG111 AR
Auxiliary relay (AR101, AR103) 7 P G 1 1 □▲ □▲ - □▲ □▲ □▲ □▲ □▲ - □▲ □▲ □▲ □▲

A.C. or D.C. voltage operated | | | | | | | | | | |
relay. | | | | | | | | | | |
Number of elements | | | | | | | | | | |
Single element 1 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
No flag 0 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Contact operation | | | | | | | | |
Self reset contacts 1 | | | | | | | |
Hand and electrical reset contacts 3 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
Contact arrangement – NO | | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | | |
7 NO H | | | | | | |
8 NO J | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
Contact arrangement NC | | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Number of contacts 2) | | | | | |
Two 0 | | | | |
Four 1 | | | | |
Six 3 | | | | |
Eight 5 | | | | |
| | | | |
Contact type 1) | | | | |
NO (Standard) / NC (Standard) 0 | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
No additional time delay 0 | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
Case size E2 (4U high) A | |

Auxiliary relay (AR101, AR103) 7 P G 1 1 □□ - □□□□□ - □□□□

▲ ▲
(continued from previous page) | |
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
63.5V AC J 0
110V AC K 0
220V AC L 0
240V AC M 0
|
Back emf suppression diode |
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1
1) Heavy duty contact arrangements available at extra cost. Please see separate non-MLFB list for already defined heavy duty contact arrangements. For arrangements not listed
there please contact the factory.
2) Number of contacts must match selected contact arrangement

Auxiliary relay (AR101T) 7 P G 1 1 □□ - □□□□□ - □□□□

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
D.C. voltage operated relay. | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
Single element 1 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
No flag 0 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | | | | |
Four 3) 1 | | | | |
Six 4) 3 | | | | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
T1 (up to 100ms) - Delay on de-energisation 1 | | |
T2 (101 to 200ms) - Delay on de-energisation 2 | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
|
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1
3) Four contact arrangements may only have a time delay of T1, T2 or T3
4) Six contact arrangements may only have a time delay of T1 or T2

Auxiliary relay (AR106) 7 P G 1 1 □□ - □□□□□ - □□□□

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
relay. | | | | | | | | | | |
Single element 1 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
No flag 0 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Electrical reset contacts 6 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | | | | |
Four 1 | | | | |
Six 3 | | | | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
63.5V AC J 0
110V AC K 0
220V AC L 0
240V AC M 0
|


▲
(continued from previous page) Back emf suppression diode |
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1


▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
relay. | | | | | | | | | | |
Two element 2 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
No flag 0 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Number of contacts/element 2) | | | | | |
Two 0 | |A| |
Four 1 | | C | |
Six 3 | | C | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
Case size E4 (4U high) C | |
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
63.5V AC J 0
110V AC K 0
220V AC L 0
240V AC M 0
|

Auxiliary relay (AR201) 7 P G 1 1 □ □ - □ □ □ □ □ - □ □ □ □▲

Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1


▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
| | | | | | | | | | |
Two element 2 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
No flag 0 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | |A| |
Four 3) 1 | | C | |
Six 4) 3 | | C | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
|
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1


▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
A.C. or D.C. voltage operated. | | | | | | | | | | |
relay | | | | | | | | | | |
Single element 1 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
Hand reset flag 1 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Hand reset contacts 2 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | | |
7 NO H | | | | | | |
8 NO J | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | | | | |
Four 1 | | | | |
Six 3 | | | | |
Eight 5 | | | | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |


▲ ▲
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
63.5V AC J 0
110V AC K 0
220V AC L 0
240V AC M 0
|
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1


▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
| | | | | | | | | | |
Single element 1 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
Hand reset flag 1 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | | | | |
Four 3) 1 | | | | |
Six 4) 3 | | | | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
|
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1


▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
| | | | | | | | | | |
Single element 1 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
Hand reset flag 1 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | | | | |
Four 1 | | | | |
Six 3 | | | | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
T6 (50ms max) - Delay on energisation 6 | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
|
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1

Auxiliary relay (AR112SB) 7 P G 1 1 □□ - □□□□□ - □□□□

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
D.C. voltage operated relay with | | | | | | | | | | |
series break contact to reduce | | | | | | | | | | |
relay burden to zero after Number of elements | | | | | | | | | | |
operation. Single element 1 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
Hand reset flag 1 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | | |
7 NO H | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | | | | |
Four 1 | | | | |
Six 3 | | | | |
Eight 5 | | | | |
| | | | |
NO (Standard) / NC (Standard / 1 SB) 4 | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |


▲ ▲
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
63.5V AC J 0
110V AC K 0
220V AC L 0
240V AC M 0
|
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1
1) One NO contact allocated for series break



▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
relay | | | | | | | | | | |
Single element 1 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
Hand reset flag 1 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | | |
7 NO H | | | | | | |
8 NO J | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Four 1 | | | | |
Six 3 | | | | |
Eight 5 | | | | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |


▲ ▲
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
63.5V AC J 0
110V AC K 0
220V AC L 0
240V AC M 0
|
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1


▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
relay | | | | | | | | | | |
Single element 1 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
Hand reset flag 1 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Hand and self reset contacts 4 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Four 1 | | | | |
Six 3 | | | | |
| | | | |
NO (Self Reset) / NC (Self Reset / 2 Hand Reset) 1 | | | |
NO (Self Reset / 2 Hand Reset) / NC (Self Reset) 2 | | | |
NO (Self Reset / 1 Hand Reset) / NC (Self Reset / 1 Hand Reset) 3 | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
63.5V AC J 0
110V AC K 0
220V AC L 0
240V AC M 0
|


▲
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1
1) Hand reset contacts are fitted as 2NO, 2NC or 1NO/1NC, remaining contacts are self reset in any combination


▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
relay | | | | | | | | | | |
Two element 2 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
Hand reset flag 1 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Hand reset contacts 2 | | | | | C | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | |A| |
Four 1 | | C | |
Six 3 | | C | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
63.5V AC J 0
110V AC K 0
220V AC L 0
240V AC M 0
|


▲
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1


▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
| | | | | | | | | | |
Two element 2 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
Hand reset flag 1 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | | | | |
Four 3) 1 | | C | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
|
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1


▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
| | | | | | | | | | |
Two element 2 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
Hand reset flag 1 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | | | | |
Four 1 | | C | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
T6 (50ms max) - Delay on energisation 6 | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
|
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1
1) Heavy duty contact arrangements available at extra cost. Refer Please see separate non-MLFB list for already defined heavy duty contact arrangements. For arrangements not
listed there please contact the factory.


▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
D.C. voltage operated relay with | | | | | | | | | | |
series break contact to reduce | | | | | | | | | | |
relay burden to zero after. Number of elements | | | | | | | | | | |
operation Two element 2 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
Hand reset flag 1 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | | | | |
Four 1 | | | | |
Six 3 | | | | |
| | | | |
NO (Standard) / NC (Standard / 1 SB) 4 | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
63.5V AC J 0
110V AC K 0
220V AC L 0
240V AC M 0
|
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1
1) One NO contact allocated for series break



▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
relay | | | | | | | | | | |
Single element 1 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
Hand reset reverse acting flag 2 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | | |
7 NO H | | | | | | |
8 NO J | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | | | | |
Four 1 | | | | |
Six 3 | | | | |
Eight 5 | | | | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |


▲ ▲
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
63.5V AC J 0
110V AC K 0
220V AC L 0
240V AC M 0
|
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1


▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
| | | | | | | | | | |
Single element 1 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | | | | |
Four 3) 1 | | | | |
Six 4) 3 | | | | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
|
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1


▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
relay | | | | | | | | | | |
Single element 1 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Hand and self reset contacts 4 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Four 1 | | | | |
Six 3 | | | | |
| | | | |
NO (Self Reset) / NC (Self Reset / 2 Hand Reset) 1 | | | |
NO (Self Reset / 2 Hand Reset) / NC (Self Reset) 2 | | | |
NO (Self Reset / 1 Hand Reset) / NC (Self Reset / 1 Hand Reset) 3 | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
63.5V AC J 0
110V AC K 0
220V AC L 0
240V AC M 0
|
(Continued on following page)


▲
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1
1) Hand reset contacts are fitted as 2NO, 2NC or 1NO/1NC, remaining contacts are self reset in any combination


▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
relay Number of elements | | | | | | | | | | |
Two element 2 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | |A| |
Four 1 | | C | |
Six 3 | | C | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
63.5V AC J 0
110V AC K 0
220V AC L 0
240V AC M 0
|
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1


▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
| | | | | | | | | | |
Two element 2 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | | | | |
Four 3) 1 | | C | |
Six 4) 3 | | C | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
|
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1


▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
relay. | | | | | | | | | | |
Single element 1 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
Self reset flag 3 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | | | | |
Four 1 | | | | |
Six 3 | | | | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
63.5V AC J 0
110V AC K 0
220V AC L 0
240V AC M 0
|


▲
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1


▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
| | | | | | | | | | |
Single element 1 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
Self reset flag 3 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | | | | |
Four 3) 1 | | | | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
|
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1
3) Four contact arrangements may only have a time delay of T1 or T 2


relay | | | | | | | | | | |
Single element 1 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
Self reset flag 3 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | | |
7 NO H | | | | | | |
8 NO J | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | | | | |
Four 1 | | | | |
Six 3 | | | | |
Eight 5 | | | | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |


▲ ▲
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
63.5V AC J 0
110V AC K 0
220V AC L 0
240V AC M 0
|
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1


▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
relay | | | | | | | | | | |
Two element 2 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
Self reset flag 3 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | |A| |
Four 1 | | C | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
63.5V AC J 0
110V AC K 0
220V AC L 0
240V AC M 0
|
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1


▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
| | | | | | | | | | |
Two element 2 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
Self reset flag 3 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | | | | |
Four 3) 1 | | C | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
|
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1
3) Four contact arrangements may only have a time delay of T1 or T2


▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
relay | | | | | | | | | | |
Single element 1 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
Self reset reverse acting flag 4 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | | | | |
Four 1 | | | | |
Six 3 | | | | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
63.5V AC J 0
110V AC K 0
220V AC L 0
240V AC M 0
|
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1


▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
| | | | | | | | | | |
Single element 1 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | | | | |
Four 3) 1 | | | | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
|
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1
3) Four contact arrangements may only have a time delay of T1 or T 2


▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
relay. | | | | | | | | | | |
Two element 2 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | |A| |
Four 1 | | C | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
63.5V AC J 0
110V AC K 0
220V AC L 0
240V AC M 0
|
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1


▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
| | | | | | | | | | |
Two element 2 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | | | | |
Four 3) 1 | | C | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Time delay | | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
Voltage rating | |
12V DC A |
24V DC B |
30V DC C |
50V DC D |
60V DC E |
125V DC F |
220V DC G |
240V DC H |
|
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1
3) Four contact arrangements may only have a time delay of T1 or T2

Reyrolle
Protection
Devices
7PG13 – MR
Measuring Relay
Answers for energy

7PG13 – MR
Measuring Relay
Adjustable using a 7 step plug bridge.
0.1A to 0.4A
0.5A to 2A
Burden – Typically 3VA at the setting.

Thermal withstand (continuous) 2 x Is
Accuracy Is +5%
Contact arrangements
MR101 and MR111 2NO, 2NO + 2NC or 4NO
MR102 & MR112 2NO, 2NO +2NC or 4NO
Contact ratings
Make and carry continuously:

1250VAa.c or 1250Wd.c. with limits of 660V and 5A
Make and carry for 3 seconds:

7500VAa.c. with limits of 660V and 30A
Description
Break:
1250VA a.c. or 100W resistive d.c. or 50W inductive (L/R =
Type MR relays use the same electro-mechanical assemblies 0.04) d.c. with limits of 250V and 5A
as type AR family of relays with a specific operating point.
Type MR relays have a consistent positive action, a long ser- Indication MR111 and MR112
vice life and comply with BS142. The types MR111 and MR112 has a mechanically operated
hand reset flag.
Model range a.c. current
MR101 Single element, no flag, self reset contacts Environmental

MR111 Single element, hand reset flag, self reset contacts
MR102 Single element, no flag, self reset contacts
Temperature IEC 68-2-1 & 2
MR112 Single element, hand reset flag, self reset contacts
Operating -10ºC to +55ºC
Storage -25ºC to +70ºC
Application Humidity IEC 68-2-3
56 day s at 95% RH and
+40ºC
Type MR relays are intended for use where a precise level of Vibration IEC 255-21-2
a.c. current is required to operate the relay. Type MR relays
are robust and reliable in operation, suitable for instantane- The relays comply with the requirements of BS142, section
ous overcurrent or earth fault protection and/or in conjunc- 1.5.11 1989, class 1
tion with other protection systems or plant. Shock and bump IEC 255-21-2
Easy to test and maintain Relays meet the requirements with respect to shock and
Fixed or plug bridge settings bump testing for class 1 severity.
Operational/Mechanical Life
Technical information
Relays will withstand in excess of 10,000 operations
Fixed settings (MR101, MR111) Is Insulation: IEC 255-5
Fixed setting relays are factory-set to a specific operating Relays will withstand:
point 5kV 1.2/50μs 0.5j between all terminals and case earth and
(Where a range is shown this indicates the relay coil operat- between adjacent terminals.
ing range.) 2kV rms 50HZ for 1 minute between all case terminals con-
0.1A 0.2A nected together and the case earth and between independ-
0.25A to 0.33A 0.4A to 0.5A ent circuits.
0.8A to 1.0A 2A to 2.5A 1kV rms 50HZ for 1 minute across normally open contacts.
5A
Variable setting (MR102 & MR112) Is

Ordering information – 7PG13MR
Measuring relay (MR101, MR111) 7 P G 1 3 □□ - □□□□□ - 0 □□ 0

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Measuring relay for a.c. current, | | | | | | | | |
operation fixed setting. | | | | | | | | |
Number of elements | | | | | | | | |
Single element 1 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | |
No flag 0 | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
Setting type | | | | | | |
Fixed 1 | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Contact arrangement – NO | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | |
| | | | |
Contact arrangement NC | | | | |
0 NC A | | | |
1 NC B | | | |
2 NC C | | | |
3 NC D | | | |
4 NC E | | | |
| | | |
Number of contacts 1) | | | |
Two 0 | | |
Four 1 | | |
| | |
Contact type | | |
NO (Standard) / NC (Standard) 0 | |
| |
Housing size | |
|
Current setting |
0.1 A A
0.2 A B
0.25 A to 0.33 A C
0.4 A to 0.5 A D
0.8 A to 1.0 A E
2.0 A to 2.5 A F
5.0 A G

Ordering information – 7PG13MR
Measuring relay (MR102, MR112) 7 P G 1 3 □ □ - □ □□□□ - 0 □ □ 0

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Measuring relay for a.c. current, | | | | | | | | |
operation variable setting. | | | | | | | | |
Number of elements | | | | | | | | |
Single element 1 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | |
No flag 0 | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
Setting type | | | | | | |
Variable with plug bridge 2 | | | | | |
| | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | |
| | | | |
0 NC A | | | |
2 NC C | | | |
| | | |
Number of contacts 1) | | | |
Two 0 | | |
Four 1 | | |
| | |
Contact type | | |
| |
Housing size | |
|
Current setting |
0.1 A to 0.4 A (7 steps) H
0.5 A to 2.0 A (7 steps) J
1.0 A to 4.0 A (7 steps) K
1) Number of contacts must match selected contact arrangemen

Reyrolle
Protection
Devices
7PG15 - TR Relays
High Speed Tripping
Answers for energy

7PG15 - TR Relays
High Speed Tripping
Low burden relay, TR312
Designed to meet the requirements of NGC specification

P15, this is an electrically reset relay (no flag indicator) with
additional terminals in the economy circuit to enable a direct
connection to the dc supply.
This arrangement allows a reduction in the break duty of the

initiating contact.
Switching Relay, TR431
Designed to meet the requirements of NGC TDM 5/11, this is

an electrically reset relay with a flag indicator which follows
the contact operation. These relays are intended to switch
protection and auto reclose equipment in and out of service
when controlled over pilot wires from a remote point. They
are intended to operate from a remote 50V d.c. battery with
a pilot loop resistance of up to 200 ohms.
Description Protection unstabilising relay, TR512
Designed to meet the requirements of NGC specification

Type TR relays are a range of multi-contact attracted P11, this is a self reset relay without a flag indicator.
armature relays designed to both IEC 255-5 and to BS142. A
wide range of models is available to meet the requirements Special purpose relays, TR9 series
of the electric supply industry.
This designation identifies TR relays designed to meet a
High speed, positive action special purpose e.g. TR901 is a high burden repeat relay, a
Can be supplied in modular and drawout type case type TR231 with a 2 position flag indicator used as a plant
Robust design for a long, reliable service life follower relay for circuit breakers and disconnectors.
TR1 Low burden to ESI 48-4 EB1 & NGTS

3.6.15, ESI 1.
TR2 High burden to ESI 48-4 EB2 & NGTS 3.6.15,
ESI 2
TR312 NGC (CEGB) P15. (low burden trip relay)
TR431 NGC (CEGB) TDM 5/11. (switching relay)
TR512 NGC (CEGB) P11 1978. (unstabilising relay)
Low burden, TR1 series
Type TR1 relays are suitable for application for tripping and
auxiliary duties where immunity to capacitance discharge is
not required. These relays are not intended for use with
current operated series follower relays.
High burden, TR2 series
High burden relays with immunity to capacitance discharge

currents. They are also suitable for certain applications
where they are remote from the initiation signal.
A high burden also permits reliable operation of current

operated series repeat relays. TR relays can be provided with
an instantaneous or time-delayed cut-off.

Relay Type Number of Contact Reset Operating Coil Cut-off Specification Burden Modular
Contacts Arrangement Level Case
Size
TR112 7 or 11 Self Economy EB1 low E
TR121 7 or 11 Hand Instantaneous EB1 Low E
TR131 6 or 10 Electrical Instantaneous EB1 Low E
TR141 6 or 10 Hand & electrical Instantaneous EB1 Low E
TR212 6 or 10 Self Economy EB2 High E
TR214 5 or 10 Self Economy 25 delayed EB2 High E

reset
TR221 7 or 11 Hand Instantaneous EB2 High E
TR223 7 or 11 Hand 40/60ms delay EB2 High E
TR231 6 or 10 Electrical Instantaneous EB2 High E
TR233 6 or 10 Electrical 40/60ms delay EB2 High E
TR241 6 or 10 Hand & electrical Instantaneous EB2 High E
TR243 6 or 10 Hand & electrical 40/60ms delay EB2 High E
TR312 5 Self Economy NGC P15 Low E
TR431 7 Electrical Instantaneous NGC TDM.5/11 Low E
TR512 6 Self Economy NGC P11 High E
TR901 10 electrical Instantaneous EB2 High E
Table 1 Standard Relays

Technical Information Environmental
TR1 and TR2 relays Temperature

IEC68-2-1/2 and BS2011 (1977)
Operating time 10ms at rated voltage Operating -10°C to +55°C
Rated voltage Vn 24V, 30V, 48V, 125V, 240V d.c. Storage -25°C to +70°C
Note: 24V and 240V ratings are not part of ESI 48-4 Humidity IEC 68-2-3
56 days at 95% RH and 40°C
Operating range 50% to 120% of rated voltage Vibration IEC 255-21-1 Class l.
Operating coils of self-reset and economy cut-off relays are
rated at 120% of rated voltage. All other operate and reset Shock and bump
coils are short time rated well in excess of the operating IEC 255-21-2 and BS142, 1.5.2 (1989)
time of their cut-off contacts. Self-reset relays will reset at
not less than 5% rated voltage. Relays meet the requirements with respect to shock and
bump testing for Class 1 severity.
Nominal burdens
Operational/Mechanical life
BURDEN (W)
Rated voltage V d.c. TR1-- TR2-- Relays will withstand in excess of 10,000 operations, within
30 43 43 the maximum contact loading specified.
48 46 52
125 47 127 Insulation
Reset coil 50 50
Relays will withstand:
• 5kV 1.2/50µs waveform as IEC 255-4
Relays with economy circuits reduce to approximately 7W • 2kV rms 50Hz for 1minute (2.5kV for 1s) between
after operation. all terminals and earth
• 1kV rms 50Hz for 1 minute across
Contacts normally open contacts to IEC 255-5 and BS142
Ratings
1250VAa.c. or 1250Wd.c. within limits of 660V and 5A
Make and carry for 3 seconds:

7500VAa.c. or 7500Wd.c. within limits of 660V and 30A
Break:
1250VAa.c. or 100W (resistive) d.c. or 50W (inductive) d.c.
within limits of 250V and 5A
Indication:
TR1 and TR2 relays have a hand reset mechanical flag
indicator, TR4 and TR9 relays have a self reset flag indicator.

Ordering Information – 7PG15TR
Tripping relay (TR112) 7 P G 1 5 □□ - □□□□□ - □□□ 0
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Self reset low burden tripping | | | | | | | | | |
Relay. | | | | | | | | | |
TR - tripping | | | | | | | | | |
TR1-- : low burden, EB1 1 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
Operating coil cut-off | | | | | | | |
Economy 2 | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | |
7 NO H | | | | | |
8 NO J | | | | | |
9 NO K | | | | | |
10 NO L | | | | | |
11 NO M | | | | | |
| | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | |
9 NC K | | | | |
| | | | |
Number of contacts 1) | | | | |
Seven 4 | | | |
Eleven 7 | | | |
| | | |
| | |
Type of flag | | |
Hand reset flag 1 | |
| |
Housing size | |

▲
|
Voltage rating |
24V DC B
30V DC C
50V DC D
60V DC E
125V DC F
240V DC H

Ordering Information - 7PG15 TR
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Hand reset low burden tripping relay. | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
TR – tripping | | | | | | | | | |
TR1-- : low burden, EB1 1 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
Instantaneous 1 | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | |
7 NO H | | | | | |
8 NO J | | | | | |
9 NO K | | | | | |
10 NO L | | | | | |
11 NO M | | | | | |
| | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | |
9 NC K | | | | |
| | | | |
Seven 4 | | | |
Eleven 7 | | | |
| | | |
| | |
Type of flag | | |
| |
Housing size | |

▲
|
Voltage rating |
24V DC B
30V DC C
50V DC D
60V DC E
125V DC F
240V DC H

▲▲ ▲▲▲▲▲ ▲▲▲
Electrical reset low burden tripping | | | | | | | | | |
relay. | | | | | | | | | |
TR - tripping | | | | | | | | | |
TR1-- : low burden, EB1 1 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | |
7 NO H | | | | | |
8 NO J | | | | | |
9 NO K | | | | | |
10 NO L | | | | | |
| | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | |
| | | | |
Six 3 | | | |
Ten 6 | | | |
| | | |
| | |
Type of flag | | |


▲▲
| |
Housing size | |
|
Voltage rating |
24V DC B
30V DC C
50V DC D
60V DC E
125V DC F
240V DC H

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Hand and electrical reset low burden | | | | | | | | | |
tripping relay. | | | | | | | | | |
TR - tripping | | | | | | | | | |
TR1-- : low burden, EB1 1 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | |
7 NO H | | | | | |
8 NO J | | | | | |
9 NO K | | | | | |
10 NO L | | | | | |
| | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | |
| | | | |
Six 3 | | | |
Ten 6 | | | |
| | | |
| | |
Type of flag | | |
| |
Housing size | |


▲
|
Voltage rating |
24V DC B
30V DC C
50V DC D
60V DC E
125V DC F
240V DC H

Tripping relay (TR212, TR214) 7 P G 1 5 □ □ - □ □□□□ - □ □□ 0

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Self reset high burden tripping relay. | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
TR - tripping | | | | | | | | | |
TR2-- : high burden, EB2 2 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
Economy 2 | | | | | | |
Economy and 2 second delay on reset 4 | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | |
7 NO H | | | | | |
8 NO J | | | | | |
9 NO K | | | | | |
10 NO L | | | | | |
| | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | |
| | | | |
Six 3 | | | |
Ten 6 | | | |
| | | |
| | |

Tripping relay (TR212, TR214) 7 P G 1 5 □□ - □□□□□ - □□□ 0
▲ ▲ ▲
Type of flag | | |
| |
Housing size | |
|
Voltage rating |
24V DC B
30V DC C
50V DC D
125V DC F
240V DC H
Contact type
NO (Standard) / NC (Standard)

Product Description Variants Order No.
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Hand reset high burden tripping | | | | | | | | | |
relay. | | | | | | | | | |
TR - tripping | | | | | | | | | |
TR2-- : high burden, EB2 2 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | |
7 NO H | | | | | |
8 NO J | | | | | |
9 NO K | | | | | |
10 NO L | | | | | |
11 NO M | | | | | |
| | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | |
| | | | |
Seven 4 | | A |
Eleven 7 | | A |
| | | |
| | |
Type of flag | | |

▲ ▲
| |
Housing size | |
|
Voltage rating |
24V DC B
30V DC C
50V DC D
125V DC F
240V DC H
Contact type
NO (Standard) / NC (Standard)

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Hand reset high burden tripping | | | | | | | | | |
relay. | | | | | | | | | |
TR - tripping | | | | | | | | | |
TR2-- : high burden, EB2 2 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
40/60ms delay 3 | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | |
7 NO H | | | | | |
8 NO J | | | | | |
9 NO K | | | | | |
10 NO L | | | | | |
11 NO M | | | | | |
| | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | |
| | | | |
Seven 4 | | | |
Eleven 7 | | | |
| | | |
| | |
Type of flag | | |
Number of contacts must match selected contact arrangement

▲ ▲
| |
Housing size | |
|
Voltage rating |
24V DC B
30V DC C
50V DC D
125V DC F
240V DC H
Number of contacts must match selected contact arrangement

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Electrical reset high burden tripping | | | | | | | | | |
relay. | | | | | | | | | |
TR - tripping | | | | | | | | | |
TR2-- : high burden, EB2 2 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | |
7 NO H | | | | | |
8 NO J | | | | | |
9 NO K | | | | | |
10 NO L | | | | | |
| | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | |
| | | | |
Six 3 | | A |
Ten 6 | | A |
| | | |
| | |
Type of flag | | |
| |
Housing size | |

▲
|
Voltage rating |
24V DC B
30V DC C
50V DC D
125V DC F
240V DC H

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Electrical reset high burden tripping | | | | | | | | | |
relay. | | | | | | | | | |
TR - tripping | | | | | | | | | |
TR2-- : high burden, EB2 2 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
40/60ms delay 3 | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | |
7 NO H | | | | | |
8 NO J | | | | | |
9 NO K | | | | | |
10 NO L | | | | | |
| | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | |
| | | | |
Six 3 | | | |
Ten 6 | | | |
| | | |
| | |
Type of flag | | |
| |
Housing size | |
|
Voltage rating |
125V DC F

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Hand and electrical reset high burden | | | | | | | | | |
tripping relay. | | | | | | | | | |
TR - tripping | | | | | | | | | |
TR2-- : high burden, EB2 2 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | |
7 NO H | | | | | |
8 NO J | | | | | |
9 NO K | | | | | |
10 NO L | | | | | |
| | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | |
| | | | |
Six 3 | | A |
Ten 6 | | A |
| | | |
| | |
Type of flag | | |
| |
Housing size | |
|
Voltage rating |
24V DC B
30V DC C
50V DC D
125V DC F
240V DC H

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Hand and electrical reset high burden | | | | | | | | | |
tripping relay. | | | | | | | | | |
TR - tripping | | | | | | | | | |
TR2-- : high burden, EB2 2 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
40/60ms delay 3 | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | |
7 NO H | | | | | |
8 NO J | | | | | |
9 NO K | | | | | |
10 NO L | | | | | |
| | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | |
| | | | |
Six 3 | | | |
Ten 6 | | | |
| | | |
| | |
Type of flag | | |
| |
Housing size | |
|
Voltage rating |
125V DC F

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Self reset low burden tripping relay. | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
TR - tripping | | | | | | | | | |
TR3-- : low burden, CEGB spec. P15 3 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
Economy 2 | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | |
| | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | |
| | | | |
Five 2 | | | |
| | | |
| | |
Type of flag | | |
No flag 0 | |
| |
Housing size | |
|
Voltage rating |
125V DC F

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Electrical reset low burden tripping | | | | | | | | | |
relay. | | | | | | | | | |
TR - tripping | | | | | | | | | |
TR4-- : low burden, CEGB spec. TDM 5/11 4 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | |
7 NO H | | | | | |
8 NO J | | | | | |
| | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | |
| | | | |
Seven 4 | | | |
Eight 5 | | | |
| | | |
| | |
Type of flag | | |
Self reset flag 2) 3 | |
| |
Housing size | |
|
Voltage rating |
50 / 125V DC N

2) Flag indication "IN" and "OUT"

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Self reset high burden unstabilising | | | | | | | | | |
relay. | | | | | | | | | |
TR - tripping | | | | | | | | | |
TR5-- : high burden, CEGB spec. P11 5 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
Economy 2 | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | |
| | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | |
| | | | |
Six 3 | | | |
| | | |
| | |
Type of flag | | |
No flag 0 | |
| |
Housing size | |
|
Voltage rating |
50V DC D
125V DC F

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Electrical reset high burden repeat | | | | | | | | | |
relay. | | | | | | | | | |
TR - tripping | | | | | | | | | |
TR9-- : high burden, EB2 6 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | |
7 NO H | | | | | |
8 NO J | | | | | |
9 NO K | | | | | |
10 NO L | | | | | |
| | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | |
5 NC F | | | | |
6 NC G | | | | |
7 NC H | | | | |
8 NC J | | | | |
| | | | |
Ten 6 | | | |
| | | |
| | |
Type of flag | | |
Self reset flag 1) 3 | |
| |
Housing size | |
|
Voltage rating |
50V DC D
125V DC F
1) Flag indication "OPEN" and "CLOSED"

Reyrolle
Protection
Devices
7PG17 - XR
Intertripping, Interposing, Supervision and Special Purpose Relays.
Answers for energy

7PG17 – XR101 & XR102
Intertripping Relay
Contact arrangement
XR101 – 2 normally open self reset
XR102 – 3 normally open and 1 normally closed self reset
Contracting
Make and carry continuously

1250VAa.c. or 1250Wd.c. within the limits of 660V and 5A
Make and carry for 3 seconds

7500VAa.c. or 7500Wd.c. within the limits of 660Vand 30A
Break:
1250VA a.c. or 100W (resistive) d.c. or 50W (inductive)L/R =
Description 0.04 d.c. with limits of 250V and 5A
Type XR relays are developments for specific applications Indication

from the AR relay range. They are electro-mechanical relays Both relays are fitted with hand reset flags
with a consistent positive action, a long service life and
complying with BS142. insulation
2kV 50Hz rms for 1 minute:
XR101 – This relay is supplied with a loose 1500 ohm resis- Between contacts to earth and to the coil
tor for wiring in series with the coil. The resistor should be Between any case terminal and earth
mounted vertically on a steel cubicle or switchgear com- Between case terminals of independent circuits
partment side sheet. 1kV 50Hz rms for 1 minute across normally open contacts
XR102 – This relay requires a 200 ohm resistor to be wired in
series with the coil. As the resistor is a requirement of the Temptation
overall intertripping scheme detailed by ESI 41-15 Part 5, it In service: -10ºC to 55ºC
is NOT SUPPLIED with the relay. Storage: -25ºC to 70ºC
Mechanical durability
Application Vibration, relays comply with BS142 section 2.1 category S2
Shock, relays will withstand a 20G shock or impact on the
panel without operating
Type XR101 and XR102 are intended for use as intertrip send
and receive relays.
XR101 intertrip send complies with ESI 48-4 Class ES1
XR102 intertrip send complies with ESI 41-15 Part 5 (1988)
Technical Data
XR01 XR02
Rating 124Vd.c 48Vd.c
Operating time 10ms 15ms
Minimum operate current 25ms 10mA
Continuous maximum withstand 143V 60V
at -40 C ambient
Maximum burden (Including 13W 10W
external resistors)
Operating Range 50% to 120% of rated voltage
Thermal withstand
Both relays will withstand 13 times rated voltage for 10
seconds

Fig 1. Connection details
Fig 2. Dimensions of modular size 2 case (all dimensions are in mm)

7PG17 XR105 and XR106, XR205 and XR206
Interposing Relays
Contacts
2 normally open, 4 normally open or 2 normally open and 2
normally closed self reset. Up to two contacts can have a
heavy duty rating by fitting blow-out magnets
Normal duty, contact ratings
Make and carry continuously
1250VAa.c. or 1250Wd.c. within the limits of
660V and 5A
Make and carry for 3 seconds

7500VAa.c. or 7500Wd.c.
within the limits of 660V and 30A
Break:
Description 1250VAa.c. or 100W (resistive) d.c. or 50W
(inductive)
Type XR205 and XR206 are two element versions of the L/R = 0.04, d.c. within the limits of 250V and 5A
XR105 and XR106 respectively with the same performance.
Type XR relays are developments for specific applications Heavy duty contact ratings
from the type AR relay range. They are electro-mechanical Make and carry continuously
relays with a consistent positive action, a long service life 1250W d.c. within the limits of 660V and 5A
and complying with BS142. Type XR105 has no flag indica- Make and carry for 3 seconds
tor, type XR106 has a hand reset flag. Both types are avail- 7500Wd.c. within the limits of 660V and 30A
able with a suppression diode across the coil to reduce the Break, see duty curves over the page
effects of the back emf which occurs on switch-off. Indication XR106, hand reset flag
Insulation
2kV 50Hz rms for 1 minute
Application between contacts to earth and to the coil
between any case terminal and earth
between case terminals of independent circuits
Types XR105 and XR106 are intended for the remote control 1kV 50Hz rms for 1 minute across normally open
of switchgear and associated equipment over pilot wires contacts
with a maximum resistance of 200 ohms. These relays are
designed so that they are not susceptible to certain a.c. Temperature
voltage levels which may be induced onto the pilots wires.
In service: -10ºC to 55 ºC
Storage -25 ºC to 70ºC
Technical information Mechanical durability
Vibration, relays comply with BS142, Section 2.1
External resistor required for 125Vd.c. operation Category S2.
Operating range. With zero pilot resistance
78 to 125% of nominal rated voltage Shock, relays will withstand a 20G shock or impact on the
panel without operating. Operational/mechanical life, relays
With a maximum pilot loop resistance of 200ohm 92 to will withstand in excess of 10,000 operations with the con-
125% of nominal rated voltage. tact rating stated.
Burden Typically 3.7W for a relay with 4 normally open con-
tacts.
A.C. Rejection
For a 48Vd.c. rated relay, typically 110V 50Hz a.c.
Operating time
For a relay rated 48Vd.c. with 4 normally open contacts at
rated voltage typically 30ms. With 200ohms pilot resistance
less than 80ms. Reset time is less than 35ms

Epsilon case Plug-in no. 13 case
1 S2A
2 S1A
3 S2B
4 S1A
5
6
7
8
13 DC
14 DC
Table 1. case terminal numbers
Fig 1. connection details for Epsilon Case
Table 2. normally closed contact location
Table 3. polarity of heavy duty contacts
Heavy duty contacts are fitted with blowout magnets and

are polarity conscious. In Table 3’ +ve’ indicates the terminal
which must be connected to the supply positive.
Fig 2. rating of heavy duty contacts

7PG17 XR152 and XR153
Supply Supervision Relays
age
Drop-off not less than 26%
of Vn
Reset time No less than 100ms when
supply is switched from
100% to 26% of Vn.
Operating current 10mA nominal. (17mA for

24V & 30V ratings)
Burden 0.4W at 24Vd.c. 1.25W at
125Vd.c
Thermal Withstand 1.15 Vn continuously
Indication A flag indicator shows
when the relay is de-
energised
XR152 self reset flag
XR153 hand reset flag
Description
Contact arrangements
2 normally open and 2 normally closed
Type XR relays are developments for specific applications of Or 4 normally open
the type AR relay range. They are electro-mechanical relays Or 4 normally closed
with long service life and complying with the appropriate
requirements of IEC 255 and BS 142. These relays have a Contact rating
low operating current, specific settings and time delayed Make and carry continuously:
drop-off. This latter feature is to keep the relay in the oper- 1250VA a.c. or 1250Wd.c.
ated condition during temporary reductions in the battery with limits of 660V and 5A
voltage, such as those which occur just prior to a fuse blow-
ing or during a busbar fault when many trip relays operate Make and carry for 3 seconds:
simultaneously. Healthy circuits therefore do not give spuri- 7500VA a.c. or 7500Wd.c
ous alarms and the relay effected by the fuse failure provides with limits of 660V and 30A
the alarm and indication necessary for accurate maintenance
attention. Break
1250VA a.c. or 100Wd.c. resistive, or 50W
Application inductive (L/R = 0.04) d.c. with limits of 250V
Types XR152 and XR153 relays are designed to comply with Environmental Information
CEGB and other specification for protection supervision re-
quirements and the monitoring of d.c. voltage supplies. Temperature IEC 68-2-1 & 2
These applications require relays with low operating current, -Storage - 25ºC to +70ºC
visual indication and the ability to initiate a remote alarm. -Operating - 10ºC to +55ºC
Both these relays have mechanical flag indicators which Humidity IEC 68-2-3
show on de-energisation, self reset on the XR152 and hand 56 days at 95% RH and 40ºC
reset on the XR153. Vibration IEC 255-21-1
Low burden The relays meet the requirements of Class 1 for vibration
Versatile design, can provide pre-close supervision response and endurance
Consistent positive action
Shock and bump IEC 255-21-2
Technical information The relays meet the requirements of IEC 255-21-2 and
BS142, sub-section 1.5.2.
(1989) with respect to shock and bump testing for class 1
Rated voltage V n 24V, 30V, 50V, 60V, 125V severity
and 220Vdc
Settings Pick-up 70% of rated volt-

Mechanical life
The relays will withstand in excess of 10,000 operations with
the contact rating at a rate of 600 operations per hour

5kV peak, 1.2/50µs, 0.5J between all terminals and case
earth and between adjacent terminals.
2kV rms 50Hz for 1 minute between all case terminals con-
nected together and the case earth and between independ-
ent circuits.
1kV rms 50Hz for 1 minute between normally open contacts.

7PG17 – XR250 to XR351
Trip Circuit Supervision Relays
XR350 and XR351

Continuous supervision with the circuit breaker in the open
and closed positions and in compliance with the scheme
requirements of BEBS S15 scheme H7. XR350 and XR351
relays also have a contact for pre-closing supervision, where
a circuit breaker is prevented from being closed if trip relays
have not been reset. BEBS S15 scheme H7 is applicable to
trip circuit voltages of 125Vd.c. and 240Vd.c.
Rated voltage V n 30V, 50V, 125V & 220Vdc

Description Operating range 80% to 120% of Vn
Reset time 400ms when supply is
Type XR relays are developments for specific applications of switched from Vn to off
the type AR relay range. They are electro-mechanical relays
with a consistent positive action, a long service life and Burden
complying with the appropriate requirements of IEC 255 and H7 scheme relay burdens are typically:
BS142. Models XR250/251 have two attracted armature
elements, XR350/351 have three. These relays incorporate a
time delay on de-energisation to keep the relay in an oper-
ated condition during temporary reductions in the battery
voltage.
Low burden
Versatile design, can provide pre-close supervision
Consistent positive action Thermal Withstand 1.15Vn continuous
CATION
Supervision of the trip circuit breaker is desirable as a means Indication
of ensuring the integrity to the trip circuit. A flag indicator shows when the relay is de-
energised
There are differing requirements for monitoring a trip circuit, Self reset flag XR250 and XR350
supervision of the trip with the circuit breaker closed, super- Hand reset flag XR251 and XR351
vision with the circuit breaker open and closed and pre-
closing supervision. These XR relays are designed to meet all Contact arrangements
of these requirements and in particular the requirements of Alarm output, 4 in any combination of normally
BEBS S15 schemes H4 and H7. open and normally closed. Pre-closed
supervision, XR350 & XR351, 1 normally open.
Model Range
XR151 and XR152 Contact rating
Trip supply supervision (see separate fact sheet) Make and carry continuously:
1250VAa.c. or 1250Wd.c. with limits of 660V and 5A
XR250 and XR251 Make and carry for 3 seconds:
Circuit breaker closed supervision will initiate an alarm and 7500VAa.c. or 7500Wd.c with limits of 660V and 30A
provide indication with the circuit closed for : Failure of the
trip supply, open circuit trip coil, an open circuit in the trip Ferro-resonance Detector Relay
circuit wiring and if the trip coil should fail to respond to a Break:
trip command. 1250VAa.c. or 7500Wd.c. resistive, or 50W
inductive (L/R = 0.04) d.c. with limits of 250V and 5A

Environmental
Temperature IEC 68-2-1 & 2

Storage -25ºC to +70ºC
Operating -10ºC to +55ºC
Humidity IEC 68-2-3
56 days at 95% RH and 40ºC
Vibration IEC 255-21-1
The relays meet the requirements of Class 1 for

vibration response and endurance
Shock and bump

IEC 255-21-2
The relays meet the requirements of IEC 255-21-2 and

BS142, sub-section 1.5.2. (1989) with respect to shock and
bump testing for class 1 severity
Operational/mechanical life
The relays will withstand in excess of 10,000 operations with

the contact rating at a rate of 600 operations per hour
5kV peak, 1.2/50µs, 0.5J between all terminals and case Fig 1. Typical relay wiring, modular case terminal
earth and between adjacent terminals numbers shown
2kV rms 50Hz for 1 minute between all case terminals con-
nected together, the case earth and between independent
circuits
1kV rms 50Hz for 1 minute between normally open contacts

7PG17 – XR309
If ferro-resonance is induced onto a de-energisation system
the relay will only respond if the amplitude of ferro-
resonance is above the relay element pick-up level 40V a.c.
Relay contacts initiate either an alarm timer or an external
suppression circuit.
When a system is ferro-resonant, only two out of three

elements remain energized, giving an output.
Frequency 50Hz
Rating 110V a.c. Ø - Ø
Continuous rating 127V a.c.
Settings
Pick-up not greater than 40V a.c. 50Hz
Drop-off not less than 25V a.c. 50Hz
Description Relay operation is checked down to 16.67Hz
Burden Approximately 3VA per element

This relay provides ferro-resonance detection as required by Indication None
NGTS 3.15.2. Contacts See Fig. 1
Three attracted armature elements are connected phase-to- Contact Rating

phase via full wave rectifiers. Make and carry continuously:
1250VA a.c. or 100W (resistive) d.c. within the limits of
Under normal healthy conditions, with the system energised 660V and 5A.
or de-energised, all the relay elements will be in unison and Make and carry for 3 seconds:
either operated or reset. No output is given. 7500VA a.c. or 7500W d.c. within the limits of 660V and 5A.
Insulation
Application 2kV 50Hz rms for 1 minute:
Between contacts to earth and to the coil
On supergrid systems the phenomenon of ferro-resonance Between any case terminal and earth
may be experienced following de-energisation of a directly Between case terminals of independent circuits.
connected transformer, and the ferro-resonance may be 1kV 50Hz rms for 1 minute across normally open contacts.
sustained by the induction from an energised parallel circuit.
Re-energising the transformer whilst in a ferro-resonant Temperature
state can risk severe switching overvoltages, therefore where Storage -25ºC to 70ºC
there is such a risk, a ferro-resonance detector relay is In Service -10ºC to 40ºC
essential.
Mechanical Durability
Vibration
Operation Relays comply with IEC 255-21-1
Shock
Relays comply with IEC 255-21-2
The relay will detect ferro-resonance, with the system
Seismic
energised or de-energised, as follows:
Relays comply with IEC 225-21-3
Operational/mechanical life
On system de-energisation, the secondary voltage falls
In excess of 10,000 operations with the contact rating
below the reset level, and all 3 elements drop-off.
stated.
In the event of ferro-resonance occurring two out of three
elements will remain energized

Fig 1. wiring diagram XR 309

Ordering Information – 7PG17XR
Interposing control relay (XR105, XR106) 7 P G 1 7 □□- □□□□□- □□□0
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
| | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
XR relay type | | | | | | | | | | |
Interposing control 3 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Number of elements | | | | | | | | | |
Single element, self reset contacts 1 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | |
No flag 0 | | | | | | | |
Hand reset flag 1 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | | | | |
Four 1 | | | | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Voltage rating | | | |
24V DC 1 | | |
30V DC 2 | | |
50V DC 3 | | |
125V DC 1) 4 | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
| |
Voltage rating (alarm) | |
Not Applicable A |
|
Not Fitted 0
Fitted 1
1) Supplied with resistor VCE:2101H10152 (1500 Ohm) for wiring in series with the coil

D.C. supply supervision relay (XR152, XR153) 7 P G 1 7 □□- □□□□□- □□□0
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
| | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
XR relay type | | | | | | | | | | |
D.C. supply supervision 4 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Single element, self reset contacts 1 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | |
Hand reset flag 1 | | | | | | | |
Self reset flag 3 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Number of contacts | | | | | |
Four 1 | | | | |
| | | | |
Contact type | | | | |
| | | |
24V DC 1 | | |
30V DC 2 | | |
50V DC 3 | | |
125V DC 4 | | |
240V DC 5 | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
Not Applicable A |
|
Not Fitted 0

Interposing control relay (XR205, XR206) 7 P G 1 7 □□- □□□□□- □□□□
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
| | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
XR relay type | | | | | | | | | | |
Interposing control 3 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Two element, self reset contacts 2 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | |
No flag 0 | | | | | | | |
Hand reset flag 1 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | | | | |
Four 1 | | C | |
| | | | |
| | | |
24V DC 1 | | |
30V DC 2 | | |
50V DC 3 | | |
125V DC 1) 4 | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
Not Applicable A |
|
Not Fitted 0
Fitted
1) Supplied with resistor VCE:2101H10152 (1500 Ohm) for wiring in series with the coil

Trip circuit supervision relay (XR250, XR251) 7 P G 1 7 □□- □□□□□- □□□□
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
| | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
XR relay type | | | | | | | | | | |
Trip circuit supervision 5 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Two element, self reset contacts 2 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | |
Hand reset flag 1 | | | | | | | |
Self reset flag 3 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Number of contacts/element | | | | | |
Four 1 | | | | |
| | | | |
| | | |
30V DC 2 | | |
50V DC 3 | | |
125V DC 1) 4 | | |
240V DC 1) 5 | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
Case size E3 (4U high) B | |
| |
30V DC 1) C |
50V DC 1) D |
125V DC 1) E |
240V DC 1) F |
|
Not Fitted 0
1) Supplied with external resistors

Ordering Information 7PG17XR
Trip circuit supervision relay (XR350, XR351) 7 P G 1 7 □□- □□□□□- □□□□
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
| | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
XR relay type | | | | | | | | | | |
Trip circuit supervision 5 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Three element, self reset contacts 3 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | |
Hand reset flag 1 | | | | | | | |
Self reset flag 3 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
1 NC B | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
3 NC D | | | | | |
4 NC E | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Four 1 | | | | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Voltage rating 2) | | | |
30V DC 2 | | |
50V DC 3 | | |
125V DC 1) 4 | | |
240V DC 1) 5 | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
Case size E3 (4U high) B | |
| |
30V DC 1) C |
50V DC 1) D |
125V DC 1) E |
240V DC 1) F |
|
Not Fitted 0
1) Supplied with external resistors

2) Voltage rating for both trip coils

Ordering Information 7PG17XR
Ferro-resonance detector relay (XR309) 7 P G 1 7 □□- □□□□□- □□□□
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
| | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
XR relay type | | | | | | | | | | |
Ferro-resonance detector 6 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Three element, self reset contacts 3 | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | |
No flag 0 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
1 NO B | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC 1) A | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 0 | | | | |
| | | | |
| | | |
110V AC 4 | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
| |
Not Applicable A |
|
Not Fitted 0
1) Contact arrangement 1 NO / 1 C/O per element

Reyrolle
Protection
Devices
7PG23 - 5B3
Restricted Earth Fault
Answers for energy

7PG23 - 5B3
Restricted Earth Fault
reduction in fault setting can occur with the high

frequency currents which may be produced during
switching.
CT Requirements
Experience has shown that most protection CTs are

suitable for use with the high impedance relays and that
where the CTs are specifically designed for this protection
their overall size may be smaller than that required for an
alternative current balance protection. The basic
requirements are:
a) All CTs should, if possible, have identical turns ratios.

Description b) The knee point voltage of each CT should be at least 2x
Vs. The knee point voltage is expressed as the voltage
The relay uses a type B61 attracted armature element applied to the secondary circuit with the primary open
energized via a low pass filter circuit and a full wave circuit which when increased by 10% causes the
rectifier. The relay has a minimum setting of I5V. Other magnetizing current to increase by 50%.
resistors are introduced into the circuit to provide the
voltage setting range up to 270V in increments of 5V c) CTs should be of the low leakage reactance type. Most
using heavy duty DIL switches. Included within the relays modern CTs are of this type and there is no difficulty in
are the essential non-linear resistors to limit the peak meeting this requirement. A low leakage reactance CT
voltage output from saturated CTs, these resistors protect has a jointless ring type core, the secondary winding
the CT insulation and secondary wiring. evenly distributed along the whole length of the
magnetic circuit and the primary conductor passes
through the approximate centre of the core.
Functional Overview
Low settings can be achieved.
Stability based upon plant capacity.
Frequency fn: 50 or 60 Hz
Current Is: Fixed at 20mA
Application Voltage Vs: I5V to 270V in 5V steps
Thermal withstand: Continuous 1.25 × Vs
Accuracy: Vs ± 5%
The 5B3 relay is ideal for restricted earth fault protection Burden: Vs x 20mA
of transformer windings or phase and earth fault Operating time: 45ms maximum at 3xV
protection of reactors and the stator windings of large
machines. Indication: Hand reset flag
Contact arrangement: 3 normally open self reset
This relay may also be used for high impedance busbar Contact rating:
protection. High impedance schemes have the Contacts are capable of making and carrying 6.6kVA for
advantages over low impedance schemes that a more 0.2 seconds with a maximum of 30A. Contacts are
sensitive setting can be obtained without any loss of intended for use in circuits where a circuit breaker
stability and the primary fault setting calculation is auxiliary switch breaks the trip coil current.
simpler.
Current operated schemes are more susceptible to mal-

operations from through faults unless greater care is
taken with the selection of the current transformers. For
some restricted earth fault applications the primary fault
setting needs to be greater at harmonic frequencies than
the setting at the fundamental frequency. The 5B3 relay
uses a low pass filter circuit to achieve this. No adverse

Environmental Stability
Temperature: IEC 68-2-1 & 2

Operating: -10°C to +55°C
Storage: -25°C to +70°C
Humidity: IEC 68-2-3 A or C
56 days at 95% RH and +40°C
Vibration: IEC 255-21-2
B
The relay complies with the requirements of BS142,
section 2.2, category S2 over the frequency range 10 to
800Hz impact. The relay will withstand panel impact
shocks of 20g. Operational/mechanical life in excess of
10,000 operations. Fig 2. high Impedance Scheme
For stability the voltage setting of the relay must be made

Insulation IEC 255-5 equal to or exceed the highest value of V calculated
below:
V=I (Rct+RI)
Relay will withstand: Where:
RI = The largest value of pilot-loop resistance
5kV 1.2/50,µs 0.5j between all terminals and case earth between the CTs and the relay.
and between adjacent terminals. 2kV rms 50HZ for I Rct = The secondary winding resistance of the CT.
minute between all case terminals connected together I= The CT secondary current corresponding to the
and the case earth and between independent circuits. IkV maximum steady state through fault
rms 50HZ for I minute across normally open contacts. current of the protected equipment
Case Fault Setting

Single element Epsilon E3 case. It should, however, be noted that because the operating
voltage of the relay circuit is relatively high, the excitation
currents of the CT's in parallel with the relay may
comprise a large proportion of the fault setting.
Primary fault setting = N (I0 + I1 + I2 + I3)

Where:
I0 = Relay operating current
I1 etc = Excitation current of each CT. at the relay
setting voltage.
N = C.T. turns ratio
A B C D E F G H I
5B3 (size 3 case) 28 27 22 1 3 2 4 5 7
Fig 1. Modular relay case terminal numbers

Ordering Information – 7PG23 – 5B3
5B3 7 P G 2 3 □□ - □□□□□ - □□ A 0
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Single element high impedance | | | | | | | | |
relay, ideal for REF applications. | | | | | | | | |
Relay type | | | | | | | | |
5B3 - High impedance, 50Hz 1 | | | | | | | |
5B3 - High impedance, 60Hz 2 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
Contact operation | | | | | | |
Self reset contacts 1 | | | | | |
| | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | |
| | | | |
0 NC A | | | |
| | | |
Number of contacts | | | |
Three 3 | | |
| | |
Contact type | | |
| |
Setting range 1) | |
15V AC to 270V AC 1 |
|
Housing size |
Case size E3 (4U high) B
1) Relay is pre-set to 15VAC, customer adjustable settings up to 270VAC in increments of 5V provided by heavy duty DIL switches

Reyrolle
Protection
Devices
7PG217 – B69
Overcurrent & Earth Fault Type
Answers for energy

7PG217 – B69
Overcurrent & Earth Fault Type
Ratings (50 or 60Hz) 1 or 5A
Operating time 10ms at 3 times the setting
Continuous rating 1.3 x setting
Setting Ranges
10 – 40% Step 5%
20 – 80% Step 10%
50 – 200% Step 25%
Burdens 3VA at the setting

Description Indication None
Contact arrangements 2 Make per phase
These relays are a.c. operated attracted armature elements

Contact ratings
with an ‘L’ shaped armature pivoted on a knife-edge which
directly operates the self reset contacts.
150 VA a.c. or 1500 W d.c. within the limits of 660 V and
Relays are fitted with a plug-bridge providing a range of 3A. Make and carry 8 A for 3 seconds or 16 A for 1 second.
plug settings.
Break:
Relays are supplied in single pole and three pole 300 VA a.c. or 75 W d.c. (inductive L/R – 0.04s) within the
arrangements, in modular cases. When supplied as a three limits of 250 V and 5 A.
pole unit the center element can be provided with a
different setting range. Accuracy:
Operation within 15% of settings.
Applications Case Dimensions

Relays are available in the following cases:
Instantaneous overcurrent earth fault protection of Single Pole – Size E2 Modular
feeders, or the earth fault protection of transformers. Three Pole - Size E6 Modular
A typical application is for 2 stage overcurrent protection in Terminal Single Three Pole
association with IDMTL relays. A definite time delay relay Ref Pole
can be added to the scheme if required. The relay may be
used as a guard relay for Solkor Schemes. 1 2 3 Refer to the wiring
A 27 23 25 27 diagram supplied
B 28 24 26 28 with the Order
C 1 9 5 1 Acknowledgement
D 3 11 7 3
E 2 10 6 2
F 4 12 8 4
Table 1. Case Terminal Numbers

1 2 3
A B A B A B
C D C C
D D
E F E F E F
Fig 1. Typical Relay Wiring Diagram

(Arrangement looking on front of relay)

Reyrolle
Protection
Devices
7PG221 – BD
Surgeproof Intertrip
Answers for energy

7PG221 – BD
Surgeproof Intertrip
Description Multi-ended intertripping

schemes
The BD relay consists of two component units, the relay unit
and the filter unit. The filter unit contains inductors,
capacitors, and setting resistors encapsulated in a thermo- Multi-ended intertripping schemes often occur in practice
setting resin. The relay comprises a moving coil element and type BD surge proof relays are suitable for such applica-
insulated for either 5kV or 15kV, and an attracted armature tions. In order to achieve optimum performance they should
repeat relay with a hand reset flag. Limiting devices are be operated as near as is reasonably possible to their design
connected across the moving coil to by-pass the initial and parameters. To obtain this two main requirements should be
final peak switching surges fulfilled.
Applications A.C. Requirements - These surge proof relays have been

designed to remain stable with induced voltages of up to
5kV in pilot wires having a loop resistance not exceeding
For the tripping of remote circuit breakers in an inter- approximately 1,000ohms. It is therefore recommended that
connected power system where the fault current may be fed the loop resistance of the pilots between any two feeder
from more than one source. ends, between which induced pilot voltages are expected,
should be maintained within the range of 500 to
Following fault detection and operation of the local circuit 1,000ohms. When determining the loop resistance the pilots
breaker, a d.c. trip signal is transmitted via pilot cables to the at the remote end are assumed to be short circuited. If the
BD intertrip receive relay. These trip the remote circuit loop resistance obtained is less than 500ohms, the resistor
breaker in order to completely isolate the fault. in the filter unit, at the end being considered, may be used
to make the effective loop resistance greater than 500ohms.
Very high voltages may be induced in the pilots, especially
during heavy fault conditions, and the relay must remain D.C. Requirements - In order to ensure satisfactory operation
inoperative to all but the correct trip signal. The BD relay of the BD relays at all receiving ends, the d.c. currents in
caters for transverse voltages up to 5kV rms and longitudinal each receiving end relay should preferably be equal to or in
voltages of up to 5kV or 15kV. Its operating time is unaf- excess of 12mA. The d.c. resistance of the type BD relays, as
fected by induced voltages which may be present at the time seen from the pilots across terminals (P3, R2) is about
of applying the intertrip signal. Any type of pilot cable can 3,000ohms. Using this value the minimum d.c. intertrip
be used, but the maximum loop resistance should not ex- voltage required at the sending ends can be estimated.
ceed 1,000 ohms.

Auxiliary voltage (for repeat relay)

30V, 50V, 60V, 125V, 210/220V, 240Vd.c.
Operating voltage (over pilots)

Rated voltage 50Vd.c.
The relay will operate over a voltage range of 25V to 250V.
Contract arrangements
5kV Models 2 changeover 1V case

4 contacts 1V case
15kV Models 5 contacts 11/2 case
6 contacts 11/2V cae
Indication Hand reset flag
Contact ratings
Make and carry continuously:- 1500VA a.c. or 1500W d.c.
within the limits of 660V and 3A. Make and carry 8A for 3
seconds or 16A for 1 second.
Break:- 300VA a.c. or 75W d.c. (inductive L/R = 0.04) within
the limits of 250V and 5A.
Pilot resistance
Two resistors are provided in the filter unit to adjust the pilot
resistance. Terminals allow the selection of 200, 400, and
600ohms
Mounting
5kV relay may be flush or projecting mounted, however the

15kV relay, to maintain the electrical clearances, must be
flush mounted. The filter unit is suitable for surface mount-
ing on switchgear, inside control cubicles, or on a wall.

Ordering information – 7PG22 BD
BD 7 P G 2 2 □▲ □▲ - □▲ □▲ □▲ □▲ □▲ - □▲ □▲ □▲ □▲
Surgeproof intertrip receive relay (5kV). | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
Relay type | | | | | | | | | | |
BD - Surgeproof intertrip receive 1 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Model type | | | | | | | | | |
5kV with 2 C/O 1 |AA21 |U| |
5kV with 2NO2NC or 4NO 2 | | | 40 |U| |
5kV with 4NO2NC or 6NO 3 | | | 60 |W| |
| | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | |
Hand reset flag 1 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Two 2 | | | | |
Four 4 | | | | |
Six 6 | | | | |
| | | | |
C/O (Standard) 1 | | | |
| | | |
Insulation level | | | |
5kV 1 | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
Case size C1 Vedette U | |
Case size C1 1/2 Vedette W | |
| |
Rating | |
30V DC B |
50V DC C |
60V DC D |
125V DC E |
240V DC F |
|
Filter unit 1) |
Not supplied 0
1) For filter unit please order the following:

Cubicle mounted filter unit – VCE:410A11245, Price €3200

Ordering information – 7PG22 BD
BD 7 P G 2 2 □▲ □▲ - □▲ □▲ □▲ □▲ □▲ - □▲ □▲ □▲ □▲
Surgeproof intertrip receive relay (15kV). | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | |
Relay type | | | | | | | | | | |
BD - Surgeproof intertrip receive 1 | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | |
Model type | | | | | | | | | |
15kV with 3NO2NC or 5NO 4 | | | 5 | | | | |
15kV with 4NO2NC or 6NO 5 | | | 6 | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
Type of flag | | | | | | | | |
Hand reset flag 1 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
0 NC A | | | | | |
2 NC C | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Five 5 | | | | |
Six 6 | | | | |
| | | | |
| | | |
Insulation level | | | |
15kV 2 | | |
| | |
Housing size | | |
Case size C1 1/2 Vedette W | |
| |
Rating | |
30V DC B |
50V DC C |
60V DC D |
125V DC E |
240V DC F |
|
Filter unit 1) |
Not supplied 0
1) For filter unit please order the following:

Cubicle mounted filter unit – VCE:410A11245, Price €3200

Reyrolle
Protection
Devices
7PG223 - TEC
Surgeproof Intertrip Send Relay
Answers for energy

7PG223 TEC
Surgeproof Intertrip Send Relay
Sustained Intertrip
Description Within 10ms the intertrip circuits are closed, this condition
being maintained for two seconds after the initiating contact
The type TEC relay comply with British Generating Board opens. The operation of the circuit is similar to that described
Engineering recommendation M16/2 class EB2. They consist in the pulse intertrip arrangement, with the exception that
of three elements: contactB2 is used to ensure that the time delay relay is not
energised until the type B34 relay is de-energised, i.e. when
(a) Type F relay. the initiating contact IC id opened.
(b) Type B34 relay delayed on energisation.
(c) Type TCD static timing relay. 2 Stage Intertrip
Application Where the intertrip signal applied to the pilots is derived from
a DC/AC inverter or DC/DC converter, such devices may be
Intertrip Send Relay for use where the pilots are prone to damaged if energised unloaded for long periods. Another
high induced voltages. small attracted armature element is incorporated in the TEC
Under fault conditions an interconnected power system may relay so that the inverter or converter is only energised for 2
feed fault current from several sources, and in order to iso- seconds in the ‘pulse intertrip’ scheme, or for the duration of
late a fault it becomes necessary to initiate the tripping of ‘sustained intertrip’. For the latter the signal can be held at full
one or more remote circuit breakers. Remote intertripping of level for 2 seconds then reduced to a ‘hold on’ level provided
circuit breakers requires a fast, multi-contact, intertrip relay that the design of the inverter or converter permits an
capable of withstanding the high voltages which may be economy resistor to be switched into the drive circuit to its
induced in the pilots. output transformer.
Model Range
Four type TEC relays are available:

5kV insulation contacts for pulse or sustained Intertrip.
15kV insulated contacts for pulse or sustained Intertrip.
5kV insulated contacts for 2 stage intertrip.
15kV insulated contacts for 2 stage intertrip.
Pulse Intertrip
The F relay is energised and within 10ms the intertrip contacts

are closed. They are then maintained for a period of two
seconds. When the initiating contact IC closes, the operating
coils of the types F and B relays are both energised, their
operating times are 10 and 100ms respectively. The type F
relay contacts complete the intertrip circuits and the series
contact F1 open circuits the operating coil to prevent battery
drain. Contact F2 Initiates the time delay relay for the reset
operation.
The type B34 relay contacts then “pick-up” open-circuiting the
type F relay operating coil, contact B1, prevent a repeat
operation upon reset. After the time delay elapses contact T1
is closed and the Type F relay resets.

MODEL MODEL
Ratings: 5kV 15kV 5kV 15kV
5kV versions, 30V, 50V, 60V, 125V and 240V d.c. A 10 25 J 5 16
15kV versions, 24V, 30V, 60V, 125V and 240V d.c. B 21 26 K 7 20
Type F relay C 22 27 L 9 28
BURDEN: 15W D 23 33 M 11 31
OPERATING TIME: 10mS E 12 32 N 16 30
F 24 34 O 2 5
Output Contact Arrangement: G 15 29 P 4 9
2 normally open with standard 2kV insulation, H 1 3 Q 6 18
2 normally open and 2 normally closed with 5kV or 15kV I 3 7 R 9 22
insulation to earth and 2 normally closed with 2kV insula-
tion between contacts. NOTE
Where an insulation level of 15kV is required we recom-
Output Contact Rating: mend that relays are flush mounted. 15kV insulation
Make 30A, make and carry continuously 20A. level relays can be supplied for front connection, surface
Break, a.c. (inductive), 2A at 550V. mounting, however customers are reminded of the need
a.c. (non-inductive), 50A at 12V, 5A at 660V. to maintain the 15kV insulation level on all wiring to the
d.c. (inductive), 2A at 110V, 0.5A at 240V relay.
d.c. (non-inductive), 4A at 110V, 1A at 240V
INDICATION: Hand-reset flag.
Type B34 Element
BURDEN: 3W
OPERATING TIME: 100ms. (delayed on pick-up)
Type TCD Element
BURDEN: 12W
DELAY: 2seconds
Case
All models, Vedette size 1½V case.

Information required when ordering:
Model and rated d.c. voltage.
Table 1.
This table only applies for flush mounting relays
Terminal numbers for 5kV and 15kV pulse or sustained
intertrip relays.
MODEL MODEL
5kV 15kV 5kV 15kV
A 10 25 J 9 28
B 21 26 K 16 30
C 22 27 L 12 32
D 15 29 M 2 18
E 11 31 N 4 22
F 1 16 O 6 5
G 3 20 P 8 9
H 5 3 Q - -
I 7 7 R - -
Table 2.
This table only applies for flush mounting relays.
Terminal numbers for 5kV and 156kV 2 stage intertrip
relays.

Reyrolle
Protection
Devices
7XG22 – 2RMLG
Catalogue Sheet
Answers for energy

7XG22 – 2RMLG
Operating Recommendations
The short test finger in position 13-14 on the 2RMLB will
open contacts 13-14 in the test block after the other
fingers have made contact in all other positions.
Description
The range of 2RMLG Test Blocks, housed within an

Epsilon enclosure, offers facilities for monitoring and
secondary injection testing of power system protection
schemes in conjunction with the 2RMLB-S multi-fingered
test plug.
The 2RMLG Test Block has 14 pairs of spring loaded

contacts which are linked to a terminal block positioned
at the rear of the enclosure.
The 2RMLG07 is coded to only accept the 2RMLB-S7 Test

Plug which has connection terminals 21, 23, 25 &
27,internally – For typical application see Fig 4.

Plug which has internal pairs 1&3, 5&7, 9&11 and 15&17
shorted together internally – For typical applications see
Figs 5, 6, 7 & 8.
Fig 1 & 2.
Plug which has internal pairs 1-3-5-7, and 17-19 shorted
together internally. Note: It is important that the sockets in the test plug
(2RMLBS-1) which correspond to the current transformer
Each pair of contacts is normally closed completing the secondary windings are linked prior to the test plug being
circuit through the test block when the associated inserted into the test block.
protection equipment is in use.
This will ensure that the current transformer secondary
For testing purposes the test block can be accessed by windings are short circuited prior to disconnection from
removing the front cover. The 2RMLG 01 has a metallic the protection scheme or relay (as shown in Figure 3).
probe attached to the front cover assembly which when If the dc auxiliary supply is to be used during testing it
withdrawn open circuits the 2 contacts at position 13 and can be linked using the sockets in the test plug.
14.
Operation of the contacts can be monitored by connect-
The main dc auxiliary supply to the protection scheme or ing the test equipment to the protection scheme or relay
relay can be wired to this circuit to prevent inadvertent with the even numbered sockets of the test plug.
tripping of the protection circuit after removal of the If a number of 2RMLG test blocks are connected to a relay
cover and during the test procedure. it is recommended that the dc supply be routed through
each of them to safeguard against inadvertent operation.
The 2RMLG 02/07/08/09 do not include the above facility
and contacts 13 and 14 are normally closed. These
contacts must not be used for current circuits, as the
relevant contact finger on the 2RMLB test plug is shorter
in this position.

Mechanical Specification
The 2RMLG is a size E2 unit in the Epsilon range of Precautions

enclosures. The overall dimensions and panel fixing
details are shown in Figure 10. BEFORE inserting a Test Plug into a Test Socket carrying
current transformer secondary circuits.
The rear terminal block has 28 terminals each with an M4
screw outlet for the attachment of external wiring, fitted ENSURE that the Test Plugs corresponding to the current
with ‘L’ shaped pre-insulated ring tongue terminations. transformer circuits are short-circuited.
2RMLB-S series Multi-fingered test plugs This is to ensure the current transformer secondary
circuits are not inadvertently open-circuited during
The 2RMLB-S series are inserted into the 2RMLG test insertion of the last plug.
socket and is securely retained by means of two knurled
screws. The 2RMLB-SI test plug incorporates 28 test BEFORE inserting a Test Plug to measure current.
sockets, each socket accepting a shrouded or plain 4mm ENSURE that the ammeter is on the correct range and
diameter plug. that it is connected to its test leads
2RMLB S7 with Shorting Contacts

Connections
The 2RMLB-S7 is similar to the 2RMLB-S1 with shorted
contact pairs 21-23-25-27and is coded to be used with
The connections will depend upon the scheme and details
the MMLG07 Test Socket only.
must be obtained from the appropriate diagrams. If it is
necessary to use the d.c. auxiliary supply during testing,
then a test link may be fitted across the sockets in the
Test Plug.
contact pairs 1-3, 5-7, 9-11, 15-17 and is coded to be
used with the 2RMLG08 Test Socket only.

contact pairs 1-3-5-7, 9-11, 17-19, 21-23-25-27 and is
coded to be used with the 2RMLG09 Test Socket only.

Atmospheric environment
Temperature
High Voltage withstand
IEC 255-6: 1988 Storage and transit - 25°C
Insulation to +70°C
IEC 255-5: 1977 Operating -25°C to +55°C
IEC 68-2-1: 1990 Cold
2RMLG 01/02/07/08/09 5kV rms for 1 minute be- IEC 68-2-2: 1974 Dry Heat
tween all case terminals
connected together and the Humidity
case earth terminal.
5kV rms for 1 minute be- IEC 68-2-3: 1969 56 days at 93% RH and
tween any contact pair and +40°C
either adjacent alternate
contact pair, provided the Enclosure Protection
intermediate contact pair is
not used
IEC 529: 1989 IP50 (dust protected)
2kV rms for 1 minute be-
tween any contact pair and
Mechanical environment
either adjacent contact pair
2RMLG 01 only 1kV rms for 1 minute be-
Vibration
tween terminals 13 and 14
when the cover is removed
(e.g. opening the auxiliary IEC 255-21-1: 1988 Response Class 2
supply or trip circuit).
2RMLB-S1 As 2RMLG 01 plus 2kV rms EMC compliance
for 1 minute between in-
coming and outgoing con- 89/336/EEC These products have been
tacts when inserted classified as electromag-
2RMLB-S7 As above with the excep- netically benign and are
tion of terminals 21, 23, 25 therefore excluded from the
& 27 which are perma- European Community EMC
nently shorted together Directive. (89/336/EEC)
2RMLB-S8 As above with the excep-
tion of terminal pairs 1&3,
5&7, 9&11, 15&17 which
are permanently shorted
together as pairs
2RMLB-S9 As above with the excep-
tion of terminal pairs 1-3-5-
7,17-19 which are perma-
nently shorted together as
pairs
Current withstand
2RMLG 01/02/07/08 All contact circuits rated at

20A continuously or 400A
for 1s, ac or dc
2RMLBS1-S9

T Y P IC A L A P P LIC A T IO N O F T H E 2R M L G 0 1 / 2 R M L G 0 2 T E S T S O C K E T A N D M M L B 01 T E S T P LU G
Fig 3.
Fig 4.

Fig 5.
Fig 6.

Fig 7.
Fig 8.

Fig 9.

Ordering Information
Test Modules 7 X G 2 2 2 0 - □A A 0 0 - 0 A A 0
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Modular case test || | |
components (MLG). Category 4| | |
Ancillary equipment 2| | |
| | |
Ancillary equipment 5 | |
Modular case test components 2 | |
| |
Test component type 6 |
Test modules (MLG) 2 |
|
Component type |
Test module in size E2 case (2RMLG01) 1
Test module without open circuit facility between terminals 13 and 2
14 when cover removed (2RMLG02) |
Test module with automatic CT shorting (2RMLG07) 3
Test plugs 7 X G 2 2 4 0 - □A A 0 0 - 0 A A 0
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Modular case test || | |
components (MLB). Category 4| | |
Ancillary equipment 2| | |
| | |
Ancillary equipment 5 | |
Modular case test components 2 | |
| |
Test component type 6 |
Test modules (MLG) 4 |
|
Component type |
Multi finger test plug complete with leads (2RMLB-S1) 1
Multi finger test plug complete with leads and internal shorting links (2RMLB-S7) 3
Test plugs are coded to fit, and should only be used with the appropriate test block

Siemens Protection Devices Limited
P.O. Box 8
North Farm Road
Hebburn
Tyne and Wear
NE31 1TZ
United Kingdom
Phone: +44 (0)191 401 7901
Fax: +44 (0)191 401 5575
Web: www.reyrolle-protection.com
PTD 24h Customer Support

Phone: +49 180 524 7000
Fax: +49 180 524 2471
E-mail: support.energy@siemens.com
Data is subject to change without notification.
Australian Distributor
Relay Monitoring Systems Pty Ltd

6 Anzed Court
Mulgrave, Victoria, 3170, Australia
Phone: +61 3 8544 1200

Fax: +61 3 8544 1201
Email: rms@rmspl.com.au
Web: www.rmspl.com.au

Reyrolle Catalogue: Answers For Energy

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Reyrolle Catalogue: Answers For Energy

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Reyrolle

Answers for Energy

Compact Overcurrent Argus C 7SR11 & 7SR12 1

Multifunction Overcurrent Argus M 7SR21 & 7SR22 2

Multifunction Reclose Controller Recloser M 7SR224 3

Overcurrent Argus 1, 2, 4 & 6 7SG11 4

Check Synchronising Argus 7 7SG117 5

Voltage and Frequency Argus 8 7SG118 6

Multifunction Transformer Duobias M 7SR242 7

Transformer Protection Duobias 7SG14 8

Transformer Voltage Control MicroTAPP 7SG15 9

Pilot Wire Differential Solkor R/Rf 7PG21 10

Line Current Differential Solkor N 7SG18 11

Motor Protection Rho 3 7SG17 12

Auto Reclose and Check Synchronising Tau 7SG26 13

Input/Output with Logic Iota 7SG22 14

Capacitor Bank MSCDN 7SG23 15

High Impedance Differential DAD N 7SG12 16

Distance Protection Ohmega 7SG16 17

Communication Interfaces Sigma 7SG24 18

Auxiliary Relay AR 7PG11 19

Measuring Relay MR 7PG13 20

Tripping Relay TR 7PG15 21

Supervision Relay XR 7PG17 22

Restricted Earth Fault Relay 5B3 7PG23 23

Current Guard Relay B69 7PG217 24

Surge proof Intertrip BD 7PG221 25

Surge proof Intertrip Receive GF 7PG222 26

Surge proof Intertrip Send TEC 7PG223 27

Test Block 2RMLG 7XG22 28

Siemens Protection Devices Limited 2

7SR11 and 7SR12 Argus

Answers for energy

Description User Interface

Negative Phase Sequence

Key - ■ - Included as standard

Siemens Protection Devices Limited 3

7SR12 27/59 Under/Over Voltage

50BF Circuit Breaker Fail

Siemens Protection Devices Limited 4

50 INST/DTL and 51 IDMTL/DTL elements provide overcurrent

50G/51G/50N/51N Earth Fault/Sensitive Earth Fault

earth fault (50G/51G).

IEC or ANSI time current characteristics. The IDMT stage has

Fig 6. ANSI Overcurrent Curves

51V Voltage Controlled Overcurrent

Siemens Protection Devices Limited 5

Standard Version – Plus 79 Auto-Reclose

The function provides independent phase fault and earth

Siemens Protection Devices Limited 6

Siemens Protection Devices Limited 7

Fig 10. Typical Language Editor Screenshot

Fig 9. Typical Reydisp Evolution Screenshot

Fig 11. Typical Communications Editor Screenshot

Siemens Protection Devices Limited 8

Fig 13. User Interface

The operator interface is designed to provide a user friendly

Siemens Protection Devices Limited 9

Siemens Protection Devices Limited 10

Data Storage Type Level

Type Level Variation

Siemens Protection Devices Limited 11

Climatic Tests 37 Undercurrent